The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutAnimal Shelter Equipment Owner's Manuals - RFPANIMAL SHELTER EQUIPMENT OWNER'S MANUALS IMPORTANT DOCUMENT i DO NOT DISCARD Date Manufactured: / 600 Series REY 600 Series WCY 2000 Series REY Is a quality product line of Assembled Products" Corporation 1-800-548-3373 115 E. Linden · Rogers, Arkansas 72756 USA Phone: (479) 636-5776 · Fax: (479) 636-3245 www. assembledp roducts.com CONGRATULATIONS You have just purchased one of the best spray washers on the market today, incorporating the very latest in technological advances To assure you of ~he best and safest performance as well as longest equipment life, please read the enclosed information. After reading the material in this manual, should you have a service problem or need help, please call our toll free number 1-800-548-3373 or (479) 636-5776 TERMS: AI~ parts will be shipped with check in advance or C,O.D Commercial accounts are allowed 15 day terms from date on invoice with approved credit FREIGHT: All freight will be paid by the customer. Special consideration will be given to items under warranty coverage IMPORTANT DOCUMENT -- DO NOT DISCARD Serial Number: Date Shipped: Warranty ............................................. Pg .2 Model Identification and Specifications Pg, 3 Service Requirements Pg, 3 Receiving Pg, 4 Warnings ............................................. Pg 4 Risk of Fire, Electric Shock or Injury ..... Pg. 5 Grounding Instructions ....................... Pg 5 GFCI Pg. 5 Installation Pg 6 Operation Insfructions .......................... Pg 6 Returned Goods Policy .......... Pg 11 ~',]OTES; SMT warrants this machine to be free from defects in material or workmanship for a period of one year from the date of purchase (or 390 days from date of shipment from factory if proof of purchase is missing) to the odginal purchaser excluding items listed below This warranty is limited to repairing or replacing products to the original purchaser, which manufacturer's investigation shows were defective at the ~ime of shipment by the manufacturer, All products subject to ~his warranty shall be returned F.O.B. Spray Master Technologies* ~ Rogers, Arf(ansas for examination, repair or replacement. The warranty set forth herein is in lieu of all other warranties, expressed or implied, including without limitation any warranties of merchantabilgy or fitness for a particular purpose and all such warranties are hereby disclaimed and excluded by the manufacturer, The manufacturer shall not be liable for any further toss, damages, or expenses, including incidental or consequential damages, directly or indirectly adsing from the sale or use of this product. This warranty is subject to the fogowing conditions and limitations. The fei!owing voids all warranty claims on Spray Master Technologies* products: abuse, misuse, using excessive hot water temperatures - exceeding 140 degrees Fahrenheit (60 degrees Celsius), hard water conditions, using bleach as an injected chemical, failures caused by incorrect installation or failure to correctly wire the system at the electrical source. PARTS - SMT warrants this machine to be free from defects in material or workmanship for a period of I year from the date of purchase (or 390 days from the date of shipment from the factory if proof of purchase is missing) to the original purchaser. The following items are excluded: SPRAY GUNS, WANDS, HOSES, NOZZLES These items are covered by the above warranty for 30 days from the date of purchase for defects in materials or workmanship LABOR - to repair or replace defective components shall be covered for a period of 1 year from date of purchase (30 days on excluded items), proof of purchase required [z] SALES & SERVICE - 1-800-548-$$73 300-2837 Type Water: · Flow - 4 gallons per minute (600 & 1100 series) or 5 gallons per minute (2000 series) @ 30 PSI minimum. · Temperature - 140° F maximum, 125° F recommended. · Connection: Hose Bib. Electrical: · 2000 Series: 208-230V/30A (single phase) dedicated circuit with GFCI circuit breaker in main panel and service disconnect at pump. · 600 & 1100 Series: 208-230V/15A (single phase) dedicated circuit with GFCl circuit breaker in main panel and service disconnect at pump. · Damage: Report any damage to the shipping carton or contents to the freight carrier. File a claim with the carder within 10 days if damage is evident, The manufacturer is nat responsible for damage to the equipment caused by the freight carriec · Package Contents: Carefully check the contents of your shipping cartons to ensure the contents agree with the packing list, If any items are missing or if you have any questions, please call our customer service department at (800) 546-3373, or (479) 636-5776. These "WARNING" labels are affixed to your system for all operators to read. If they have been removed or are illegible, please call 1-800-548-3373 for replacement. · WARNING · READ BEFORE OPERATING _, //~ WARNING Note: Labels on this page are not to scale [41 CItEMICAL METERING INSTRUC'I!I ONS CHEMICAL DILUTION: Ou~3ces of Water Per Ounce of Chemical TO CALCULATE AND ADJUST THE CHEMICAL DILUTION FOB A SPRAY MA~TER TECHNOLOGIES CLEANING SYSTEM, FOLLOW THE STEPS BELOW, ~TEP 1: FIND YOUR PUMP GPM RATING ON TH E LEFT-HAND SIDE OF THE CHART. STEP 2: FOLLOW THE ROW SELECTED IN STEP 1 TO THE RIGHT AND; FIND THE COLUMN W THE APPROXIMATE "DILUTION RATIO" SPECIFIED FOR TH E CHEMICAL TO BE USED. (!F THE EXACT DILUTION RATIO SPECIFIED FOR YOUR CHEMICAL IS ROT LISTED, iNTERPOLATE BETWEEN THE TWO NEAREST RATIOS ON THAT ROW) STEP 3: FROM THE MIX RATIO IDENTIFIED {OR INTERPOLATED) IN STEP 2, MOVE TO THE TOP OF THE COLUMN TO DETERMINE THE "CHEMICAL INJECTION:OUNCES PER MINUTE" TO BE STEP 4; FILL A MEASURING CUP (GRADUATED IN OUNCES) WITH THE CHEMICAL TO BE INJECTED AND SUBMERGE THE CHEMICAL PiCK*UP TUBE WiTH FOOT SCREEN INTO THE CHEMICAL, STEP 5; TURN THE PUMP ON AND SET iT TO INJECT CHEMICAL. STEP 6; ADJUST THE CHEMICAL METERING OEVICE SO THAT THE OUNCES OF CHEMICAL CALCULATED IN STEP 3 ABOVE IS ORAWN FROM THE MEASUFUNG CUP DURING A PERIOD OF NOTE: CHECK CHEMICAL METERING REGULARLY TO ENSURE ACCURATE CHEMICAL IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIOF{,~ WARNING - When using this product, basic precautions should always be followed, including the following: · Read all the instructions before using the product · TO reduce the dsk of injuw, close supervision is necessary when a product is used near children, · Know how to stop the product and bleed pressures quickly Be thoroughly familiar with the controls. · Stay alert - watch what you are doing. · Do not operate the product when fatigued or under the influence of alcohol or drugs · Keep operating area clear of all persons. · DO not overreach or stand on unstable support. Keep good footing and balance at all times. · Follow the maintenance instructions specified in the rnanuah · NEVER look directly into a nozzle. Always release the pressure in the high pressure hose by opening the spray gun after machine is shut off, · NEVER allow your unit to run at a pressure above its 'maximum pressure while spraying" as documented in this manual for your model number. (See page 3) · NEVER re-adjust the unloader valve if it has been set by the factory · NEVER turn down the unloader adjusting nut whereby the unloader opening pressure exceeds 100 PSI above "maximum pressure while sprayings" WARNING - Risk of injection or injury - Do nol directly discharge stream at persons. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONSI This product must be connected to a grounded, metal, permanent wiring system; or an equipment-grounding conductor must be run with the circuit conductors and connected to the equipment-grounding terminal or lead on the product. A GFCl is a safety device that protects the operator from electrical shock hazards by disconnecting power from a circuit to a load when a potentially dangerous condition occurs, NEVER BYPASS A GFCh Find out the cause or reason why the GFCI opened the circuit. This may require the services of a qualified electrician. Do not attempt any electrical repairs yourself. This product shall be permanently connected to a dedicated power supply circuit protected by a Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter. This product shall be connected through a service disconnect located at the pump. Installation instructions are contained in a separate manual that is provided with your system · Preparation For Use Oil level: The red dot at the center of the clear sight glass on the end of the pump indicates the proper oil level when the pump is off. Check the oil level in the pump at least once each week Change the initial oil fill after 50 hours running time Thereafter, change oli every 3 months or 500 hours of operation. Water supply: Check the water supply to the system, Vedfy that the valve is fully open, the water temperature is less than 140° F, and the filler is not blocked. Chemical supply: Ensure there is adequate chemical in the chemical supply containers, inadequate chemical supply will reduce cleaning effectiveness, and may cause a loss of pressure, pump cavitation, excessive wear on the pump seals and shortened pump life. ~ Hose and spray gun: Check the hoses and spray gun for leaks and other damage. Leaks will cause tower pressure, pump pulsation and reduced operating life of the pump and unloader · Accessory operation: > Spray gun: The spray gun assembly is connected by quick-connect fittings to the output end of the high-pressure hose. Hold the spray gun firmly with both hands Operate the spray gun by squeezing the gun trigger while directing the hi-pressure spray toward the surface or object to be cleaned. > Dual nozzle selector: The dual nozzle selector is located on the nozzle end of the spray gun and used to select either Iow or high-pressure spray. Selection of the desired nozzle must be made while the spray gun tagger is released. To select the Iow pressure nozzle, rotate the spray gun 90° counter-ctackwise so that the spray gun handle is parallel to the ground with the hose connection extending to the operator's right, then squeeze the spray gun trigger. To select the high-pressure nozzle, rotate the spray gun 90° clockwise so that the spray gun handle is parallel to the ground with the hose connection extending to the operator's left, then squeeze the spray gun trigger. Once the nozzle has been selected and the spray gun trigger held open, the spray gun can be rotated and aimed in any direction without affecting nozzle selection. · Operator troubleshooting - If your system does not operate correctly, check the following items to ensure that the problem is not external to the system. Main circuit breaker is reset and 24V AC lamp in Master Control Panel is illuminated. Water supply to the system is fully open, hose is not kinked and filter is clean Water supply temperature to the pump is less than 140°F. Bleeder valve on wall next to pump is fully closed. Chemical pickup tubes are fully submersed in adequate chemical supply. If the conditions listed above are correct and the system still does not operate properly, call Spray Master Technologies~' Service Department, 1-800-548-3373 or (479) 636-5776, for assistance. · Technical Trouble shooting - If a problem occurs, please refer to the "Diagnostic and Maintenance Chart" in the Express Service Manual If the problem is not resolved, then please call our toll free customer service number 1-800-548-3373 or (479) 636*5776. · Spray Master Technologies® has a nationwide servlce network. Please call us for technical suppod, sales or service at 1-800-548-3373 or (479) 636-5776. · Moving equipment and accessories: Avoid dragging hoses, guns and accessories across the ground or floor during movement to prevent damage and prolong the life of the equipment. · Storage: Flush the pump, gun and hose with rinse water to olean out any chemical residue in the system. Wipe down your pressure washer and neatly store all hoses, cords and accessories, If the pressure washer is to be stored for more than three months, change the oil upon re-entry into service. Properly store equipment so that it does not present a falling or trip hazard. Store equipmenl and accessories in an area that is protected from freezing. Equipment and accessories could hold water after use and may be damaged when it freezes. Any item returned for warranty consideration or for credit must have a RETURN AUTHORIZATION NUMBER. Call ot~r Customer Service Department and discuss the nature of your request. Please note that all items returned must be returned F,O.B. Rogers, Arkansas. No collect or C.O.D. ship- ments wiil be accepted unless prior arrangements with our customer Service Department have been made. A restocking fee may be applied to items for credit that are not under warranty. To reach our Customer Service Department call (800) 548-3373 or (479) 636-5776, or write to Spray Master Technologies", 115 E. Linden St., Rogers, Arkansas 72756. · Anti-siphon/anti-backflow: The float tank and float valves provide anti-siphon/anti-back flow protection for the potable water supply system, and is approved for use by the City of Los Angeles, California (one of the strictest standards in the country), · Line pressure release: The line pressure release feature dumps the pressure in the system any time the pump is turned off to allow hoses, spray guns and other accessories to be connected and disconnected. It also saves time and steps by eliminating the need to manually open the bleeder valve to release pressure. · Bleeder valve: The bleeder valve provides a service pod for the system and manual system pressure re~ease, · Unloader: The unloader feature removes the pressurized load from the pump and motor when the user is not spraying with the spray gun. This prolongs the life of the pump and motor. · Oil - Add oil as necessary to keep the oil level at the center of the red dot on the oil level sight gtass, Check the oil level with the pump "OFF." Use ISO 68, 30 weight non-detergent hydraulic oil only. Change the initial oil fill after 50 hours running period, Thereafter, change oil every three months or 500 hours of operation. · Filters - Replace filter element in the water supply filter assembly as necessary to ensure free flow of clean water to the pumping unit, Clean or reptace the bulb screen filter in the float-tank as necessary to permit unrestricted flow to the input of the pump, · Chemical injection system servicing - Clean the chemical foot screens with warm water to remove chemical build up that will restrict chemical flow. Remove the chemical pickup tubes from the chemical containers and submerse them in a container of warm water. To flush the chemical solenoids, submerse the chemical pickup tubes in warm water and operate the spray gun at a remote station for several minutes with each chemical selected. · Chemical metering ~ To adjust the chemical mix ratio, use a 1/16" allen wrench to turn the nee die-valve set screw located between the mounting screws on the bottom of the chemical solenoids. Chemical metering can be adjusted to the desired mix ratio by following the instructions on the chemical metering chart on page 12 of this manual Note: All user reptaceable items are available from Spray Master Technologies~ by calling our customer service number at 1-800-548-3373 or (479) 636-5776. ~ adjust the spray pattern. Selection of the high or Iow pressure is made by moving the black body of the nozzle toward or away from the gun handle. For high pressure, pull the black nozzle-body firmly toward the spray gun handle. To select Iow pressure, push the black nozzle-body firmly away from the spray gun handle. The spray pattern can be varied from a fan spray to a zero- degree stream. To vary the spray pattern at the nozzle, twist the black( nozzle-body for the desired spray pattern, Warning: Pressurized spray may cause personal injury or injection Never adjust vad-nozzle while spray gun is in operation ) Tornado nozzle: The tornado nozzle is a powerful tool that easily removes the most difficult dirt and grime. The nozzle directs a high-pressure, rotating, zero-degree stream in a high speed, close circular pattern. The circular pattern allows for maximum coverage with the zero-degree stream. Simply aim the nozzle at the surface to be cleaned and squeeze the spray gun trigger, ~ Trap shooter: The Trap Shooter is used to open up clogged drains. To use the trap shooter, connect it to the SMT pressure cleaning system, insert the trap shooter nozzle as far into the blocked drain as possible and squeeze the trigger on the trap shooter gun Warning: Pressurized spray may cause personal injury or in~ection Never operate the trap shooter without the nozzle fully inserted into the drain. The trap shooter nozzle sprays in beth the forward and reverse directions ~ Remote station: The Remote Stations are permanently connected to the main pump system through stainless steel tubing and shielded control cable. The remote station provides remote operation of the pump and chemical injection systems from up to ten remote locations. Only one remote can be operated on each pumping system at a time. In addition, the Remote Station provides a quick connect access to the pressurized water at each remote location. The lights on the remote station's panel indicate the status of the system to the operator. There are five controls on the remote station touch-pad. "ON" - turns the pump on "OFF" - turns the pump off "SOAP"- enables the Soap Injection feature while the pump is operating "SANITIZE" - enable the Sanitize injection feature (if equipped) while the pump is operating, "RINSE" - disabJes both Soap and Sanitize functions. "READY*' - lamp on the remote station indicates that the system is available for use, and not in use at any other remote station. Attempting to operate two remotes simultaneously, will reduce pressure and water flow to both remotes. All other remote station controls are disabled when an operator turns the system on at any one remote station. This prevents operation interference from the other remoras. ) Hose reel: Hose reels for use with a central system are equipped with an umbilical hose and a quick connect to allow for connection to the remote station port. Hose reels are available as portable or stationary wall-mounted units, with 3/8" hose capacities of 75 to 200 feet. Connect the hose reel umbilical hose to the remote station with the quick coupling provided, Connect the spray gun or other accessory to the output hose on the hose reel. Reel off minimum amount of hose to reach the area to be cleaned. Excessive hose in the working area is a trip-hazard and should be avoided. Manually rewind hose after use. ) Hummer JetTM Sr.: The Hummer JelTM Sr. is a fiat surfac~ cleaner for use with SMT 2000 sedes pressure cleaning systems. High-pressure spray is directed by l~o high-pres- sure nozzles rotating at high speed just inches above the surface to be cleaned. Connect the Hummer derTM Sr. to the high-pressure hose and set the control valve to "OFF". Turn the pumping system "ON", open the control valve fully. Move the Hummer JetTM Sr. over the sudace to be cleaned while the high-pressure blasts away the dirt and grime. WARNING: Pressurized spray may cause personal injury ar inlection Never p~ace hands or feet under the Hummer JetTM Sr. body while il is in operation. Keep all four wheels of the Hummer JetTM Sr in contact with the surface being cleaned during operation ) Hummer JetTM Jr: The Hummer JetTM Jr. is a fiat surface cleaner for use with SMT 600, 1100, and 2000 sedes pressure cleaning systems. High-pressure spray is directed by two nozzles rotating at high speed just inches above the surface being cleaned. The Hummer JetTM Jr. is equipped with a detachable easter ring that permits using the Hummer JetTM Jr. with or without casters. The caster ring is easily removed by squeezing the spring-loaded retainer clip and lifting the Hummer JetTM out of the ring. The caster ring is re-attached to the Hummer JetTM by placing one edge of the Hummer JetTM Jr. under the stationary tab inside the caster ring and pressing down gently until the spring loaded retainer clip captures the opposite side of the Hummer JetTM Jr. Casters provide ease of movement for the Hummer JetTM Jr. while detaching the casters allow for cleaning in close quarters and closer to walls and other objects. Connect the Hummer JetTM Jr. to the hose by mating the quick connects. Turn the pumping system "ON" and squeeze the trigger on the Hummer JetTM Jr. handle. Move the Hummer JetTM Jr ever the surface to be cleaned. WARNING: Pressurized spray may cause personal injury or injection. Near place hands or feet under the Hummer JetTM Jr. body while it is in operation Keep the Hummer JetTM Jr in complete contact with the surface being cleaned during operation. · System Operation The "READY" lamp on each remote station is the system status indicator. Check the "READY" lamp on any remote station to ensure that no other user is operating the system. An illuminated "READY" lamp indicates that the system is not in use and is available for operation An extin- guished "READY" lamp indicates that another user is cleaning and the system is not available All other lamps on the remote station (ON, OFF, SOAP, RINSE, SANITIZE), apply only to that remote station and only when it is in control of the system. Step 1: Connect the high-pressure hose or hose reel to the selected remote station with the quick-connects, Step 2: Connect the spray gun to the high-pressure hose with the quick-connects. Step 3: Hold the spray gun firmly with the spray gun tdgger released, Step 4: Press the ON button on the remote station touch-pad. The ON lamp will illuminate on the remote station, the pump will operate and the system will pressurize. Step 5: For Soap application, press the SOAP button on the remote station touch- pad. The SOAP lamp will illuminate on the remote station and soap will be injected into the high-pressure spray. It may require operation for one minute for soap to appear at the spray gun. · System Operation can't. Step 6: WARNINGI Grasp the spray gun firmly with both hands, direct the spray gun at the surface or item to be cleaned and squeeze the spray gun trigger. Risk of electrocution. Do not spray energized electrical equipment or electrical outlets, WARNING! Step 7: Step 8: Step 9: Step 10: Risk of injection or injury - Do not direct discharge stream at persons. For Rinse application, press the RINSE button on the remote station touch-pad, The Rinse lamp will illuminate on the remote station. It may require operation for one minute for the chemical to be purged from the system and clean water to flow out the spray gun. To apply Sanitizer (if your system has this feature), press the SANITIZER button on the remote station. The Sanitizer lamp will illuminate on the remote station and sanitize solution will be injected into the high-pressure spray. It may require operation for one minute for sanitizer to appear at the spray gun. Rinse the surface or item to be cleaned thoroughly. Disconnect and store hose, hose reel and spray gun. NOTE: For systems with down-stream chemical injection (identified by an X or Z in the model number), chemical is injected on Iow pressure only and metered with a chemical metering knob. To select chemical injection, operate the spray gun on Iow pressure. To rinse, operate the spray gun on high pressure, · Water supply sensor (float switch/pressure switch): SMT 600 and 2000 series pumps are equipped with a water supply float switch in the tank that will disable the system should the water supply to it be interrupted. SMT 1100 series pumps are equipped with a watar supply pressure switch that will disable the system should the water supply be interrupted. · Water temperature sensor (thermal limit switch): This product is equipped with a water supply sensor that will disable the system should the water supply temperature exceed 140° F. Excessive water temperature will reduce the life of the pump. · Chemical inhibit sensor (flow switch): All SMT 600 and 2000 series central systems are equipped with a chemical inhibit flow switch that disables the chemical injection solenoids when the spray gun is closed and water is being recirculated back to the float tank. This feature is required to prevent chemical introduction into the tank. EXPRESS SERVICE MANUAL SMT CENTRAL SYSTEMS For Models: 600REY, 600WCY, ll00WCX, 2000REY, 2000WCY Remote Stati~ 11 For technical assistance call: 800-548-3373 or (479) 636-5776 Fax: (479) 636-3245 Spray Master Technologies 115 E. Linden Street Rogers, AR 72756 USA SMT-CSYSEXPRESS-SM-042204-EN Printed in the USA Spedfications are subject to change without notice 1 Section Warranty Model Specifications Express Service Theory of Operation Mechanical Electrical Diagnostic Chart Parts Breakdown/Parts List 600REY/WCY 1100WCX 2000REY/WCY Remote Stations Spray Guns Table Of Contents Page 3 4 5 6 6 8 13 17 17 18 19 20 21 Figure # ! 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Figures Title Simplified SMT Central Pressure Cleaning System SMT Central System Schematic SMT Central System Wiring Diagram Remote Station Control Panel Exploded View, SMT 600REY/WCY Exploded View, SMT 1100WCX Exploded View, SMT 2000REY Exploded View, SMT Surface Mount Remote Stations Exploded View, SMT Recess Mount Remote Stations Exploded View, SMT Spray Guns Page 6 8 9 11 17 18 19 20 20 21 SMT WARRANTY - LIMITED Effective June 19, 2003 SMT warrants this machine to be free from defects in material or workmanship for a period of 1 year from the date of purchase (or 390 days from date of shipment from factory if proof of purchase is missing) to the original purchaser excluding items listed below. This warranty is limited to repairing or replacing products to the original purchaser, which manufacturer's investigation shows were defective at the time of shipment by the manufacturer. All products subject to this warranty shall be returned F.O.B. Spray Master Technologies - Rogers, Arkansas for examination, repair or replacement. The warranty set forth herein is in lieu of all other warranties, expressed or implied, including without limitation any warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose and all such warranties are hereby disclaimed and excluded by the manufacturer. The manufacturer shall not be liable for any further loss, damages, or expenses, including incidental or consequential damages, directly or indirectly arising from the sale or use of this product. This warranty is subject to the following conditions and limitations: The following voids all warranty claims on Spray Master Technologies products: abuse, misuse, using excessive hot water temperatures - exceeding :~40 degrees Fahrenheit (60 degrees Celsius), hard water conditions, using bleach as an injected chemical, failures caused by incorrect installation or failure to correctly wire the system at the electrical source. PARTS - SMT warrants this machine to be free from defects in material or workmanship for a period of 1 year from the date of purchase (or 390 days from the date of shipment from the factory if proof of purchase is missing) to the original purchaser. The following items are excluded: SPRAY GUNS, WANDS, HOSES, NOZZLES. These items are covered by the above warranty for 30 days from the date of purchase for defects in materials or workmanship. LABOR - to repair or replace defective components shall be covered for a period of 1 year from date of purchase (30 days on excluded items), proof of purchase required. SPRAY MASTER TECHNOLOGIES 115 E. LINDEN ROGERS, ARKANSAS, 72756 1-800-548-3373 LOCAL: 479-636-5776 FAX: 479-636-3245 3 MODEL SPECI'FI'CATZONS SERVICE REQUIREMENTS: Water: Flow: minimum 5 gallons per minute @ 30 PS! (3/4" hose bib connection) Temperature: 40° to 140° F (maximum 125° F recommended) Electric: SMT 600 &.1100 SERIES: 115 volt/20 amp or 208-230 Volt/1S amp Dedicated Circuit with Ground Fault Breaker (hardwired) 2000 Series: 208-230 volt/30 amp, Dedicated Circuit with Ground Fault Breaker (hardwired) International: See serial plate on machine. MODEL IDENTIFICATION: The complete model number located on the serial number label identifies the series, type, and operating specifications of the system. Model #: SMT 600 Series SMT 600 SMT 1100 SMT 2000 Type RE Y 22 20 04 0850 -RE = Rack Mount System -WC: Wall Mount System Chemical Injection. Y = Before the Pump X -- After Pump Pump Flow Rate (gallons per minute)' 22 = 2.2 GPM 32 = 3.2 GPM 29 = 2.9 GPM 40 = 4.0 GPM Motor Horsepower 20 = 2 HP Motor 50 = 5 HP Motor Nozzle Size 04 = #4 Nozzle Max Operating Pressure 0850 = 850 PSI 75=#7.5Nozzle 08= #8 Nozzle 1100 = 1100 PSI 2000 = 2000 PSI 4 Express Service If you have a problem, we can solve it QUICKLY and EFFICIENTLY. Your Spray Master Technologies pressure cleaning system has been designed for rapid and easy repairs. Some, you can do, others we will do. With the "EXPRESS SERVICE" program, your machine has been divided into six major component groups. These groups consist of: Group #1: Pump, Unloader, Injector, In/out hoses Group #2: Motor, Switch, and Cord Set Group #3: Float Tank Assembly Group #4: High Pressure Hose Group #5: Spray Gun Assembly Group #6: Accessories and Miscellaneous Parts Like circuit boards on a computer, these groups can be exchanged as a complete unit. The advantage is your savings in time and money. With a toll free call to experienced service technicians at Spray Master Technologies, the problem can usually be diagnosed to one of the six component groups by answering a few questions. The person doing the parts replacement doesn't need to have any equipment knowledge. He/she need only be able to loosen and tighten a few bolts. The "Express Service" exchange program eliminates having an inexperienced person trying to repair a complicated part. If you do your own "GROUP" exchange, you won't be paying for those high labor rates and expensive service calls. With a few basic tools, the defective component group can be removed and replaced or sent to the factory for repair by a qualified technician with minimum downtime. To further expedite the repair, either you or your dealer can stock spare components "groups". However, with express mail services, rarely does it take more than 48 hours to receive a component. This is usually faster and less expensive than many service companies can make a service call. The enclosed information shows all components groups and accessories. Our trained personnel are ready to help. Tf you need service, try our "EXPRESS SERVICE" plan. It will save you time and money. 5 Theory of Operation General Principle of Pressure Washers. Pressure in Spray Master Technologies and most other pressure washers is produced by forcing a fixed gallons per minute (GPM) volume of water through an orifice. The fixed volume of water is provided by a positive displacement pump, which will produce a specific GPM of water flow regardless of the operating pressure. The orifice is a part of the nozzle on the end of the spray gun. The volume of water and the orifice size can be varied, resulting in a corresponding change in the operating pressure of the system. The following paragraphs explain the function of system components and flow sequence in SMT pressure cleaning systems. This brief theory of operation will provide a service tech with information necessary to quickly diagnose and correct any malfunction of the system. Water Flow Refer to Figure 1, Simplified SMT Central Pressure Cleaning System, for the following discussion. The key plumbing components of a basic SM¥ Central Pressure Wash System consists of 1) water filter, 2) water supply float tank, 3) float switch, 4) pump, 5) unloader valve, 6) chemical inhibit flow switch, 7) bleeder valve, 8) interconnecting hi-pressure tubing, 9) remote stations, 10) hi-pressure hose, 11) spray gun/nozzle, 12) line pressure release valve and 13) thermal limit switch. Valve Float Tank RecJrculate Une Valve Swi[ch pressure R~ease Valve Hose Spray gun Figure 1. Simplified SMT Central Pressure Cleaning System The water supply source to the system must provide a minimum flow of five gallons per minute at 30 PSI, and should be filtered through a high quality filter to eliminate contaminates that will cause wear and shorten the life of the pump. The output from the filter enters the float tank through one or two float valves within the tank. The float tank maintains a minimum water source for the pump and is monitored by the float switch. If the water level falls below the float switch, the system is disabled to prevent damage that would occur from running the pump dry. When the pump is in operation, it draws water from the float tank and pumps it out to the unloader assembly. The unloader assembly directs the water through the system to the spray gun if the spray gun is open, or it diverts the water back to the float tank, through the re-circulate path, if the spray gun is closed, l'n addition, the unloader is used to set the maximum operating pressure of the system. From the high-pressure output of the unloader, the water flows through the chemical inhibit flow-switch, past the bleeder valve assembly to the interconnecting high-pressure tubing and out to all the remote stations. The pump can service up to ten remote stations. Each remote station is equipped with a quick-connect port for connection of a high-pressure hose. From the remote station, the water flows through the hose to the spray gun. The water passes through the spray gun when the gun-trigger is activated and flows to the nozzle at the end of the lance. As the water is forced through the orifice in the nozzle, pressure builds within the system. The size of the orifice in the nozzle determines the maximum pressure that can be achieved with the flow rate provided by the pump. The smaller the orifice, the higher the pressure. Most SMT systems are equipped with a dual nozzle selector and two nozzles. The nozzle with the small orifice will produce high pressure, while the nozzle with the large orifice produces Iow pressure. Note: Selecting the correct nozzle size for the system is critical to the correct operation and cleaning effectiveness. A nozzle with too small an orifice will result in less water flow and reduced cleaning effectiveness and may result in too high pressure, overloading the motor. A nozzle too large will result in lower pressure and reduced cleaning effectiveness. During operation, when the spray gun trigger is released, pressure builds in the system until it overcomes the tension on the unloader spring and activates the unloader assembly. When the unloader assembly is activated, it locks pressure into the output line to the spray gun and redirects the flow of water, at Iow pressure, through the recirculate line back to the system float tank. Recirculation will continue until the line pressure is reduced by re- activating the trigger on the spray gun. This unloading feature prolongs the life of the pump and motor by removing the strain on the pump and motor during periods when the spray gun is inactive. Electrical System Theory Electrical Requirements The electrical requirements for the SMT Central Pressure Cleaning system depends on the SMT model installed. Regardless of model, all central systems must be powered by a dedicated circuit with a Ground Fault Circuit Tnterrupter (GFCT) breaker in the main breaker panel and a service disconnect at the pump. Electrical service requirements are: · Model 2000REY/WCY: 208/230 Volt, 30 Amp · Model 600REY/WCY: 208/230 Volt, 15 Amp 115 Volt, 20 Amp (optional) · Model 1100WCX: 208/230 Volt, 15 Amp 115 Volt, 20 Amp (optional) Line voltage to the system is supplied from the service disconnect into the SMT Master Control Panel (MCP) to the input side of contactor K3. Motor Drive Circuit Refer to figures 2 and 3 (schematic and wiring diagram of the SMT electrical circuits). When contactor K3 is energized by the control circuit, the line voltage is applied through the contactor to the motor. The motor starts up, drives the pump and produces water flow. Schematic, SMT 600/2000 Series Central Systems 24V RTN LEGEND Figure 2. SMT Central System Schematic SALES & SERVICE - 1-800-548-3373 WARNING: DISCONNECT POWER SEFORE SERVICING SPRAY MASTER TECHNOLOGIES ROGERS,ARK. 72756 RMT-1 RMT-2 300-2837-05 Figure 3. SMT Central System Wiring Diagram Control Circuits Control circuits within SMT central systems are 24 Volt AC Iow voltage. The control circuits include the 24V AC power circuit, water condition sensors circuit, remote stations circuit, motor control circuit, chemical control circuits and the line pressure release circuit. 24V AC power circuit provides Iow voltage AC for all control circuits. Line voltage to the system is picked off of the contactor line terminals and applied through fuse (Fi') to the multi-tap input of the 24V transformer ('1'1). F1 requires a 1/4 amp slow-blow fuse for 208 and 230 volt inputs, or 1/2 amp slow-blow fuse for 115 volt input. Voltage is applied to Transformer (Ti) through one of three leads of the primary winding. The multi-tap primary leads permit system operation on :115, 208 or 230 volts AC. The 24volt output is routed through 3 amp circuit breaker (CB1) to the 24V AC Power indicator (LI) and the rest of the control circuits. Current flow through all circuits returns to the transformer through the 24V AC return line. The 24V AC is connected to Float Switch (SWl), Remote Station Power Relay (K1), Motor Drive Relay (K2), and to the Line Pressure Release Solenoid (SOL 3). Water condition sensor circuits provide protection to the pump when adverse water conditions exist. The sensors will remove power from the remote stations when the water supply level is too Iow or water temperature exceeds 140° F. Float Switch (SWl) is closed when the water level in the float tank is above the minimum operating level for the pump, completing the circuit through Thermal Limit Switch (SW2) which will energize Relay (K1) and apply power to all Remote Stations (RMT~*). Thermal Limit Switch (SW2) is normally closed. When water temperature within the system exceeds 140°F, Thermal Limit Switch (SW2) will open and remove power from the remote stations. Remote station control circuits facilitate remote operation of the pump and consists of up to ten remote stations (TB! - TB10), five conductor shielded cable and 5-pole Terminal Block (TB1). All signals to and from the remote stations enter and exit the Master Control Panel through terminal block (TB:~). Signal lines to/from the remote are: · Red wire - 24V AC power (out to remote station) · White wire - 24V AC return (out to remote station) · Black wire - 24V AC motor control signal (in from remote station) · Green wire - 24V AC soap control signal (in from remote station) · Brown wire - 24V AC sanitizer control signal (in from remote station) All remote stations are connected in parallel through the 5 conductor shielded cable. Each remote is spliced into the main trunk of the control cable by color matching and connecting the wires at each splice. 10 ON i * SOAP READY RINSE Figure 4. Remote Station Control Panel Refer to Figure 4, Remote Station Control Panel. When power is initially applied to each remote station, the Remote Station Control Panel will power-up in the "READY" state with the indications and outputs as shown. ~ Lamp Control sional Lead/wire Outout sional ON off Motor control Black 0 volt READY on n/a OFF on n/a SOAP off Soap control Green 0 volt ~NSE on n/a SANITIZE off Sanitizer control Brown 0 volt The remote stations will remain in the "READY" state until it is operated with the touch-pad buttons on its control panel or another remote is operated. When the "ON" button is pressed, the "ON" lamp illuminates, the "READY" lamp and "OFF" lamp will extinguish, and 24V AC will be present at the motor control signal output (black wire). The motor control output must be active for either the soap or sanitize controls to be active regardless of what the soap or sanitize lamps may indicate. Note: The motor control lead (black) is both an output and input for the remote station. When any remote station is turned to "ON" the 24V AC out from that remote station is applied to the motor control circuit and to the Motor Control lead (black) of all other remote stations. The 24V AC applied by the active remote station to all other remote stations becomes an "inhibit" input signal. The inhibit signal will force the remotes out of the "READY" state and disable them. ]! The Motor control circuit is the signal control path from the remote station to turn on the pump. When the ON button is pressed on the remote station, the motor control signal (24V AC) is sent through the 5-conductor control cable black wire to Terminal Block (TB1) pin 4 in the I~aster Control Panel. From TB:~-4, 24V AC is sent to the coil of Motor Control Relay (K2). When K2 closes, 24VAC power is applied through its contacts to the coil of Motor Contactor (K3) to turn on the pump motor (M1). Chemical Control Circuits are driven by the remote station circuit boards and control the flow of chemical in the system. The chemical control circuits become functional only when the pump is ON. While the pump is running, the operator may select either Soap or Sanitizer using the Remote Station Control Panel. The Soap circuitry and the Sanitize circuitry operation is identical. When the operator selects Soap, the remote station Control Panel will send 24V AC out the green lead through the 5-conductor cable to Terminal Block (TB:~) pin 3 of the Master Control Panel. From TBI-3 the 24V AC is routed to the coil of Soap Solenoid (SOL 1). SOL1 is connected in series with Chemical Inhibit Switch (SW3) to the 24V AC return. If SW3 is closed, indicating that water is flowing out to the spray gun, the Solenoid is activated and chemical is injected into the flowing water, if the spray gun is closed and the water is re-circulated to the float tank rather than through the flow switch, the flow switch SW3 is open and the chemical solenoids are disabled. Only one chemical control circuit can be enabled at a time. The Line Pressure Release Circuit controls the Line Pressure Release Valve (SOL3) to automatically release pressure from the system, upon turning the pump off. The line pressure release circuit is driven by the normally closed output of t~otor Control Relay (K2). When the pump is turned "OFF" by the control panel, Relay K2 is de-energized, sending 24V AC from the relay to solid state 3-Second Timer (Al) pin 3. Upon receiving the 24V AC signal, A! energizes SOL3 for three seconds to open the solenoid and release any pressure that may remain in the pressurized output lines. SOL3 is de-energized and closes the Line Pressure Release Valve at the end of three seconds, or immediately upon turning the pump back "ON". ]2 Central System Diagnostic Chart SMT 600REY/VVCY, 1100WCX, 2000REY/VVCY =reliminary Checks: Check the following items to ensure that any problems with operation are not ;aused by conditions external to the SMT Central system. 1. Cimuit Breaker in the main panel is reset. 2. Service disconnect at pump is ON. 3. Water supply hose bib is fully open. 4. Water supply temperature is less than 140° F. ~,heck all wiring to ensure all connections are secure and no wires have been damaged. Verity the ~,iring is correct in accordance with the wiring diagram inside the cover of the Master Control Panel VICP). Symptom ISource IReason ICorrective action System Won't Operate System won't operate. 24VAC Fuse F1 open in burnt (failed) 'eplace fuse amp in MCP not illuminated MCP faulty transformer replace transformer T1 faulty 3 second replace timer timer A1 ~horted contactor replace contactor coil K3 !faulty circuit replace circuit board ~oard (RMT-*) ~hort circuit in :orrect wiring problem -~4V circuits 3 amp circuit breaker :ripped reset circuit breaker CB1 in MCP Transformer K3 ~pen winding replace transformer System won't operate. 24VAC Float switch SW1 ~bstructed remove obstruction in float amp in MCP is illuminated but no 'novement ~ank 3ower to any remote stations 3pen contact replace float switch Thermal limit switch Nater too hot decrease water temperature SW2 oose electrical secure connection ~onnection }pen contact replace thermal switch Relay K1 }pen coil or burnt replace relay ;ontact Pressure switch ~pen con~cts replace pressure switch SMT1100 0nly) Nater supply ~heck water supply soarce :~ressUre t%iow : System won't operate. All remote :~emote Station loose wires or secure wires or replace stations have power :ircuit board RMT* defective board circuit board Relay K2 open coil or burnt replace relay contact Contactor K3 Dpen coil or burnt replace contactor :,ontact Motor M1 Ihermal overload reset or replace thermal switch is tripped overload switch motor windings replace motor 3ad Intermittent Shut-down Intermittent shut-down. Shuts NORMAL System is Press "ON" button on remot down after 30 minutes of OPERATION 'lesigned to shut station touch-pad 3peration Jown after 30 "ninutes of operation Intermittent shut-down. Shuts Water supply trips float switch open water supply valve :lown in less than 30 minutes, but )ressure to Iow [ully, clean water supply :an restart immediately ~ilter, ntermittent shut-down, Shuts Water supply trips thermal limit 'educe water supply :lown in less than 30 minutes, temperature above switch lemperature ~emote stations loose power and 140° F ;annot restart for 10 to 15 'ninutes. ntermittent shut-down. Shuts Motor M 1 thermal blocked motor 'emove obstruction :lown in less than 30 minutes, ovedoad switch fan iRemote stations have power but )ressure too high adjust unloader for lower cannot restart for 15 to 30 minutes, )perating pressure weak motor replace motor Low Pressure Low pressure (always) ~ressure gauge defective reading replace gauge -loses air leak at pump tighten hose clamps or intake replace hose 3ulb filter (inside clogged clean and replace :ank) qozzle wrong size or replace nozzle Unloader maladjusted adjust unloader for pressure gauge indication of 50PSI less than "MAX PRESSURE" indicated on pump-head /~orn replace unloader Pump NOra valves and rebuild pump or return to seals factory 14 .ow Pressure (when soap or Chemical supply no chemical, refill chemical supply ;anifize selected) sucks air hoses air leak at input to lighten hose clamps or chemical 'eplace hose solenoids Low Pressure when spraying Line pressure stuck open ;lean Line Pressure Release (high pressure when not 'elease valve solenoid valve spraying) damaged 'ebuild or replace Line solenoid plunger Jressure Release solenoid /alve No Chemical No Chemical at any remote ~hemical supply no chemical refill chemical supply station .~;hemical control maladjusted adjust so that micro-switch is t4icro-switch ( older activated when spray gun is ~qachines) open and deactivated when spray gun is off .~hemical control stuck clean or replace ;Iow-switch Chemical pick-up air leak tighten hose clamps or tubing replace hose kinked tubing straighten tubing Chemical foot-screen clogged flush with hot water or replace Chemical solenoid loose connection secure connections clogged clean or replace No Chemical at one remote Remote station loose wires secure connection station only ~lefective circuit replace circuit board and/or ~)oard or touch- touch-pad 3ad e Excessively High Pressure Gauge pressure exceeds Pressure gauge :aul~ indi~tion replace gauge ~aximum listed on pump head Nozzle ~rong size or replace with correct size or 3locked remove obstruction Unloader ~aladjusted adjust unloader for pressure gauge indi~tion of 50PSI less than "M~ PRESSURE" indicated on pump-head Spray gun papally opened ;lean or replace or clogged Quick Connect paAially opened ;lean or replace ~ttings or clogged Hoses restricted ;lean or replace Burnt Contactor Contactor, burnt contacts Line voltage too Iow Check electrical power by ~=lectrician drops under load Check electrical power by and stays Iow ~=lectrician Drops under initial Check electrical power by load ~=lectrician Relay K1 or K2 defective relay or 'eplace relay or socket relay socket Control cable Loose or damaged 'epair splice or tighten ,vire in control ~onnection ~,able 600REY/WCY 300-2284-00 Figure 5. Exploded View, SMT 600REY/WCY 17 ITEM NO PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY MC A M Y W ~W R I 2 3DO-1896 MASTER CON [ROL PANEL ASSEMBLY, 1100WOX*** 3 300-2B88 RELAY, ICE CUBE, INOT SHOWN) 2 4 300 2849 FUSE t/4 AMP {230V) [NOT SHOWN) I 5 300~2890 FUSE, 1/2 AMP ( I ISV) INOT SHOWN) 1 6 300-3759 TIMER, 30 MINUTE (NOT SHOWN) 1 7 300-3799 TIMER, 15 MINUTE (NOT SHOWNI I 8 3(X)-1919 CONTACTOR, 2-POLE, 30 AMP (NOT SHOWN) I 10 200-1025 CIRCUIT BREAKER, 3 AMP (NOT SHOWN) uM A ¥ ~ M w 27 ASSEMBLIES AND PARTS FOR 1100WCX 300-2285-00 Figure 6. Exploded View, SMT ll00WCX 18 ® SMT 2000 REY/WCY 300-2283-01 Figure 7. Exploded View, SMT 2000REY 19 SERVICE ASSEMBLIES AND PARTS FOR SURFACE MOUNT REMOTE STATIONS Figure 8. Exploded View, Surface Mount Remote Stations SERVICE ASSEMBLIES AND PARTS FOR RECESSED MOUNT REMOTE STATIONS 300-2286-00 Figure 9. Exploded View, SMT Recess Mount Remote Stations 2O GUN & NOZZLE ASSEMBLY ,tim PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY. 300-1088 TRIGGER GUN 300 3480 300-0182 300-0192 LANCE, 36' LANCE. 24' SELECTOR, DUAL NOZZLE NOZZLES, HiGH PRESSURE 4 300-3360 300 3362 300 3375 300-0254 25040 - 12.2 GPM PUMP} 25045 - }3.2 GPM PUMP} 25070 - [2.9 GPM PUMPJ 25075 - {4.0 GPM PUMPI NOZZLES, LOW PRESSURE I 5 I 300-3410 I 2530-[ALL MODELS} VARI~NOZZLES. HIGH/LOW PRESSURE 6 300-3440 300-3435 300-3427 300-2863 1.3 [2.2 GPM - I 100 PSI} 1.4 (3.2 GPM - 2000 PSII 1 ~7 (2.9 GPM - 850 1.8 }4.0 GPM - 1800 PSIJ QUICK CONNECT SOCKET - 7 000-0041 SHUTOFF FOR CENTRAL SYSTEMS 8 300-1120 NIPPLE, HEX, 3/8" FOR USE WITH 000-004~ QUICK CONNECT SOCKET - FLOW 9 000-0242 THRU FOR WALLMOUNT & PORTABLE SYSTEMS 300-3300-O0 Figure 10. Exploded View, SMT Spray Gun Assembly 21 Electric Motor or Gas Engine must be purchased separately4 PUMP FEATURES · UNIFLOW design provides continuous liquid flow forward through the pump, reduces cavitation dsk and increases pump life. · Triplex design with unique spdng loaded inlet valves and the flow through ceramic plungers provides a smooth, steady flow. · Ultimate portability~ess than 11 pounds--less than 10" long. · Standard shaft pump for direct mounting or special SOLID SHAFT and LOW RPM models. · Regulating Unloader is standard on each pump to assure system pressure control and pump protection. · Special Hi-Temp seal option for pumping 190°F water. · Optional Thermo Valve mounts directly into by-pass hose for optimum heat protection while in by-pass. COMMON PUMP SPECIFICATIONS Inlet Pressure Range . (Standard) Flooded to 75 PSI (Flooded to 5 25 BAR) (Hi-Tamp) 30 to 75 PSI (2.1 to 525 BAR) Bore 0708" (18 mm) Max. Liquid Temperature ...(Standard) 160"F (71°C) (Hi-Tamp) 190°F (88°C) Crankcase Capacity 11 83 oz ( 35 L) Inlet Ports (1) 3/8" NPTF (3/8" NPTF) Discharge Ports (2) 3/8" NPTF (3/8" NPTF) By-Pass Ports (t) 1/4" NPTF (1/4" NPTF} Weight (Pump Only) .................. 10.6 lbs (48 kg) Dimensions (Pump Only) 9.13 x 6.65 x 650" (232 x 169 x 165mm) All systems require beth a p~rnary pressure regulatiRg device (i.e. regulatcr, unloader) and a secondary pressure safely relief device (i.e.. pop-off valve, safely valve}. Failure to install such relief devices could result in personal injun/or damage to the pump or to system components. CAT PUMPS dc~s not assume any liability or responsability for the opera,on of a customer's high pressure system. Triplex Direct Drive Plunger Pump Model 2SF SPECIFICATIONS US Metric U.S. Metric Measure Measure Measure Measure MODEL 2SFIOES Flow 1.0 GPM (3 8 L/M) Max Discharge Pressure 2000 PSI (140 BAR) Max RPM 3450 RPM (3450 RPM) MODEL 2SF20ES 2SF22ES MODEL 2SF22ELS Flow ................................................. 2.2 GPM (8.3 L/M) Max Discharge Pressure 2000 PSI ('~40 ~AR) Max RPM 1725 RPM (t725 RPM) Stroke 0.248" (6.3 mm) MODEL 2SF22SLS Flew 2.2 GPM (83 L/M) Max. Discharge Pressure 2000 PSI (140 BAR) Max RPM t725 RPM (1725 RPM) Stroke .................................................................... 0.248" (6.3 mm) MODEL 2SF29ELS 2SF30ES Flow 2 85 GPM (f0.8 L/M) 3.0 GPM (11 4 L/M) Max Discharge Pressure 1500 PSI (108 BAR) 1500 PSI (105 BAR) Max RPM 1725 RPM (1725 RPM) 3450 RPM (3450 RPM) Stroke 0 335" (8.5 mm) 0.177" (45 mm) MODEL 2SF30GS MODEL 2SF35ES 2SF35GS Refer to pump Service Manual for repair procedures and additional EXPLODED VIEW December 2001 SF PLUNGER PUMP MODELS 25F10, 25F20, 25F22, 25F29, 25F30, 25F35 ITEM PIN MATL 5 89551 STZP 6 150810 NBR 8 44857 AL 10 14044 NBR ll 44859 NBR 15 14488 STL 20 45876 HS 25 543135 rCM 46109 FCM 44933 FCM 44929 rCM 548441 FCM 44931 FCM 45096 FCM 451iX) FCM 45160 FCM 45426 FCM 4514§ FCM 86 19385 STL 97 15710 STL 32 45690 RTP 33 14179 NBR 37 92241 38 44428 NBR 48 44842 NY 49 14179 NBR · 53 45702 AL 64 16948 CM 65 44865 SZZ 45487 SZZ 69 20017 STZP 70 25461 NBR 90 45847 CC 45429 CC 100 44869 PVDF 106 44876 NBR 545192 FPM llO 44874 68 125 43245 SNG 46652 HP 134 45854 S $$875 NP DESCRIPTION Screw. HHC (M6 x 16) All Models Washer, Seal (M6) All Models Cover. Beadng, Inner All Models O Ring, Bearing Cover All Models Seal. Oil All Models Bearing, Ball, Inner All Models Rod. Connecodg All Models Crankshaft, 3450 RPM, 5/8". 1 7mm 10ES Crankshaft, 3450 RPM, 518", 3Ami 20ES CrankshefL 3450 RPM, 3/4', 335mm 82GS CrankshefL 3450 RPM, 5/8", 335mm 22E5 Crankshaft, 3450 RPM, 3/4'. 4,7mm 30GS Crankshaft, 3450 RPM. 5/8", 4.Sim 30ES CrankshalL 3450 RPM. 5/8", 5.6mm 35ES Crankshaft, 3450 RPM, 3/4', 5.6mm 35GS Crankshaft, 1725 RPM, 5/8", 6,3mm 22ELS Crankshaft, 1725 RPM, 518', 8,Sim 29£LS Crankshaft, 1725 RPM, Solid, 314'.63mm 225LS PARTS LIST MODEL USED 0TY ITEM PiN MATL DESCRIPTION 135 44871 S Spacec Inlet 136 44872 S Spring. Inlet Valve 137 88575 S Washer, Conical (M6) 138 27000 S Nut, Slotted (M6) 139 14158 S Catterpin (M1.6X10) 152 26089 NBR O-Ring, Adapter, Inner - 80D 11377 FPM O-Ring, Adapter, Inner - 80D 157 44878 BB Discherge Valve Adapter 45430 BI] Discharge Valve Adapter 159 26089 NBR O-Ring, 8dapler, Outer 80D 11377 FPM 0 Ring, Adapter, Inner - 80D 164 44881 S Seat 166 43723 S Valve 167 541062 S Spring 168 44565 PVDF ReMiner, Spring 185 44879 88 Manifold, Discharge 188 87859 5TZP Screw, HSH (M8x75) MODEL USED QTY All Mcdels All Models All Medals All Models All Models All Models Ail Models All Models except 89ELS 2gELS All Models Ring, ReMining Beadng, Ball, Outer Cap, Oil Filler O-Ring, Oil Filler Cap 70D Gauge, Bubble Oil w/Gasket - 80D Gas8et, Flat Flex, Oil Gauge 80D Plug, Drain (1/2" NPT) O-Ring, Drain Plug 70D Crankcase Pin, Crosshead Rod, Plunger ROd, Plunger All Models All Models All Models AIl Models A]I Models All Models All Models All Models All Models · All Models All Models except 29ELS 29ELS All Models ^U Models All Models except 29ELS 29ELS 255 259 285 300 15845 STZP 44843 STZP 44942 AL 12489 STZP 30517 STZP 30980 STZP 30921STZP 34100 STZP 8106 30050 STL 30973 STZP 80228 STL 34053 NBR 33053 R7 93459 FPM 34052 NBR 34668 NBR 44050 5TZP 75005 BB Lockwasher, Split (MB) Screw, HH (5/16-24) Flange Washer, Flat (M8) Kit, Bolt Mount 7 Washer, F)at (3/8') L~kwashec Split (3/8') LubricanL Antiseize Key (3/16' x 3/16' x 1-114" HD) Kit, Mounting Bracket (Incld w/Pump) {Inclds: Bracket, Washers. Bolts, Nuts) Screw (M8- 725x80) Kit, Seal (InClds: 106,125,139,152, 159) 225L All Models 2 Al~ Models I UNLOADER SPECIFICATIONS MODEL 7500S GPM ......................... PSi Inlet Port - Rear .................. Discharge Port - Front By-pass Port - Bottom Weight Dimensions U.S. Measure Metric Measure 0.5-60 GPM (2-23 LJM) 100-2000 PSi (7-140 BAR) 3/8" NPTM (3/8" NPTM) 3/8"NPTF (3/8"NPTF) 14 oz (043 kg) 30xl 0x425" (76x25x108 mm) /410 ITEM P/N MAIL DESCRIPTION QTY. 402 540081 88 Cap. Hex Adjusting 1 MATERIAL CODES (Not Par[ o1 Part Number): B8=Brass NBR-Medium Nitrile (Buna-N} PTFE Pure Teflon' S=304SS STZP=S[eeI/Zinc Plated OPERATION A Regulating Unloader comes with each 2SF pump to provide system pres- sure regulation and pump protection. For suction feed consult CATPUMPS. By-pass for the regulating unloader may drain to the ground, drain to a reservoir or connect to the special 1/4" by-pass port on the underside of the inlet manifold. A 3/8" flexible hose and Thermo Valve (7090.40) are recommended. DO NOT EXCEED 6 MINUTES in BY-PASS when Thermo Valve is not installed. Hi-Temp Units with special Hi-Temp seals do not use the by-pass hose back to the pump inlet or the Thermo Valve. Use optional Dual Pressure Switches and Mechanical Relay in Auto Shut Off Kits 34870 and 34871. If unit is INFREQUENTLY USED OR PERIODICALLY STORED, seals may become dry. System should be PURGED BEFORE OPERATION (system liquid must flow through the pump without discharge restriction) to assure full system pressure is reached. CHEMICAL INJECTOR SPECIFICATIONS Standard Optional MODEL 7193 7194 Flow 3-4 GPM 4-5 GPM Nozzle Orifice 21 mm 23mm Hose Barb 1/4" 1/4" Inlet Port MlBx10 M18x10 Discharge Port 3/8" NPTM 3/8" NPTM Weight 6.3 oz. 6 3 oz Dimensions 2x 1 x3" 2x 1 x3" /O ~/ 472 PIN MAIL DESCRIPTION -481 QTY. ITEM 471 Handle, Adjuslment 472 Barb, Adjuslable Barb, Fixed 473 0 Ring, Hose Barb 474 Spring 475 Retainer, Ball Seat 476 O-Ring, Retainer 477 Ball 478 Spring, Tapered 479 Orilice, Injector (2.1mm) Slandard Orifice, Injector (2.3mm) 480 Body 481 33481 B8NY Barb. Assy. Adjuslable (Inclds: 471,472, 478.474, 475.476,477,478) CHEMICAL INJECTOR PERFORMANCE CHART Optional Special Ported Chemical Injector for Unloader Mounting 2SF20 2.1 mm (7193} 100 PSI 50 o~Jmin 100 PSI 2SF35 23 mm (7194) 150 PSI 50 oTJrnin 150 PSi Optimum performance of chemical injector occurs with a 35 ft. high pres- sure hose and a minimum 3/8" I.D. The type of hose, extended lengths, reduced I.D. and fittings may create back pressures in excess of the Iow pressure nozzle rating and prevent the injector from drawing chemical Deduct hose friction loss from above Iow PSI Nozzle. Contact CAT PUMPS for assistance with other options. Refer to Hose Friction Loss Chart in the Service Manual for pressure loss with longer hose. An optional, specially ported chemical injector may be mounted directly to the discharge of the unloader. Remove o-ring, check valve and spring from discharge riffing of unloader; insert into injector and thread into unloader discharge port. Discard o-ring and discharge fitting. Refer to the performance chad to determine the orifice size best suited to ,the system flow. Chemical draw occurs under Iow pressure. Select the Change Over Nozzle (32149), Adjustable Nozzle (32151). or Vari-Nozzle (7930-7980) to permit the adjustment from Iow to high pressure. For optimum performance when using a chemical injector, use a single wire braid hose on the discharge line. Too flexible a hose will prevent the unloader from receiving the full pressure signal to activate the by-pass mode. For correct nozzle selection, read system pressure at the pump. DO NOT READ SYSTEM PRESSURE AT THE HIGH PRESSURE GUN. Incorrect pressure reading may result in: pump operation al excessive pressures, inconsistent chemical draw, or possible damage to the pump or unloader. MOTOR SPECIFICATIONS Model 8050 Model 8055 * Model 8060 Horsepower ......... 1.5 Horsepower ............. 3.0 Horsepower ........... Shaft Diameter 5/8' She8 Diameter ........ · 3/4" Sba8 Diameter ....... Max Volts ............. 115/230 Max Volts ............ 208/230 Max. Volts ................ tt5/230 FULL LOAD AMPS 12.1 FULL LOAD AMPS 15 2113.6 FULL LOAD AMPS ..... 140/7.5 RPM 3450 RPM 3450 RPM 1725 Weight 32 I lbs. Weight 463 lbs Weight 40 lbs Phase Single Phase Single Phase Singts Frame Size 56-C TEFC Frame Size 58~ TEFC Frame Size 56 C TEFC Service Factor 115 Service Factor 115 Service Factor 12 Model 8052 Model 8057 Horsepower g.0 Horsepower 5.0 * Model 8062 Max Volts 115/230 Max Vogs 230 Shaft Diameter 5/8~ FULL LOAD AMPS 17 o/gg 85 FULL LOAD AMPS 22 0 Max Volts 115/230 RPM 3450 RPM 3450 FULL LOAD AMPS .... 170/8.5 Weight 325 lbs Weight 40 lbs RPM 1725 Phase Single Phase Single Weight 437 lbs. Frame Size 56-C TEFC Frame Size 55 C OPEN DR~P Phase Single Common Motor Specifications 1.5 Max. Ambient Temp ................ 104~F 5/8" Capacitor Start ................. Yes Thermal Ovedoad~Manual Reset Yes U.L Construction Reference (8050,8055) E49747 (8052, 8057. 8060, 8062) ...... E44549 U L tssulalion Reference (All) .. E37878 CSA Reference (8050) LR45148 (8052, 8057, 8060, 8062) LR4642 (8055} LR2025 Nole:M0~or S[ari Up AMPS may vary, [hen settle w~t bin FULL LOAD AMPS rating aftsr i~ilJal For warranty consideration contact CAT PUMPS for the local Authorized Service Center. If you are uncertain as to Ihe cause of failure (Pump or Motor), secure Returned Goods Authorization number and return complete assembly PREPAID to CAT PUMPS for evaluation. HORSEPOWER REQUIREMENTS FLOW PRESSURE PUMP PSI PSI PSI PSI PS~ RPM 700 1000 1200 1500 2000 U.S. Metric BAR BAR BAR BAR BAR GPM L/M 50 70 85 105 140 1,0 3.8 48 ,69 .82 1.0 1.4 3450 2.2 8.3 11 1.5 1.8 2.3 3.0 3450 285 10.8 14 2.0 2.3 2.9 N/A 1725 3.0 11.4 14 2.1 2.5 3.1 4.1 3450 3.5 13.2 17 24 2,9 3.6 N/A 3450 DETERMINING THE REQUIRED H.P. GPM x PSI Electric Brake 1460 H.P. Required 2SF DIMENSIONAL DRAWING 2071 (526) 13HP) 1921 (4881 (griP) !821 (462) (1.SHP) 12.76 (324) (3HP) .! 11,26 (286) (griP) 10.26 (260) (1.5 HP) 7.95 (202) 9.79 (248) .... 3.625 (g2) 5.0 (127) (3 HP) 1.93 (49) 914 (232) / 1/4-18 NPT Dual Capacitor on top and front side e[ectdcal box (187 -- World Headquarters ~ CAT PUMPS 1681-641h Lane N.E. Minneapolis, MN 55449.4324 Phone (763) 786-5446 -- FAX (763) 780-2958 e-mail: sales@catpumps.com ww~catpumps.com "The World's Most Dependable Pumps" International Inquiries r- FAX (763) 785-4329 e-mail: in0sa(es@catpumps.com L CAT PUMPS (U.K.) LTD. I Fleet Business Park, Sandy Lane, Church Crookham, Fleet Hampshire GU52 8BE England Phone Fleet 44 1252-622031 -- Fax 44 1252-626655 e-mail: salesl~catpunlps CO uk N.Y. CAT PUMPS INTERNATIONAL S.A. Heiveldekens SA, 2550 Kon~ch, Belgium Phone 32- 3-450 7150 -- Fax 32-3-4507151 e-mail: cpi~ca[pumps be www. catpumps.be CAT PUMPS DEUTSCHLAND GmbH CYCLONEXi Model BTH 120-250(A) SERIES 100AND 101 COMMERCIAL GAS WATER HEATER iie ;11 FOR DOMESTIC HOT WATER · INSTALLATION · OPERATION · SERVICE · MAINTENANCE ° LIMITED WARRANTY ~,WARNING: If the information in these instructions is not followed exactly, a fire or explosion may result causing property damage, personal injury or death. Do not store or use gasoline or other flammable vapors and liquids in the vicinity of this or any other appliance. - WHAT TO DO IF YOU SMELL GAS: · Do not try to light any appliance. · Do not touch any electrical switch; do not use any phone in your building. · Immediately call your gas supplier from a neighbor's phone. Follow the gas supplier's instructions. · If you cannot reach your gas supplier, call the fire department. - Installation and service must be performed by a qualified installer, service agency or the gas supplier. Thank you for buying this energy efficient water heater from A.O. Smith Water Products Company. We appreciate your confidence in our products. ~ CAUTION TEXT PRINTED OR UNDERLINED IN RED CONTAINS INFORMATION RELATIVE TO YOUR SAFETY. PLEASE READ THOROUGHLY BEFORE INSTALLING AND USING THISAPPLIANCE~ PLACE THESE INSTRUCTIONS ADJACENT TO HEATER AND NOTIFY OWNER TO KEEP FOR FUTU RE REFERENCE. PRINTED IN U.S.A. 0307 WATER PRODUCTS COMPANY A DIVISION OF A.O. SMITH CORPORATION Mc BEE, SOUTH CAROLINA PART NO. 197727-000 CYCLONE Xi BTH 120 - 250A ROUGH-IN-DIMENSIONS Table 1. RECOVERY CAPACITIES- NATURAL GAS I L.P. Approx. Input Gas Gallon TEMPERATURE RISE - DEGREES °F - GALLONS PER HOUR Model BTU/Hr. Usage Capacity 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 BTH 120 120,000 nat/Ip 60 461 345 276 230 197 173 154 138 126 115 106 99 BTH 150 150,000 nat/Ip 100 576 432 345 288 247 216 192 173 157 144 133 123 BTH 199 199,900 nat/Ip 100 767 575 460 384 329 288 256 230 209 192 177 164 BTH250 250,000 nat/Ip 100 960 720 576 480 411 360 320 288 262 240 221 206 Approx. Gas Liter TEMPERATURE RISE - DEGREES C - Liters PER HOUR Model kW-Hr Usage Capacity 17 22 28 33 39 44 50 56 61 67 72 78 BTH 120 35 nat/Ip 227 1744 1308 1046 872 747 654 581 523 476 436 402 374 BTH 150 44 nat/Ip 379 217! '1635 1308 1090 934 817 726 554 594 545 503 1467 BTH 199 58 nat/Ip 379 2904 2178 1743 1452 1245 1089 968 871 792 726 670 622 BTH250 73 nat/Ip 379 3632 2724 2179 1816 1557 1362 1211 1090 991 908 838 778 Recovery capacities are based on 95% thermal efficiency. FOREWORD These designs comply with the current edition of the American National Standard for Gas Water Heaters. Volume III. ANSI Z21.10.3 / CSA 43 as an automatic circulating tank water heater, and automatic storage water heaters Detailed installation diagrams are found in this manual These diagrams will serve to provide the installer with a reference for the materials and methods of piping necessary. It is highly essential that all water, gas piping and wiring be installed as shown on the diagrams. Particular attention should be given to the instaltation of thermometers at the locations indicated on the diagrams as these are necessary for checking the proper functioning of the heater. 2 In addition to these instructions, the equipment shall be installed in accordance with those installation regulations in force in the local area where the installation is to be made. These shall be carefully followed in all cases Authorities having jurisdiction should be consulted before installations are made. In the absence of local codes, the installation must comply with the current editions of the National Fuel Gas Code, ANSI Z223,1/NFPA 54 and the National Electrical Code, NFPA 70 or CAN/CSA-B149.1, the Natural Gas and Propane Installation Code and CSA C22.1, the Canadian Electrical Code. All documents are available from the Canadian Standards Association, 8501 East Pleasant Valley Road, Cleveland, OH 44131. NFPA documents are also available from the Nationat Fire Protection Association, 1 Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269. TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE ROUGH-IN DIMENSIONS ................................................. 2 PAGE Gas Valves .................................................................................. 15 SYSTEM CONNECTIONS .................................................................. 15 Thermometers .............................................................................. 15 Relief Valve ............................................................................... 15 Water Line Connections ....................................................... 15 Heater Wiring ............................................................................ USING THE ELECTRONIC CONTROLLER ...................................... 17 Overview ................................................................................... 17 Operating States .................................................................... 17 Adjusting the Operating Set Point ....................................... 18 Changing the Display Units .................................................... f 9 Fault and Warning Conditions .................................................... 19 Access to the Current Fault or Warning ................................. 19 Viewing the Fault History ........................................................ 20 PRIQRTO START-UP .................................................... 20 Required Ability ........................................................................20 OPERATIING INSTRUCTIONS ........................................................ 21 Adjustment Procedure (Initial Start-Up) 120 and 150 Models .... 21 Adjustment Procedure (Initial Start-Up) 199 and 250 Models 21 Cathodic Protection 22 Precautions .............................................................................22 GENERAL INFORMATION ........................................................... 22 Power Burner ............................................................................. 22 High Limit .................................................................................... 22 High Altitude Installations ......................................................... MAINTENANCE ............................................................................... 22 General ............................................................................. 22 Maintenance Schedule ............................................................... Flushing .................................................................................... 26 Draining .............................................................................. 26 Sediment Removal ...................................................................... 26 Lime Scale Removal .................................................................. 26 Anode Inspection and Replacement ....................................... 26,27 Drain Valve and Access Panels ................................................. 27 Relief Valve 27 Circulating Pump ...................................................................... 27 Vent System ..................................................................... 27 INSTALLATION DIAGRAMS ............................................... 28-32 Manifold Kits ................................................................... 33 CHECKLISTAND SERVICE INFORMATION 34 TROUBLE-SHOOTING ........................................................ 34,35 LIMITED WARRAN~Cr' ............................................. 36 FEATURES ,~ DANGER THIS WATER HEATER IS EQUIPPED WITH AN ADJUSTABLE TH ERMOST/kT IMPORTANT TO CONTROL WATER TEMPERATURE. HOT WATER TEMPERATURES REQUIRED FOR AUTOMATIC DISHWASHER AND LAUNDRY USE CAN IT iS REQUIRED THATA QUALIFIED SERVICE TECHNICIAN PERFORM THE CAUSESCALDBURNSRESULTING[NSERIOUSPERSONALINJURYAND/ INITIAL FIRING OF THE HEATER. ATTHIS TIME THE USER SHOULD NOT OR DEATH. THE TEMPERATURE AT WHICH INJURY OCCURS VARIES HESITATE TO ASK THE TECHNICIAN ANY QUESTIONS WHICH HE MAY WITH THE PERSON'SAGEANDTHE TIME OF THE EXPOSURE, THE SLOWER HAVEINREGARDTOTHEOPERATIONANDMAINTENANCEOFTHEUNIT. RESPONSE TIME OF CHILDREN, AGED OR DISABLED PERSONS ACHECKLISTAND SERVICE INFORMATION section are tacluded at the rear INCREASES THE HAZARDS TO THEM, NEVER ALLOW SMALL CHILDREN of this manual By using this checklist the user may be abta to make minor TO USE A HOT WATER TAP, OR TO DRAW THEIR OWN BATH WATER operational adjustments and save himself unnecessary service calls NEVERLEAVEACHILDORD]SABLEDPERSONUNATTENDEDINABATHTUB However, the user should not attempt repairs which are not listed in this ORSHOWER. section. WATER TEMPERATURE CONTROL THE WATER HEATER SHOULD BE LOCATED IN AN AREA WHERE THE GENERAL PUBLIC DOES NOT HAVEACCESS TO SETTEMPERATURES. The water temperature is controlled using the Temperature Control Button on the Display at the front of the unit (See Figure 1). This control utilizes [wo temperature probes to determine the tank temperature The primary temperature probe is located at the top of the tank and the other is near the water inlet. The temperature may be adjusted from 90°F/32°C to 180°F/82°C. The thermostat was adjusted to 120°F/49°C before the heater was shipped from the factory. It is recommended that lower water temperature be used to avoid the risk of scalding, it is further recommended, in all cases, that ~he 3 water temperature be set for the lowest temperature which satisfies your hot water needs. This will also provide the most energy efficient operation of the water heater and minimize scale formation. SETTING THE WATER HEATER TEMPERATUREAT 120"F/49'C WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF SCALDS. Some states require settings at specific lower temperatures, Figure I shows the appmximata time-tu-bum relationship for normal adult skin. Short repeated heating cycles caused by small hot water uses can cause temperatures at the point of use to exceed the thermostat setting by up to 20°F/11°C. If you experience this type of use, you should consider using lower temperature settings to reduce scald hazards. Tempemture Seffina 180°F/82°C 170°F/77°C 160OF/71oc 150~F/66oC 140°F/60°C 130OF/54oc 120OF/49oc Time to Produce 2nd & 3rd Decree Burns on Adult Skin Nearly instantaneous Nearly instantaneous About 1/2 second About 1-1/2 seconds Less than 5 seconds About 30 seconds More than 5 minutes FIGURE 1. Valves for reducing point-of-use temperature by mixing cold and hot water are available (see Figure 2). Also available are inexpensive devices that attach to faucets to limit hot water temperatures. Contact a licen sad olumber or the local Dlumbina authority DISHWASHING MACHINE REQUIREMENT All dishwashing machines meeting the National Sanitation Foundation requirements are designed to operate with water flow pressures between 15 and 25 pounds per square inch (103 Kpa and 173 Kpa). Flow pressures above 25 pounds per square inch (173 Kpa), or below 15 pounds per square inch (103 Kpa), witi result in improperly sanitized dishes, Where pressures are high. a water pressure reducing or flow regulabng control valve should be used in the 180°F (82"C) line to the dishwashing machine, and should be adjusted to deliver water between these limits. The National Sanitation Foundation also recommends circulation of 180°F (82°C) water. Where this is done, the circulation should be very gentle so that it does not cause any unnecessary turbulence inside the water heater. The circulation should be just enough to provide 180°F (82°C) water at the point of take-off to the dishwashing machine. Adjust flow by means of the plug cock in the cimulating line. (See installation diagrams.) CIRCULATING PUMP A circulating pump is used when a system requires a circulating loop or there is a storage tank used in conjunction with the heater. Refer to the piping diagrams at rear of manual for electrical hookup information and install in accordance with the current edition of the National Electrical Code, NFPA70 or the Canadian Electrical Code, CSA C22.1. All bronze circulators are recommended for used with commercial water heaters. HOT WATER 12 TO 15" COLD CHECK INLET_ ~ja' \ t MIXING VALVE CHECK '~TO TANK INLET FIGURE 2. HIGH LIMIT SWITCH (E.C.O.) The top immersion well of the dual bulb controller also contains the high limit (energy cutoff) sensor. The high limit switch interrupts the main burner gas flow should the water temperature reach approximately 202°F/94°C, Should the high limit switch activate, the control system will automatically reset the unit once the water temperature in the tank falls below 140°F/ 60°C. If the unit is manually shut down and restarted, as long as the temperature in the tank is lower than 160°F/71°C, the unit will reset and initiate operation. High limd switch operation is the likely cause when higher than normal water temperatures occur with a recurring need to restart the water heater. This could be due to a malfunctioning thermostat allowing the gas valve to remain open and the burner to continue tiring even after water temperature in the tank has already reached the set point. Contact your dealer or servicer if continued high limit switch operation occurs. Although circulators are oiled and operated by the manufacturer some circulators must be oiled again before operated. Please refer to manufacturer's instructions. INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS REQUIRED ABILITY INSTALLATION OR SERVICE OF THIS WATER HEATER REQUIRESABILITY EQUIVALENT TO THAT OF A LICENSED TRADESMAN IN THE FIELD INVOLVED. PLUMBING, AIR SUPPLY, VENTING, GAS SUPPLY AND ELECTRICAL WORKARE REQUIRED, INSULATION BLANKETS Insulation blankets available to the general public for extamal use on gas water heaters are not approved for use on your A.O. Smith water heater. The purpose of an insulation blanket is to reduce the standby heat loss encountered with storage tank water heaters. Your A.O. Smith water heater meets or exceeds the ASHRAE/IES 90.1 1999 standards with respect to insulation and standby loss requirements, making an insulation blanket unnecessary. I~ WARNING Should you choose to apply an insulation blanket to this heater, you should follow [hese instructions Failure [o follow these i~structions can result in fire, asphyxiation, serious personal injury or death DO not apply insulation to the top, or the upper 15" (38 cra) of the water I~eater, as this will interfere with safe operation Do not cover the temperature & pressure relief valve Do not cover the instruction manual. Keep it on the side of the water heater or nearby for future reference. Do obtain new labels from A.O. Smith for placement on the blanket directly over the existing tabels. 4 LOCATING THE HEATER ~k WARNING THERE ISA RISK IN USING FUEL BURNING APPLIANCES SUCHAS GAS WATER HEATERS IN ROOMS, GARAGES OR OTHER AREAS WHERE GASOLINE, OTHER FLAMrv'C~BLE LIQUIDS OR ENGINE DRIVEN EQUIPMENT OR VEHICLES ARE STORED, OPERATED OR REPAIRED, FLAMMABLE VAPORS ARE HEAVY AND TRAVEL ALONG THE FLOOR AND MAY BE iGNITED BY THE HEATER'S IGNITER OR blAiN BURNER FLAMES CAUSING FIRE OR EXPLOSION. SOME LOCAL CODES PERMIT OPERATION OF GAS APPLIANCES IF iNSTALLED 18 INCHES (46 c4~} OR MORE ABOVE THE FLOOR. THIS MAY REDUCE THE RISK IF LOCATION IN SUCH AN AREA CANNOT BE AVOIDED. THE HEATER SHALL BE LOCATED OR PROTECTED SO IT IS NOT SUBJECT TO PHYSICAL DAMAGE BYA MOVING VEHICLE. DO NOT LOCATE TH E HEATER WHERE NOISE FROM THE EXHAUST OR INTAKE WILL BE OBJECTIONABLE. THIS INCLUDES LOCATIONS CLOSE TO ORACROSS FROM WINDOWS AND DOORS.AVOIDANCHORING THE VENT AND INTAKE PIPES DIRECTLY TO FRAMED WALLS, FLOORS OF CEILINGS UNLESS RUBBER ISOLATION PIPE HANGERS ARE USED. THIS PREVENTS ANY VIBRATIONS FROM BEING TRANSMITTED INTO THE LIVING SPACES. ~a, WARNING FLAMMABLE ITEMS, PRESSURIZED CONTAINERS OR ANY OTHER POTENTIAL FIRE HAZARDOUS ARTICLES MUST NEVER BE PLACE D ON ORADJACENT TO THE HEATER. OPEN CONTAINERS OF FLAMMABLE MATERIAL SHOULD NOT BE STORED OR USED IN THE SAME ROOM WITH THE HEATER. When installing the heater, consideration must be given to proper location. Location selected should be as close to the intake and exhaust termination points as practicable, with adequate air supply and as centralized with the piping system as possible. THE HEATER MUST NOT BE LOCATED IN AN AREA WHERE IT WILL BE SUBgECTTO FREEZING LOCATE IT NEAR A FLOOR DRAIN THE HEATER SHOULD BE LOCATED IN ANAREA WHERE LEAKAGE FROM THE HEATER OR CONNECTIONS WILL NOT RESULT IN DAMAGE TO TH E ADJACENTAREA OR TO LOWER FLOORS OF THE STRUCTURE When such locations cannot be avoided, it is recommended that a suitable drain pan, adequately drained, be installed under the appliance. Water heater life depends upon water quality, water pressure and the environment in which the water heater is installed. Water heaters are sometimes installed in locations where leakage may result in proper~y damage, even with the use of a drain pan piped to a drain, However, unanticipated damage can be reduced or prevented by a leak detector or water shut-off device used in conjunction with a piped drain pan, These devices are available from some plumbing supply wholesalers and retailers. and detect and react to leakage in various ways: · Sensors mounted in the drain pan that trigger an alarm or turn off the LEFT WALL incoming water to the water heater when leakage is detected. · Sensors mounted in the drain pan that turn off the water supply to the entire home when water is detected in the drain pan · Water supply shut-off devices that activate based on the water pressure differential be[ween the cold water and hot water pipes connected to the water heater. · Devices that will turn off the gas supply to a gas water heater while at the same time shutting off its water supply. ,~1, WARNING THIS WATER HEATER ISACONDENSING UNITAND REQUIRESA DRAIN TO BE LOCATED IN CLOSE PROXIMITY TOALLOWTHE CONDENSATE TO DRAIN SAF ELY~ THE CONDENSATE DRAINS FROMTHE UNITATTHE EXHAUST ELBOW LOCATED AT THE BOTTOM OF THE UNIT. NOTE: IT IS IMPORTANT THAT THE CONDENSATE HOSE NOT BE ELEVATEDABOVE THE EXHAUST ELBOW (SEE FIGURE 3) THE CONDENSATE BUILD-DP WILL BLOCK THE EXHAUST OUTLET, WHICH WILL CAUSE IMPROPER OPERATION TUBE MUST BE BELOW EXHAUST ELBOW. FIGURE3. ~ WARNING DO NOT USE THIS APPLIANCE IF ANY PART HAS BEEN UNDER WATER, IMMEDIATELY CALLAQUALIFIED SERVICE TECHNICIAN TO fNSPECTTHE APPLIANCE AND TO REPLACE ANY PART OF THE CONTROL SYSTEM AND ANY GAS CONTROL WHICH HAS BEEN UNDER WATER. CLEARANCES These heaters are approved for installation on combustible §oodng in an alcove when the minimum clearances from any combustion construction are followed as indicated in Figure 4. In all installations the minimum combustible clearances from any vent piping shall be 0" Vent piping passing through a combustible wall or ceiling must be a continuous run (no joints). A service clearance of 24" (61 cm) should be maintained from serviceable pads such as relief valves, flue baffles, flue damper devices, thermostats, cleanout openings or drain valves Always disconnect electrical power before servicing the unit. CEILING PRONT VIEW TOP VIBW *For removal of top covef FIGURE 4. 'ILLUSTRATION OF MINIMUM COMBUSTIBLE CLEARANCES IN AN ALCOVE HARDWATER Where hard water conditions exist, water softening or the threshold type of water treatment is recommended. This will protect the dishwashers, coffee urns, water heaters, water piping and other equipment. See MAINTENANCE section for detdils of tank cleanout procedure. AIR REQUIREMENTS KEEP APPLIANCE AREA CLEARAND FREE OF COMBUSTIBLE MATERIALS, GASOLINE AND OTHER FLAMMABLE VAPORS AND LIQUIDS DO NOT OBSTRUCT THE FLOW OF COMBUSTION AND VENTILATING AIR. ,~J~ WARNING FOR SAFE OPERATION PROVIDEADEQUATE AIR FOR COMBUSTIONAND VENTILATION AN INSUFFICIENT SUPPLY OF AIR WILL CAUSE RECIRCULATION OF COMBUSTION PRODUCTS RESULTING IN CONTAMINATION THAT MAY BE HAZARDOUSTO LIFE SUCH ACONDITION OFTEN WILL RESULT INAYELLOW. LUMINOUS BURNER FLAME, CAUSING CARBONING OR SOOTING OF THE COMBUSTION CHAMBER, BURNERS AND FLUE TU BLS AND CREATES A RISK OF ASPHYXIATION MECHANICAL EXHAUSTING OF ROOM AIR Where an exhaust fan is installed in the same mom with a heater, sufficient openings for air must be provided in the walls. UNDERSIZED OPENINGS WILL CAUSE AtR TO BE DRAWN INTO THE ROOM THROUGH TH E HEATER'S VENTING SYSTEM, CAUSING POOR COMBUSTION. SOOTING MAY RESULT If the confined space is within a building of fight construction, air for combustion and ventilation must be obtained from outdoors. When directly communicating with the outdoors through vertical ducts, two permanent openings, located in the above manner, shall be provided. Each opening shall have a free area of not less than one square inch (6.5 crn=) per 4000 Btuh of the total input of all appliances in the enclosure if horizontal ducts are used, each opening shall have a free area of not less than one square inch (6.5 cm~} per 2000 Btuh of the total input of all appliances in the enclosure. CH EMICAL VAPOR CORROSION i~WARNING CORROSION OF THE FLUE WAYS AND VENT SYSTEM MAYOCCUR IF AIR FOR COMBUSTION CONTAINS CERTAIN CHEMICAL VAPORS SUCH CORROSION MAY RESULT IN FAILUREAND RISK OF ASPHYXIATION Spray can propellants, cleaning solvents, refrigerator and air conditioning refrigerants, swimming pool chemicals, calcium and sodium chloride, waxes, and process chemicals are typical compounds which are potentially corrosive. PRODUCTS OF TH~S SORT SHOULD NOT BE STORED NEAR THE HEATER ALSO, AIR WHICH IS BROUGHT IN CONTACT WITH THE HEATER SHOULD NOT CONTAIN ANY OF THESE CHEMICALS IF NECESSARY, UNCON~AMINATEDAIR SHOULD BE OBTAINED FROM REMOTE OR OUTSIDE SOURCES VENTING ~I, WARNING THE INSTRUCTIONS IN THIS SECTION ON VENTING MUST BE FOLLOWED IN SERIOUS DAMAGETO THE HEATER AND RISK OF FIRE OR EXPLOSION ;~.T.O AVOID CHOKED COMBUSTION OR REClRCU LATION OF FLUE GASES ITCANALSOCREATEARISKOFASPHYXIATION ~UCH CONDITIONS CAUSE SOOTING OR RISKS OF FIRE AND UNCONFINED SPACE In buiidings of conventional frame, brick or stone construction, unconfined spaces may provide adequate air for combustion and ventilation. If the unconfined space is within a building of tight construction (buildings using the following construction: weather stripping, heavy insulation, caulking, vapor barrier, etc.), air for combustion and ventilation must be obtained from outdoors. The installation instructions for confined spaces in tightly constructed buildings must be followed to ensure adequate air supply CONFINED SPACE When drawing combustion air from inside a conventionally constructed building to a confined space, such a space shall be provided with two permanent openings, ONE IN OR WITHIN 12" (31 cm) OF THE ENCLOSURE TOPAND ONE IN OR WITHIN 12" (31 cm) OF THE ENCLOSURE BOTTOM. Each opening shall have a free area of at least one square inch (6.5 cm~) per 1000 Btdh appliances in the enclosure, but not less than 100 square inches (645 cra2), ASPHYXIATION. Heater must be protected from freezing downdraffs dudng shutdown pedods. ,l~k WARNING NEVER OPERATE THE HEATER UNLESS IT IS VENTED TO THE OUTDOORS AND HAS ADEQUATE AIR SUPPLY TO AVOID RISKS OF ~MPROPER OPER~¥1ON, FIRE, EXPLOSION OR ASPHYXIATION, VENT PIPE TERMINATION NOTE: Before installing venting, determine place of vent pipe termination See Figures 5a & b and 6a & b before proceeding, ~.CAUTION DO NOT TERMINATE THE VEN~ING WHERE NOISE FROM THE EXHAUST OR INTAKE WILL BE OBJECTIONABLE THIS iNCLUDES LOCATIONS CLOSE TO ORACROSS FROM WINDOWS AND DOORS. AVOID ANCHORING THE VENT AND INTAKE PIPES DIRECTLY TO FRAMED WALLS, FLOORS OR CEILINGS UNLESS RUBBER ISOLATION PIPE HANGERSARE USED, THIS PREVENTS ANY VIBRATIONS FROM BEING TRANSMITTED INTO THE LIVING SPACES, 6 For all side wall terminated, horizontally vented power vent, direct vent, and power direct vent gas fueled water heaters installed in every dwelling, building or structure used in whole or in part for residential purposes, including those owned or operated by the Commonwealth and where the side wall exhaust vent termination is less than seven (7) feet above finished grade in the area of the venting, including but not limited to decks and porches, the following requirements shall be satisfied: INSTALLATION OF CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTORS At the time of installation of the side wall horizontal vented gas fueled equipment, the installing plumber or gasfitter shall observe that a hard wired carbon monoxide detector with an alarm and battery back-up is installed on the floor level where the gas equipment is to be installed. In addition, the installing plumber or gasfitter shall observe that a battery operated or hard wired carbon monoxide detector with an alarm is installed on each additional level of the dwelling, building or structure served by the sidewall horizontal vented gas fueled equipment. It shall be the responsibility of the property owner to secure the services of qualified licensed professionals for the installation of hard wired carbon monoxide detectors. In the event that the side wall horizontally vented gas fueled equipment is installed in a crawl space or an attic, the hard wired carbon monoxide detector with alarm and battery back-up may be installed on the next adjacent floor level. In the event that the requirements of this subdivision can not be met at the time of completion of installation, the owner shall have a period of thirty (30) days to comply with the above requirements provided that during said thirty (30) day period, a battery operated carbon monoxide detector with an alarm shall be installed. APPROVED CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTORS Each carbon monoxide detector as required in accordance with the above provisions shall comply with NFPA 720 and be ANSI/UL 2034 listed and CSA certified. SIGNAGE A metal or plastic identification plate shall be permanently mounted to the exterior of the building at a minimum height of eight (8) feet above grade directly in line with the exhaust vent terminal for the horizontally vented gas fueled heating appliance or equipment. The sign shall read, in print size no less than one-half (1/2) inch in size, "GAS VENT DIRECTLY BELOW, KEEP CLEAR OF ALL OBSTRUCTIONS." INSPECTION The state or local gas inspector of the side wall horizontally vented gas fueled equipment shall not approve the installation unless, upon inspection, the inspector observes carbon monoxide detectors and signage installed in accor- dance with the provisions of 248 CMR 5.08(2)(a) 1 through 4. EXEMPTIONS: The following equipment is exempt from 248 CMR 5.08(2)(a)1 through 4: 1. The equipment listed in Chapter 10 entitled "Equipment Not Required To Be Vented" in the most current edition of NFPA 54 as adopted by the Board; and 2. Product Approved side wall horizontally vented gas fueled equipment installed in a room or structure separate from the dwelling, building, or structure used in whole or in part for residential purposes. MANUFACTURER REQUIREMENTS o GAS EQUIPMENT VENTING SYSTEM PROVIDED When the manufacturer of Product Approved side wall horizontally vented gas equipment provides a venting system design or venting system components with the equipment, the instructions provided by the manufacturer for installation of the equipment and the venting system shall include: 1. Detailed instructions for the installation of the venting system design or the venting system components; and 2. A complete pads list for the venting system design or venting system. MANUFACTURER REQUIREMENTS - GAS EQUIPMENT VENTING SYSTEM NOT PROVIDED When the manufacturer of a Product Approved side wall horizontally vented gas fueled equipment does not provide the parts for venting the flue gases, but identifies "special venting systems," the following requirements shall be satisfied by the manufacturer: 1. The referenced "special venting system" instructions shall be included with the appliance or equipment installation instructions; and 2. The "special venting systems" shall be Product Approved by the Board, and the instructions for that system shall include a pads list and detailed installation instructions. A copy of all installation instructions for all Product Approved side wall borizootaliy vented gas fueled equipment, all venting instructions, all parts lists for venting instructions, and/or all venting design instructions shall remain with the appliance or equipment at the completion of the installation. ~k WARNiNG U.S. POWER VENT VENT HOOD(S) MAY BEDuRiNGEXTREMELYoPERATioNHOT~ ~ ../MINIMUM 3 FT. (91 CM) ~ / COtq~ I FT ~0 CM MINIMUM 3 FT. (9t CM WITHIN A I ~. {~ ~) ~ 5NOW FALL 7 ~ (2.3 M FRO~' OUTSID UNDER VE~N~, PO~H, ABOVE ' ~ J ' ~ ~ CORNER = ~ ~~ / I I I DECK OR BAL~NY PUBLIC SlDEWA~ ~ I k~ ~ %% . ~~ C~ / I I ~ (SE= ~T~TE I ~(~0 ~) (3 M) ~NT~ LY FIGURE 5a. ~CAUTION TO PREVENT EXHAUSTING PRODUCTS FROM CIRCULATING TO THEAIR INTAKE IN WINDY/COLD AREAS, THE MAXIMUM PRACTICAL DISTANCE BETWEEN THESE TWO TERMINALS IS RECOMMENDED. *MINIMUM 1 FT. (30 CM) FOR APPLrANCES WITH 10.000 BTUH (3 Kw} TO 100,000 BTUH (30 Kw) CANADIAN POWER VENT AWARNING VENT HOOD(S) MAY BE EXTREMELY HOT DURING OPERATION INPUT AND 36 IN. (90 CM) FOR AN APPLIANCE ~ ~ MINIMUM 3 FT. (91 CM) GREATER THAN 100,000 B~UH (30 Kw) TO A WINDOW OR DOOR THAT MINIMUM 3 FT. (91 CM) WITHIN A FIGURE 5b. U.S. DIRECTVENT MINIMUM 9 IN. (23 CM) FOR APPLIANCEE WITH 10,000 BT[JH (3 Kw) TO 50,000 BTUH (15 Kw) ~kWARNING VENTHOOD(S) MAY BE EXTREMELY HOT DURING OPERATION A WINDOW OR DOOR ~-IAT (91 CM) MAY BE OPENED MINIMUM 3 FT. (91 CM) WITHIN A I FT. (30 CM) HEIGHT OF 15 FT. (4.6 M) ABOVE ~ SNOW FA~/ MINIMUM 3 FT. (91 CM) CLEARANCE F.OMEOPP,T Ik XX / .,.,MUMIFT.(30CM ~ ~M ) (9~ ~)A~VE IF FIGURE 6a. ~CAUTION TO PREVENT EXHAUSTING PRODUCTS FROM CIRCULATING TO THEAIR INTAKE IN WIN DY/COLD AREAS, THE MAXIMUM PRACTICAL DISTANCE BETWEEN THESE TWO TERMINALS IS RECOMMENDED. CANADIAN DIRECT VENT ~WARNiNG VENT HOOD(S) MAY MINIMUM I FT. (30 CM) FOR APPLIANCES WITH BE EXTREMELY HOT 10.000 BTUH (3 Kw) TO 100,000 BTUH (30 Kw) INPUT AND 36 IN. (90 CM) FOR AN APPLIANCE DURING OPE RATION GREATER THAN 100,000 BTUH (30 Kw) TO A WINDOW OR DOOR THAT MINIMUM 3 FT. (91 CM) MINIMUM 3 FT. (91 CM) WITHIN A I FT. (30 CM ) HEIGHT OF 15 FT. (4.6 M) ABOVE FIGURE 6b. 9 IMPORTANT The vent system must terminate so that proper clearances are maintained as cited in local codes or the current editions of the National Fuel Gas Code, ANSI Z223.1/NEPA 54 or the Natural Gas and Propane tastallation Code, CAN/CSA-BI49.t. Do not terminate the exhaust vent terminal over public area where condensate or vapor can cause nuisance or hazard. Plan the vent system layout so thai proper clearances are maintained from plumbing and wiring Vent pipes serving power vented appliances are classified by building codes as "vent connectors" Required clearances from combustible materials must be provided in accordance with information in this manual under LOCATION OF HEATER and CLEARANCES, and with National Fuel Gas Code and local Codes. IMPORTANT Plan the layout of the vent system backwards from the vent termination to ~he appliance ~, WARNING USE ONLY THE VENTTERMINALS SUPPLIED WITH THIS UNIT. TERMINATION OF AVENT SYSTEM WITH A DEVICE OTHER THAN THE SUPPLIED VENT TERMINATIONS WILL AFFECT SYSTEM PERFORr¢~NCEAND RESULT INA SAFETY HAZARD DIRECT VENTING The air intake provided on the unit contains a mesh screen (see Figure 7) to prevent large particles from entedng the unit, 3'* (7.6cm) 45° PVC ELBOW WITH MESH SCREEN MESH SCREEN FIGURE 7. ~k WARNING WHEN THE UNIT ~S TO BE SETUPAS A DIRECT VENT, THE MESH SCREEN MUST BE REMOVED TH E INLET VENT PIPE MAY THEN SE GLUED TO TH E AIR INTAKE (see Figure 8) PROVIDED ON TNE UNIT DIRECT VENT TERMINAL INSTALLATION IMPORTANT THIS UNIT CONSISTS OF TWO VENT TERMINALS - AN INTAKE VENT TERMINAL AND AN EXHAUST VENT TERMINAL THE INTAKE VENT TERMINAL ISA 3"45° PVC ELBOWWITHADOME MESH WIRE SCREENAND THE EXHAUST VENT TERMINAL IS A 3" 45°PVC ELBOW WITH A MESH WIRE SCREEN, NOTE: TO PREVENT EXHAUSTING PRODUCTS FROM CIRCULATING TO THE AIR INTAKE IN WINDY/COLD AREAS, THE MAXIMUM PRACTICAL DISTANCE BET~NEEN THESE TWOTERMiNALS IS RECOMMENDED. FIGURE 8. IMPORTANT WHEN LOCATING THE TERMINALS ON A SIDEWALL, THE FOLLOWING SPECIFICATIONS PERTAINING TO TERMINAL LOCATION MUST BE FOLLOWED, 1. The intake vent terminal and the exhaust vent tarminal must terminate on the same extedor wall and must be located at a minimum of 24" (61 cra) from the vertical centerline of the exhaust vent terminal (see Figure 9). In colder climates increasing the 24" (61cra) minimum will reduce possibility of frost over from side winds blowing exhaust vapors to the air intake of the direct vent. 2. The horizontal centerline of the intake vent terminal may not be located lower than the horizontal centerline of the exhaust vent terminal (see Figure 9). INSTALLATION SEQUENCE For installations in the City of Los Angeles, California Category IV PVC Pipe such as that manufactured by Brownline Pipe Company, must be used as vent pipe material ,~k CAUTION NOTE: BEFORE BEGINNING INSTALLATION OF ANYVENT PIPE READTHE VENT PIPE MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. After the points of termination have been determined, use the cover plates as templates to mark the holes for the vent pipes to be inserted through the wall. BEWARE OF CONCEALED WIRING AND PIPING INSIDE OF WALL. ' If the vent terminals are being installed on the outside of a finished wall, it may be easier to mark both the inside and outside wall. Align the hoieg by drilling a hole through the center of the template from the inside through to the outside. The template can now be positioned on the outside wall using the drilled holes as a centering point for the template. A) MASONRY SIDE WALLS Chisel an opening approximately ti2" (1 3 cm) larger than the marked circle B) WOODEN SIDE WALLS Drill a pilot hole approximately one quarter inch outside of the marked circle This pilot hole is used as a starting point for a saws-all or sabre saw blade. Cut around the marked circle staying approximately one quarter inch outside of the line. (This will allow the vent pipe to easily slide through the opening. The resulting gap will be covered by the vent terminal cover plates.) Repeat this step on the inside wall if necessary Cut a length of 3" PVC pipe about 3.5" (8.9 cm) longer than the wall thickness at the opening. 5. Glue the intake vent terminal to the section of the pipe. VERTICAL VENT TERMINAL INSTALLATION 6. Slide the wall plate over the pipe to stop against intake vent terminal. Place a bead of caulking (not supplied) around the gap between the pipe and the wall. Place some of the caulking on the back of the plate to hold it against the wall after installation. 8. If the vent pipe is installed up to the wall, with a coupling on the end against the wall opening, the pipe with Ihe vent terminal can be prepared for gluing before inserting through the wall. Slide the pipe through the wall and insert into coupling on the other side of the wall. making sure that the vent terminal ends up pointed in the correct position (See Figure 9). MORTAR OR SILICONE CAULK FROM WATER HEATER 3" PVC COUPLING METAL PLATES · ~' OUTSIDE EXHAUST VENT TERMINAL -ALL MODELS MORTAR OR SILICONE CAULK FROM / WATER HEATER $" PVC COUPLING METAL PLATES INTAKE VENT TERMINAL - ALL MODELS FIGURE9. IMPORTANT WHEN~RMINATING THROUGHAROOF, THE FOLLOWING SPECIFICATIONS PERTAINING TOTERMINAL LOCATION MUST BE FOLLOWED, 1 Proper support must be provided for all pipe protruding through the roof. 2~ The vertical roof terminations should be sealed with a plumbing roof boot or equivalent flashing. 3. The intake vent termination and the exhaust vent termination must penetrate the same side of roof, 4. The center line of the intake vent termination and ~he center line of the exhaust vent termination must be no closer than 24" (61cm) 5 The intake vent termthal and the exhaust vent terminal must be oriented facing downward and the same direction The specifications are displayed in Figure 10 & 11. NOTE: Exhaust vent termina~ is installed using the same procedure. INSTALLATION SEQUENCE NOTE: BEFORE BEGINNING INSTALLATION OFANYVENT PIPE= READ "VENT PIPE PREPARATION" SECTION ON PAGE 12. 1. After the points of termination have been determined, use the cover plates as templates to mark the holes for the vent pipes to be inserted through the roof. 2. Drill a pilot hole approximately 1/4" (6 mm) outside of the marked circle, This pilot hole is used as a starting point for a saws-all or sabre saw blade. Cut around the marked cimle staying approximately one quarter inch outside the line. (This will allow the vent pipe to easily slide through the opening), The resulting gap will be covered by the roof boot/flashing. 3. Suspend the pipe through the center of the hole using proper support 4. Slide roof boot or equivalent flashing over pipe and secure roof boot equivalent flashing to roof. [TYP, BOTH~ M]N(IMUM) VEHT TERMINAL ~~ A&B; 12" (30,5cm) '~ ABOVE ROOF OR SNOW ACCUMU~TION LEVEL VERTICAL VENT TERMINATION ALL MODELS 5. Seal around flashing. 6. Terminate intake terminal and exhaust vent terminal facing down as shown in Figure 11. ALL MODELS INTAKE VENT TERMINAL FLASHING FtGURE 10. 11 INSTALLATION OF VENT SYSTEM ~,WARNING THE OPTIONAL INTAKE VENTING ARRANGEMENTAND THE EXHAUST VENTING ARRANGEMENT MUST BE iNSTALLED TO RUN DIRECTLY TO THE OUTDOORSAND NOT IN ANY WAY BE CONNECTED TOANOTHER VENTING SYSTEM (I.E. FURNACE, DRYERS OR SPACE HEATERS). IT IS CRUCIAL THAT THE VENTING ARRANGEMENT BE KEPT SEPARATE FROM OTHER VENTING SYSTEMS IF THIS WARNING IS IGNORED,AND THE SYSTEM IS VENTED INCORRECTLY, IT MAY CAUSE IMPROPER OPERATION, FIRE, EXPLOSION, OR ASPHYXIATION. 1. Plan the route of the vent system from the vent terminabon to the planned location of the appliance. Layout the total vent system to use the minimum of vent pipe and elbows possible 2. The installer may add up to a MAXIMUM OF FIFTY (50) EQUIVALENT FEET (15.2 m) of pipe to the exhaust venting arrangement. This addition of FIFTY (50) EQUIVALENT FEET (15.2 m) of pipe on both the intake venting arrangement and exhaust venting arrangement must include any 3" PVC elbows which equals (5) EQUIVALENT FEET (1.5 m) of pipe. Table 2. VENT LENGTH TABLE Number 3" 3" 4" of 90° Minimum Maximum Maximum Elbows Pipe (Ft. IM.) Pipe (Ft./M.) Pipe (FtJM.) ONE (1) 7/2 45/13.7 115/35 TWO (2) 7/2 40/12.2 110133.5 THREE (3) 7/2 35/10.7 105/32 FOUR (4) 7/2 30/9.1 100/30.5 FIVE (5) 712 --- 95129 SIX (6) 712 --- 90/27.4 4" PVC may be used for a MAXIMUM intake of ONE HUNDRED TWENTY (120) EQUIVALENT FEET (36.6m) and a MAXIMUM exhaust of ONE HUNDRED TWENTY (120) EQUIVALENT FEET (36 em), The maximum number of 90° elbows with the 4" venting is six (6) on the intake and six (6) on the exhaust A 90° elbow is equal to five (5) equivalent feet (1 Sm) of pipe. One (1) 90° elbow is equal to two (2) 45° elbows. Any venting configuration using less than 50 equivalent feet should use 3" venting. See Table 2. The 3" venting terminals (provided) must be used with the 3" vent pipe. Two, approved 4" vent terminals (not provided) must be used with 4" vent pipe. See replacement parts list for terminals. IMPORTANT When multiple units are direct vented through a watl (3" or 4" venting), atl intake vent terminals should be no lower than the highest exhaust vent terminal NOTE: This unit can be vented using only PVC (Class 160, ASTM D-2241 Schedule 40, ASTM D-1785; or Cellular Core Schedule 40 DWV, ASTM F-891), Schedule 40 CPVC (ASTM F-411), or ASS (ASTM D-2661) pipe. The 6ttings, other than the T[RMINATIONS should be equivalent to PVC- DWV fittings meeting ASTM D-2665 (Use CPVC fittings, ASTM F-438 for CPVC pipe and ABS fittings, ASTM D~2661/3311 for ABS pipe. If CPVC or ABS pipe and fittings are used, then the proper cement must be used for all joints, including joining the pipe to the Termination (PVC Material). PVC Materials should use ASTM D-2564 Grade Cement; CPVC Materials should use ASTM F-493 Grade Cement and; ABS Materials should use ASTM D-2235 Grade Cement. NOTE: for Water Heaters in locations with high ambient temperatures (above 100°F or 38°C) ape/or insufficient dilubon air, it is recommended that CPVC orABS pipe and fittings !MUST USE SUPPLIED VENTTERMINAL) be used. 4. It is important that condensate not be allowed to buildup in the exhaust vent pipe. To prevent this from happening the pipe should be installed with a slight, 1/8" (3mm) per 5' (152 cm) of pipe maximum downward slope. 5. The vent system should be suppoded every 5' (152 cra) of vertical run and every 3' (91cm) of horizontal run of vent pipe length. NOTE: Stress levels in the pipe and fittings can be significantly increased by improper installation. If rigid pipe clamps are used to hold the pipe in p~ace, or if the pipe cannot move freely through a wall penetration, the pipe may be directly stressed, or high thermal stresses may be formed when the pipe heats up and expands. Install accordingly to minimize such stresses. VENT PIPE PREPARATION 1. INITIAL PREPARATION A. Make sure the solvent cement you are planning to use is designed for the specific application you are attempting. B. Know the physical and chemical characteristics and limitations of the PVC, PVC cellular core, ABS or CPVC piping materials that you are about to use. C. Know the reputation of your pipe and cement manufacturer and their products, D. Know your own qualifications or those of your contractor. The solvent welding technique of joining PVC, PVC cellular core, ABS or CPVC pipe is a specialized skill just as any other pipe fitting technique. F_ Closely supervise the installation and inspect the finished job before start-up, E Contact the manufacturer, supplier, or competent consulting agency if you have any questions about the application or installation or PVC, PVC cellular core, ABS or CPVC pipe. G. Take the time and effor~ to do a professional job. Shortcuts will only cause you problems and delays in start-up. The majod[y of failures in these systems are the result of shortcuts and/or improper joining techniques. 2. SELECTION OF MATERIALS PRIMER It is recommended that Tetrahydrofuran (THF) be used to prepare the surfaces of pipe and fittings for solvent welding. Do not use water, rags, gasoline or any other substitutes for cleaning PVC cellular core, ABS or CPVC surfaces. A chemical cleaner such as MEK may be used. CEMENT The cement should be a bodied cement of approximately 500 to 1600 cendpoise viscosity containing 10-20% (by weight) virgin PVC material solvated with tetrahydrofuran (THF). Small quantities of dimethyl formamide (DMF) may be included to act as a retarding agent to extend curing time Select the proper cement; Schedule 40 cement should be used for Schedule 40 pipe Never use all-purpose cements, commercial glues and adhesives orABS cement to join PVC or CPVC pipe and fittings. SAFETY PRECAUTION: PRIMERS AND CEMENTS ARE EXTREMELY FLAMMABLE AND MUST NOT BE STORED OR USED NEAR HEAT OR OPEN FLAME. ALSO. USE ONLY IN A WELL-VE NTILATED AREA, 12 CONTROLS AND SWITCHES All BTH models are provided with four pressure switches. These switches are essential to the safe and proper operation of the unit, All switches are wired in series. The controller is set up to shut the unit down whenever there is a failure of any of the switches. It is important to understand the purpose of each switch. NOTE: LOW GAS IS BLOCKED OUTLET LOCATED ON INLET PROVING SWITCH SIDE OF GAS VALVE. FIGURE 12. BLOWER PROVER SWITCH (SEE FIGURE 12) The Blower Prover Switch is provided on the heater to verify that the fan is operating. It is a positive pressure switch whose electrical contacts are normally open. When the fan increases the pressure in the burner, the pressure switch will allow the electrical contacts to close. The pressure switch is connected to the burner tap by a piece of tygon tubing. This tubing must be connected in order for the switch to change the electrical contacts. The controller requires that the electrical contacts on this air tlow switch be open before it will allow the blower to come on. BLOCKED OUTLET PROVER SWITCH (SEE FIGURE 12) The Blocked Outlet Prover Switch is set up to shut the unit off when a build- up of positive pressure in the exhaust vent pipe occurs. This switch is a positive pressure switch that requires an increase in pressure to change the electrical contacts from normally closed to open. When this switch prevents the unit from ignitieg, most likely the exhaust is blocked by some means Check to see if the condensate is allowed to flow freely from the exhaust elbow and for obstructions in the exhaust venting and exhaust vent terminal. Aisc verify that there is no more than fifty equivalent feet (15.2 m) of three inch PVC vent pipe on the exhaust BLOCKED INLET PROVER SWITCH (SEE FIGURE 12) The Blocked Inlet Prover Switch is set up to shut the unit off when a build- up of negative pressure in the intake vent pipe occurs This switch is a negative pressure switch that requires an increase in negative pressure to change the electrical contacts from normally closed to open. The switch is connected to the pressure tap on the PVC t~ange connected to the inlet of the blower. When this switch prevents the unit from igniting, most likely the intake is blocked by some means. Check to see if them is no more than fifty equivalent feet (15.2 m) of three inch PVC vent pipe on the intake Aisc verify that the intake and intake vent terminal is free of obstructions that may prevent air from entering the unit, 13 LOW GAS PRESSURE SWITCH (SEE FIGURE 12) The Low Gas Switch (LGS) is a single-pole, normally open pressure switch that will close its contacts when a rising pressure of 5.0 in. (1.25Kpa) W,C. is encountered. The contacts will open when the pressure falls below the fixed set point of 4.8"WC (1.18Kpa) for natural gas models and 8.5'~NC (2 08Kpe) for propane models. The LGS monitors the gas supply pressure to the heater. If the gas supply falls below 4.8"~NC (1.18Kpa), the main bumer is extinguished (if heater is running) or the heater will not start up. ON/OFF SWITCH The ON/OFF Switch is a single-pole, single-throw rocker switch. T;~is switch provides 120V from the line source to the heater. ~ CAUTION YHE WATER HEATER IS POLARITY SENSITIVE. BEFORE APPLYING ELECTRICITY TO THiS HEATER BE CERq'AIN THAT SUPPLY NEUTRAL WIRE TO GROUND CHECK INDICATES ZERO VOLTAGE HOT SURFACE IGNITER The Hot Surface Igniter is a device that ignites the main burner by high temperature (>1800°F or >982°C). When 120VAC is applied to the igniter, sufficient heat is generated to ignite the main burner. Although improvements have been made to strengthen the igniter, it is still fragile and care must be taken when handling the igniter to prevent breakage. GAS PIPING Contact your local gas service company to ensure that adequate gas service is available and to review applicable installation codes for your area. Size the main gas line in accordance with Table 3. The figures shown are for straight lengths of pipe at 0.5" (125Pa) W.C. pressure drop, whici~ is considered normal for Iow pressure systems Note that fittings such as elbows and tees will add to the pipe pressure drop. ~CAUTION DO NOT USE FLEXIBLE GAS PIPING TABLE 3. MAXIMUM CAPACITY OF PIPE IN CUBIC FEET OF GAS PER HOUR (Based upon a Pressure Drop of 0.5") Water Column and 0.6 Specific Gravity Gas and max. gas pressure of 0.5 psig) LENGTH NORMAL IRON PIPE SIZES (iNCHES) IN INPUT IN THOUSANDS BTU/HR LENGTH NORMAL IRON PIPE SIZES (INCHES) IN INPUT IN KW METERS 112" 314" 1" I 1/4" I 1/2" 2" 2 112" 3" 4" 3.0 51 105 199 410 615 1160 1845 3221 6735 6.1 35 73 142 278 428 805 1277 2255 4626 9,1 28 59 110 225 346 644 1031 1830 3748 12,2 24 50 94 193 290 556 878 1552 3192 15.2 21 44 83 170 264 492 776 1391 2840 t8,3 19 40 76 155 237 445 703 1259 2577 21.3 18 37 70 143 220 410 659 1142 2372 24,4 17 35 64 135 202 381 600 1083 2196 27.4 16 32 60 126 190 357 571 1010 2108 30.5 15 34) 57 117 182 337 542 952 1962 38.1 13 27 51 105 161 299 483 864 1757 45.7 12 25 47 95 146 278 439 776 1610 53.3 11 23 42 88 135 249 401 717 1464 61.0 10 21 40 82 126 234 375 688 1347 ,~ WARNING THE HEATER IS NOT iNTENDED FOR OPERATION AT HIGHERTHAN 10.5" (259 KPa) WATER COLUMN SUPPLY GAS PRESSURE. HIGHER GAS SUPPLY PRESSURES REQUIRE SUPPLEMENTAL REDUCING SERVICE REGULATION. EXPOSURETO HIGHER GAS SUPPLY PRESSURE MAY CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE GAS CONTROLS WHICH COULD RESULT IN FIRE OR EXPLOSION IF OVERPRESSURE HAS OCCURRED SUCH AS TH ROUGH IMPROPER TESTING OF GAS LINES OR EMERGENCY MALFUNCTION OF THE SUPPLY SYSTEM THE GAS VALVE MUST BE CHECKED FOR SAFE GPERATION~ MAKE SURE THATTHE OUTSIDE VENTS ON THE SUPPLY REGULATORS AND THE SAFETY VENTVALVESARE PROTECTED AGAINST SLOCKAGE THESEARE PARTS OF THE GAS SUPPLY SYSTEM, NOTTHE HEATER VENT BLOCKAGE MAY OCCUR DURING ICE STORMS ~T ~S IMPORTANT TO GUARD AGAINST GAS VALVE FOULING FROM CONTAMINANTS IN THE GAS WAYS SUCH FOULING MAY CAUSE IMPROPER OPERATION, FIRE OR EXPLOSION IF COPPER SUPPLY 1 INESARE USED THEY MUST BE INTERNALLY TINNED AND CERTIFIED FOR GAS SERVICE BEFORE ATTACHING THE GAS LINE BE SURE THATALL GAS PiPE iS CLEAN ONTHEtNSIDE. TO TRAp ANY DIRT OR FOREIGN MATERIAL IN THE GAS SUPPLY LINE, A DIRT LEG (SOMETIMES CALLED A SEDIMENTTRAP OR DRIP LEG) MUST BE INCORPORATED IN THE PIPING (SEE FIGURE 13). THE DIRT LEG MUST BE READILY ACCESSIBLE AND NOT SUBJECTTO FREEZING CONDITIONS INSTALL IN ACCORDANCE WITH RECOMMENDATIONS OF SERVING GAS SUPPLIERS. REFER TO THE NATIONAL FUEL GAS CODE. INLET PRESSURE ONIOFFf SWITCH REGULATOR OUTLET PRESSURE TAP .. VENT PLUG GA~ TO PILOT OUTLET REGULATED GAS SUPPLY LIN E.~~ MAIN GAS SHUTOFF VALVE DiRT LEG TEE FIGURE 13. CONNECTION OF GAS PIPE 1 When connecting gas pipe to unit, apply wrench to flange only. Note: Do not use wrench on gas valve or gas bracket. See Figure 14a, b, c. 2 PERFORMTHEGASLEAKTESTANYTIMEWORKISDONEONAGAS SYSTEM TO AVOID THE POSSIBILITY OF FIRE OR EXPLOSION WITH PROPERTY DAMAGE, PERSONAL INJURY OR LOSS OF LIFE i ECTIFIER OFFSET PLUG :'-... BLOWER .GASKET ~ ~ GAS~INLET GAs OUTLET POSITlO" VEN~RI FIGURE 14a. BTH 199/250 Models Only FIGURE 14b. BTH 150 Models Only REGULATOR ~-- VENT o Nil TK ~: ~ ~ 7~/~_ I *~" MANUAL SHUT OFF REGULATOR VALVE FIGURE 14c. BTH 120 Models Only The Gas Leak Test is performed as follows: Paint pipe connections upstream of gas control with a rich soap and water solution to test for leaks before operating main burner. Bubbles indicate gas leak. To stop leak, tighten pipe connections. After piping connections are checked, turn on main burner, With main burner in operation, paint pipe joints (including flanges), pilot gas tubing connections and control inlet and outlet with rich soap and water solution. Bubbles indicate gas leak To stop leak, tighten flange screws, joints and pipe connections Replace pad if leak can't be stopped. To prevent damage, care must be taken not to apply too much torque when aitaching gas supply pipe to gas valve inlet. Apply joint compounds (pipe dope) sparingly and only to the male threads of pipe joints. Do not apply compound to the first two threads. Use compounds resistant to the action of liquefied petroleum gases. 14 DISCONNECT THE APPLIANCE AND ITS MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE FROM THE GAS SUPPLY PIPING SYSTEM DURINGANY SUPPLY PRESSURE TESTING EXCEEDING 1/2 PSIG (3 45Kpa). GAS SUPPLY LINE MUST BE CAPPED WHEN DISCONNECTED FROM THE HEATER. FOR TEST PRESSURES OF 1/2 PSIG (3 45Kpa) OR LESS. THE APPLIANCE NEED NOT BE DISCONNECTED, BUT MUST BE ISOLATED FROM THE SUPPLY PRESSURE TEST BY CLOSING THE MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE. BEFORE PLACING THE HEATER IN OPERATION, CHECK FOR GAS LEAKAGE USE SOAP AND WATER SOLUTION OR OTHER MATERIAL ACCEPTABLE FORTHEPURPOSEOF LOCATINGGASLEAKS DONOTUSEMATCHES, CANDLES, FLAME OR OTHER SOURCES OF IGNITION FOR THIS PURPOSE PURGING Gas line purging is required with new piping or systems in which air has entered ~ CAUTION PURGING SHOULD BE PERFORMED BY PERSONS EXPERIENCED IN THIS TYPE OF GAS SERVICE TO AVOID RISK OF FIRE OR EXPLOSION. PURGE DISCHARGE MUST NO'[ ENTER CONFINED AREAS OR SPACES WHERE IGNITION CAN OCCUR. THE AREAMUST BE WELL VENTILATEDAND ALL SOURCES OF IGNITION MUST BE INACTIVATE D OR REMOVED GAS METER SIZE - CITY GASES ONLY Be sure that the gas meter has sufficient capacity to supply the full rated gas input of the water heater as well as the requirements of all other gas fired equipment supplied by the meter. If the gas meter is too small, ask the gas company to install a larger meter having adequate capacity. GAS PRESSURE REGULATION Main line gas pressure to the water heater should be between a maximum 105" {2 59Kpa) W.C. (14.0"/3.45Kpa for propane) and a minimum as shown in Table 4: that is, for Natural Gas, 4.8" (1.18Kpa) WC and 8 5" (2.08Kpa) for Propane Gas. The inlet gas pressure must not exceed the maximum value. A service regulator must be installed within 10' {305 cra) of unit. ~, WARNING FAILURE TO INSTALLA PRESSURE REGULATOR WITHIN I 0 FEET OF THE WATER HEATER CAN RESULT IN LEAKAGE OF FLUE GASES INTO THE SURROUNDING ROOM SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH COULD RESULT FROM INHALATION OF CARBON MONOXIDE GAS. GAS VALVES ~,WARNING SHOULD OVERHEATING OCCUR OR THE GAS SUPPLY FAIL TO SHUT OFF, TURN OFF THE MANUAL GAS CONTROL VALVE TO THE APPLIANCE. SYSTEM CONNECTIONS The system installation must conform to these instructions and to the local code authority having jurisdiction. Good practice requires that all heavy piping be supported THERMOMETERS (Not Supplied) Thermometers should be obtained and field installed as shown in the installation diagrams. Thermometers are installed in the system as a means of detecting the temperature of the outlet water supply. RELIEF VALVE This heater is equipped with an approved temperature and pressure relief valve. ASME ratings cover pressure relief. CSA ratings cover release rate with temperature actuation. FOR SAFE OPERATION OF THE WATER HEATER. THE RELIEF VALVE(S) MUST NOT BE REMOVED OR PLUGGED. tn addition to the appliance relief valve, each remote storage tank which may be used in conjunction with this appliance shall also be installed with a properly sized, rated and approved temperature (ANSI) and pressure (ASME) relief valve(s). This relief valve shall comply with the standard for relief valves for hot water supply systems. ANSI Z21.22-CSA 4.4. Your local code authority may have other specific relief valve requirements. ~WARNING THE PURPOSE OF A RELIEF VALVE iS TOAVOID EXCESSIVE PRESSURE OR TEMPERATURE INTO THE STEAM RANGE, WHICH MAY CAUSE SCALDING AT FIXTURES. TANK EXPLOSION, SYSTEM OR HEATER DAMAGE NO VALVE IS TO BE PLACED BETWEEN THE RELIEF VALVE AND THE TANK. A DRAIN LINE MUST BE CONNECTED TO THE RELIEF VALVE TO DIRECT DISCHARGE TO A SAFE LOCATION TO AVOID SCALDING OR WATER DAMAGE. THIS LINE MUST NOT BE REDUCED FROM THE SIZE OF THE VALVE OUTLETAND MUST NOT CONTAIN VALVES OR RESTRICTIONS, NOR SHOULD IT BE LOCATED IN FREEZING AREAS. DO NOTTHREAD OR CAP THE END OF THIS LINE. RESTRICTED OR BLOCKED DISCHARGE WILL DEFEATTH E PURPOSE OF THE VALVE AND IS UNSAFE. THE DISCHARGE LINE SHALL BE INSTALL ED TO ALLOW COMPLETE DRAINAGE OF BOTH THE VALVE AND LINE. WATER LINE CONNECTIONS This manual provides detailed installation diagrams (see back section of this manual) for typical methods of applicaben for the water heaters. The water heater may be instaltad by itself, or with a separate storage tank. CLOSED SYSTEM ,1~ CAUTION A closed system witl exist if a check valve (without bypass), pressure reducing valve {without bypass), or a water meter (without bypass) is installed in the cold water line between the water heater and street main (or well) Excessive pressure may develop causing premature tank failure or intermittent relief valve operation. This type of failure is not covered by the limited warranty. An expansion tank or a similar device may be required in the inlet supply line between the appliance and the meter or valve to compensate for the thermal expansion of water under supply pressure If a water heater is installed in a ClOSed water system, check local codes or contact the water supplier or local plumbing inspector on how to control this situation WATER (POTABLE) HEATING AND SPACE HEATING 1. All piping components connected to this unit for space heating applications shall be suitable for use with potable water, 2. Toxic chemicals, such as those used for boiler treatment, shall NEVER be introduced into this system. 15 3. This unit may never be connected to any existing heating system or component(s) previously used with non-potable water heating appliance. 4. When the system requires water for space heating at temperatures higher than required for domestic water purposes, a tempering valve must be installed, Please refer to installation diagrams on pages 23 through 28 in back of manual for suggested piping arrangements. HEATER WIRING IF ANY OF THE ORIGINAL WIRE AS SUPPLIED WITH THE APPLIANCE MUST BE REPLACED, IT MUST BE REPLACED WITH 105°C QR ITS EQUIVALENT, EXCEPT IN THE BURNER HOUSING IN THIS CASE USE 200°C WIRE. THE COMPUTER CONTROL REQUIRES A SOURCE OF STABLE CLEAN ELECTRICITY FOR PROPER OPERATION. INSTALLING THE HEATER ON A BRANCH CIRCUITTHAT HAS ELECTRONIC NOISE, IS SUBJECT TO FLUCTUATIONS IN VOLTAGE LEVEL OR HASAN APPLIANCE WHICH GENERATES EMF OF RFI INTERFERENCE CAN CAUSE THE CONTROLLER TO MALFUNCTION A HIGH QUALITY POWER CONDITIONER MUST BE INSTALLED IF THE ABOVE CONDITIONS EXIST. MALFUNCTIONS CAUSED BYA POOR ELECTRICAL SUPPLYARE NOT COVERED UNDER YOUR WARRANTY. The controller is wired to the heater as shown in Figure 15. The model and rating plate provides the electrical information needed to size the complete heater branch supply. All electrical work must be installed in accordance with the National Electrical Code, NFPA 70 or the Canadian Electrical Code, CSA C22,1 and local requirements. When installed, the appliance must be electrically grounded in accordance with local codes or. in the absence of local codes, with the National Electrical Code, ANSFNFPA 70 or the Canadian Electrical COde, CSA C22.1, DO NOT ENERGIZE THE BRANCH CIRCUIT BEFORE THE HEATER TANK ~S FILLED WITH WATER. NOTE: This controller is Polarity Sensitive. if the Hot and Neutral Supply Voltage is reversed, the controller will not sense flame Verify polarity before connecting the unit LOW GAS BLOCKED BLOCKED BLOWER GAS VALVE INLET OUTLET PROVER IGNITER RED FLAME ROD .gu TOP PROBE / }~.,,,~. BOSOM PROBE i ~° ~ITE REEN 199 AND 250 ONLY ~ 7 WHiT BLUE ~ 7 (BURNER BOLT) FIGURE 15. 16 USING THE ELECTRONIC CONTROLLER 1.Overview Interaction with the water heater controller is done through an up, a down, and three operation buttons. These buttons are illustrated to the right. Operation of the three lower buttons is defined immediately above them on the screen. The [UP] and [DN] buttons are used to navigate through the menus and make adjustments to the water heater. While the water heater is operating, the user interface will display the desktop screen (if there are no active faults or warnings). An example of this screen is shown to the right. The first temperature on this screen is the temperature of the water inside the tank. The second temperature on this screen is the Operating Set Point. ~he Operating Set Point is the temperature at which lhe water heater will maintain the water inside the tank. The third line on the screen is a text description of the Operational State of the water heater (please see Operating States for more details). The following status icons describe graphically operational details of the heater. The legend of all the status icons is listed below. Tank Temperature 103 °F Operating Set Point 120 °F Status: Heating Menu Help STAUS ICON DESCRIPTION The temperature of the water in the tank has fallen and the water heater wilt now initialize a new heating cycle The temperature of the water in the tank has reached the Operating Set Point. ~ ? k The controlis unable to initiate any further heating cycles. i This is usually caused by a fault condition detected by the control, but can also occur when an external system (like ~ an energy management system) has asked the water heater to discontinue any further heat cycles, ~ The blower is being energized. STAUS ICON DESCRIPTION The igniter has been energized The igniter has been energized and sufficient current for ignition has been detected. O NO The control has requested that the gas valve be turned The control has sensed flame in the burner I The cont roi has detecled a fault coudilion The control has detected a warning condition These conditions will not cause the water heater to discontinue · further heating cycles, but does merit attention. 17 2. Operating States In the main desktop screen, there are some specific Operating States that are indicated on the status line. These are summarized below: STATE DESCRIPTION Standby The water heater is not in an active heating cycle. Usually this means the temperature in the tank has reached a SL~lticient temperature and has not dropped Iow enough to initiate a call for heat input Verification The electronic controls are waiting for specific ~ conditions to occur (primarily pressure switch states) before the unit can continue to heat water. Short Cycle Delay The electronic controls are waiting a defined period of time before initiating another call for heat just alter the last on has ended. This prevents the water heater from"Short Cycling" Pre-Purge The blower has been energized and excess gas in the heater exchanger is being flushed to start a new heating cycle Igniter Warmup The igniter has been energized and is currently STATE DESCRIPTION Ignition Activati(~n The controls are allowing for a steady llama to be established inthe burner Ignition Verification Assuranceofproberf~amesenseisbeingdetermined Inter-Purge Alter a failure to ignite the burner, the control is attempting ta purge any excess gas from the heater exchanger before another attempt th light. Heating The water heater has been properly lit, and the water in the tank is being heated Pest-Purge Excess gas is being pushed out of the heater excha ngeralter a successful heating cycle. Fault The water heater control has detected a fault No further he ating of the water will be do ne. 3. Adjusting the Operating Set Point The Operating Set Point of this water heater determines the regulated temperature for tfie water in the tank. This parameter is adjusted in the Temperature menu. Items in this menu aJlow you to monitor different temperature readings in the tank along with adjusting the Operating Set Point and Differential ACTION: From the desktop screen, press Menu. DISPLAY: ACTION: Press Change then use the UP and DOWN buttons to change the Set Point. Note: This procedure can also be used to change the Differential. The Tank, Upper and Lower Temperatures are not user changeable. They are determined by the l~mperature probes on the heater. DISPLAY: Tank Temperature 103 °F Opera6ng Set Point 120 °F Status: Heating Help Differential 5°F Tank Temperature 127°F Upper Temperature 130°F Lower Temperature 113°F (Heater Regulated to Tank) Back Help ACTION: From the Main Menu. press Select to enter the "Temperatures" screen. DISPLAY: Heater Status Display Settings Heater Information Current Fault (none) ~ Back Help ACTION: Press Update to accept the change or Cancel to reset it. DISPLAY: IOperafing Set Point 120°FI Differential 5°F Tank Temperature 127°F Upper Temperature 130°F Lower Temperature 113°F (Heater Regulated to Tank) Update Cancel 18 4. Changing the Display Units The display interface to the heater has the option of selecting between degrees Fahrenheit and degrees Celsius for temperature disprays, This can be found in the "Display Settings" menu A~so in this menu, you may adjust how the backlighl operates and the contrast of the LCD screen. ACTION: From the Main Menu, press the DOWN button to highlight "Display Settings" then press Select. DISPLAY: Heater Status Heater Information Current Fault (none) Back Help ACTION: Use the UP and DOWN buttons to highlight the desired setting. Then press Change. Again, use the UP and DOWN buttons to scroll through the options for that setting. DISPLAY: Backllght Delay 30s Contrast Back Help ACTION: Press Update to accept the change or Cancel to reject it. DISPLAY: ITemperature Units °~ Backlight Delay 30s Contrast 60% Update Cancel 5. Fault and Warning Conditions This water heater is equipped with electronic controls that have the ability to monitor almost all aspects of the water heater operation In the case that there is an undesirable or unsafe condition that occurs, the water heater controls will detect this condition and determine the appropriate action, Part of this is displaying the information on the LCD in plain text that acco- rately describes the condition and diagnostics information that can be used to correct the issue. There are two types of conditions that can occur dudng operation. These are Warnings and Faults: · Warnings: This is a non-safety related condition that the control has detected that may cause the water heater to operate in a less than optimal condition, but does not pose a safety concern. NOTE: When these conditions occur, continued heating cycles will con- tinue and the heater will attempt to regulate the water in the tank to the Operating Set Point. Example of a Warning: Warning: Anode Under Current (Press [OOWN) for more....) Back Advanc · Faults: This is a safety related condition that has been detected by the heater. NOTE: When these conditions occur, the water heater will not continue any further heating cycles and the water will no longer be heated until the condition is corrected and, in most cases, power has been cycled. Example of a Fault: Blower Prover Open Back Advanced Advanced Diagnostics Information When a fault or warning has been declared, advanced information can be found in the control. By pressing the Advanced button, detailed information can be found regarding diagnosing and resolving the problem WARNING: Usage of the Advanced information requires ability equivalent to that of a licensed tradesmen in the field involved. 6. Access to the Current Fault or Warning When a fault or warning has been detected by the control, it will automati- cally be displayed on the screen and the back light will blink. If you chooee to leave the current fault or warning by pressing the Back key, you can always return to the fault screen through the menu. Temperatures Heater Status Display Settings Heater Information Back Help 19 ACTION: To get to the current fault information screen, press Menu. DISPLAY: Tank Temperature 103 ° F Operating Set Point 120 °F Status: Heating Help ACTION: Press the DOWN button to highlight "current Fault" and press Select. DISPLAY: Heater Status Display Settings Heater Information Back Help ACTION: Press the DOWN button for more information. DISPLAY: Blower Prover Open IPress [DOWN] for more...) Back Advanoed 7. Viewing the Fault History The controller for this water heater will store a histopJ of ten of the last Fault and Warning conditions that occurred. This is stored in the Fault History. Along with all the information about the fautt, including a estimate time of when the fault occurred, information regarding the advanced diagnostics for that fauti can be accessed at any time. ACTION: Press the DOWN button for more information. DISPLAY: Heater Status Display Settings Heater Information Current Fault (none) ~'~ Back Help ACTION: Press the DOWN key to scrofl through the fault history. If you select a specific fault or warning, you may press the VlEVV button to view details regarding this fault. DISPLAY: 2 mins ago · 2: Low Gas (A6) 5 mins ago 3: Blocked Exhaust Vent (AS) 1 hr 2 rains ago 4: Flame Detect Error (Ag) View Back Help 8, Viewing Information About the Heater The electronic control for this water heater monitors many different as- pects of the water to ensure safe and optimal operation. Much of the information monitored is available to view in two areas of the control The first is the "Heater Status" and; the second is "Heater Information." These items can be selected through the main menu in the same fashion as described above. In these menus, detailed information about the water heater and the current status of specitic conditions can be found. PRIOR TO START UP REQUIRED ABILITY INSTALLATION OR SERVICE OF TH IS WATER HEATER REQUIRES ABILITY EQUIVALENT TO THAT OF A LICENSED TRADESMAN IN THE FIELD INVOLVED. PLUMBING, AIR SUPPLY, VENTING, GAS SUPPLY AND ELECTRICALWORKARE REQUIRED. Before attempting star[-up, thoroughly study and familiarize yourself with the exact sequence of operation and all other details on the specific heater being used. The power burner is equipped with an ignition system which automatically sequences prepurge and igni]ion, senses and ignites main burner flame and sequences burner operation. Heater is equipped with an ignition control which locks out after three unsuccessful ignition attempts, Familiarize yourself with the sequence of operation of this unit prior to start-up. Be certain that the water heater is full of water, that air is purged from all lines, there are no leaks (gas and water), and all inlet water lines are open. The following test equipment should be on hand (all test equipment must be acclimated to ambient temperature before calibration and use.) Two U-tube manometers or calibrated pressure gages that can read 0-10" (O-2.5Kpa) and 0-35" (0-8.7Kpe) W.C. pressure gauges Attach a gas pressure gauge or manometer to the upstream side of main gas cock and a gas pressure gauge or manometer to the manifold pressure tap (see Figure 15). · You are now ready to begin the burner start-up procedure. 2O OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS IMPORTANT IT IS RECOMMENDED THATA QUALIFIED SERVICE TECHNICIAN PERFORM THE INITIAL FIRING OF THE HEATER. AT THISTIME THE USER SHOULD ASK TH E TECHNICIAN ANY QUESTIONS IN REGARD TOTHE OPERATIONAND MAINTENANCE OF THE UNIT ,~ CAUTION BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH THE OPERATION OF THE UNIT, MAKE SURE HEATERAND SYS7 EMARE FILLED WITH WATERANDALLAIR IS EXPELLED FROM HEATER AND PIPING NEVER OPERATE THE HEATER WITHOUT FIRST BEING CERTAIN fl'iS FILLED WITH WATERAND ATEMPERATUREAND A PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE IS INSTALLED IN THE RELIEF VALVE OPENING OF THE HEATER DO NOT A3q'EMPT TO OPERATE HEATER WITH COLD WATER INLET VALVE CLOSED FILLING: 1. Close the heater drain valve. 2, Open a nearby hot water faucet to permit the air in the system Io escape. 3, Fully open the cold water inlet pipe valve allowing the heater and piping to be filled. 4. Close the hot water faucet as water starts to flow. 5. The heater is ready to be operated. TH E MAIN MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE MUST HAVE BEEN CLOSED FORAT LEAST FIVE (5) MINUTES THIS WAITING PERIOD IS AN IMPORTANT SAFETY STEP. ITS PURPOSE IS TO PERMIT GAS THAT MIGHT HAVE ACCUMULATED IN THE COMBUSTION CHAMBER TO CLEAR, IF YOU DETECT GAS AT TH E END OF THIS PERIOD, DO NOT PROCEED WITH LIGHTING RECOGNIZE THAT GAS ODOR, EVEN IF IT SEEMS WEAK, MAY INDICATE THE PRESENCE OFACCUMULATED GAS SOMEPLACE IN THEAREAWITH A RISK OF FIRE OR EXPLOSION. SEE THE FRONT PAGE FOR STEPS TO BE TAKEN. DO NOT USE THiS HEATER IF ANY PART HAS BEEN UNDER WATER IMMEDIATELY CALLAQUALIFIED SERVICE TECHNICIAN TO INSPECT THE HEATERANDTO REPLACE ANY PART OF THE CONTROL SYSTEMAND ANY GAS CONTROL WHICH HAS BEEN UNDER WATER LIGHTTHE UNIT IN ACCORDANCE W~TH THE OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS LABEL ATTACHE D TO THE HEATER THESE INSTRUCTIONSARE REPEATED IN THE LIGHTINGAND OPERATING LABEL ILLUSTRATION ON PAGE 20 IN TH iS MAN UAL ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE INITIAL START-UP - 120 AND 150 MODELS Main line gas pressure to the water heater for natural gas shostd be beiween a maximum of 10.5" (2.59Kpa for natural gas) W.C. (14.0"/3.45Kpa for propane) and a minimum as shown in Table 4: that is, for Natural Gas, 48 (1.18Kpa) W.C. and 8.5" (2.08Kpa) for Propane Gas. The inlet gas pressure must not exceed the maximum value A service regulator must be installed within 10' (305 cm) of the unit. Check gas line pressure with a manometer. Check manifold pressure (see Table 4, page 20) using a pressure gauge (manometer) connected to the manifold pressure tap on the gas control valve, (Figure15). If full rate adjustment is required, remove cover screw from top of the gas control valve, (Figure 15). Using a small screwdriver, turn adjusting screw clockwise/~ to increase or counterclockwise ~ to decrease gas pressure ffi obtain 4.0" {1 kPa) for natural gas and 100" W.C. (2.5 Kpa) for L.P. Gas 3. Cycle the burner on and off several times to check its operation 4. Check the operation of the limit and operating controls. 5. Check the vent system seams and joints and ensure that them is no discharge of flue products into the room. 6 Check the input rate. For appliance installation locations with elevations above 6500 feet (1982 meters) refer to HIGH ALTITUDE INSTALLATIONS section of this manual. a. Attach a pressure gauge (manometer) to the manifold pressure tap (Figure 16) and refer to Table 4, page 20 for correcl pressure. b Use this formuta to "clock" the meter. Be sure other gas consuming appliances are not operating dudng this interval. 3600 X H = Btuh T Should it be necessary to adjust the gas pressure to the burner, to obtain the full input rate, the steps below should be followed: T = Time in seconds to burn I cubic foot of gas. (With a s~pwatch read the gas meter and measure the amount of time required for the heater to consume 1 cubic foot of gas.) H = Heating value of gas (in Btu's per cubic foot of gas). Btuh = Actual heater input rate, in Btuh. EXAMPLE: (Using BTH-150 heater) 3600 T = 25.25 seconds 25.25 X 1050 = 150,000 Btuh (44 Kw) H = 1050 Btu/it? BTUH = ? For high altitude installations, compare result to the derated input required for the elevation at the installation location. c. Remove the pressure regulator cover screw (Figure 16) and adjust the pressure by turning the adjusting screw with a small screwdriver. Do not exceed 4.0" (1 kPa) nateral gas models and 10.0" W,C, (2 5Kpa) on the propane models. /~f Clockwise to increase and rate. gas pressure input ~'~ Counterclockwise to decrease and rate. gas pressure input d. "Clock" the meter as in step (b) above. e. Repeat steps (c) and (d) until the specified input rate is achieved. f. Turn the manual gas valve to "OFF", Replace the pressure regulator cover screw. Remove the pressure gauge or manometer from the manifold pressure tap. Replace the set screw in the rr~nifold pressure tap. if the gas pressure regulator cannot be adjusted to give the full input rating with sufficient gas pressure at the valve, check to ensure the unit is equipped with the correct odfice. ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE INITIAL START-UP - 199 AND 250 MODELS Main line gas pressure to the water heater for natural gas should be between a maximum of 10.5" (2 59Kpa for natural gas) W.C. (14.0"/3 45Kpa for propane) and a minimum as shown in Table 4: that is, for Natural Gas 4" (.98Kpa) W.C and 90" (1.97Kpa) for Propane Gas. The inlet gas pressure must not exceed the maximum value, A service regulator must be installed within 10' (305 cm) of the unit The BTH 199 and 250 models incorporate a new gas control, which operates at 0"W C (0kPa) for both natural and propane gas. These models are configured prior to being shipped from the factory and no adjustments are necessary prior to startup. The controller monitors the air-flow and makes adjustments to the fan speed which in effect controls the amount of gas flow Therefore, the unit will self-adjust to acquire the correct amount of input. Once the unit is installed and filled with water and the inlet pressures confirmed, simply turn the switch "on" and observe operation. Cycle the unit "off" and "on" several times to ensure proper operation. 21 ~' WARNING UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHOULD THE INPUT EXCEED THE RATE SHOWN ON THE HEATER RATING PLATE OVER FIRING COULD RESULT IN DAMAGE OR SOOTING OF THE HEATER CATHODIC PROTECTION ~CAUTION HYDROGEN GAS CAN BE PRODUCED IN AHOT WATER SYSTEM SERVED BY THiS HEATER THAT HAS NOT BEEN USED FOR A LONG PERIOD OF TIME (GENERALLY TWO WEEKS OR MORE). HYDROGEN GAS IS EXTREMELY FLAMMABLE To reduce the risk of injury under these conditions, it is recommended that a hot water faucet be opened for several minutes before using any electrical appliance connected to the hot water system. If hydrogen is present, there will probably be an unusual sound such as air escaping through the pipe as the water begins to flow. There should be no smoking or open flame near the faucet at the time it is open. PRECAUTIONS iF THE UN IT IS EXPOSED TO THE FOLLOWING DO NOT OPERATE HEATER UNTIL ALL CORRECTIVE STEPS HAVE BEEN MADE BY A QUALIFIED SERVICEMAN. I FLOODING TO ORABOVE THE LEVELOF THE BURNER OR CONTROLS 2. EXTERNAl_FIRING 3 DAMAGE 4. FIRING WITHOUT WATIER 5. SOOTING NEVER OPERATE THE HEATER WITHOUT FIRST BEING CERfAIN iT IS FILLED WITH WATERAND ATEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE IS INSTALLED IN THE RELIEF VALVE OPENING OF THE H EATER. SHOULD OVERHEATING OCCUR OR TH E GAS SUPPLY FAILTO SHUT OFF, TURN OFF THE MANUAL GAS CONTROL VALVE TO THE APPLIANCE GENERAL INFORMATION POWER BURNER The initial start-up procedure of the unit is provided on page 18, The sequence of operation of the unit is provided on page 15. It is imporlant to note that the controller has a reset button on the control box, Figure 1. The reset button is a safety device and would not normally be used, HIGH LIMIT The high limit (not adjustable) is factory set to cutout at 202°F {94°C). The controller must be manually reset by depressing the reset button on front of the control when water temperature drops to below 160~F (71°C). TABLE 4 Natural Propane Natural Propane GAS SUPPLY Gas Gas Gas Gas SPECIFICATIONS f20/t50 t201150 t99/250 199/250 MaximumGasSuppiyPressure 10.$"W~ 14.0"W~ 105"WC 14.0"VvC (2.59kpa) (345kpa) (259kpa) (34§kpa) Nominal Gas Supply Pressure 70"WC 11.(TWC 7~0"WC 110"W~ (174Kpa) (274Kpa) (1.74Kpa) (2.74Kpa) Minimum Gas Supply Pressure 4.8" WC 8.5" WC 4.8' WC 8.5" WC (1.18Kpa) (208Kpa) (1.18Kpa) (208Kpa) Manifold Pressure 40" WC 10.~ WC 0" WC 0" WC (OKpe) (0Kpa) (0Kpa) (0Kpa) HIGH ALTITUDE INSTALLATIONS '~' WARNING THE 199 AND 250 HEATERS ARE CERTIFIED FOR USE WITHOUT MODIFICATION FOR ALTITUDES UPTO 10,100 FT (3078 METERS) THE 120 AND t 50 HEATERS ARE CERTIFIED FOR USE WITHOUT MODIFICATION FOR ALTITUDES UP TO 7',700 FT (2347 METERS). INSTALLATIONSABOVE THESE ALTITU DES MAY REQUIRE REPLACEMENT OF TH E BURNER ORIFICE. CALL THE TECHNICAL CENTERAT (800) 527-1953 FOR REQUIREMENTS. Some gas utility companies derate their gas for altitude, making it unnecessary to install high altitude orifices. Call the local gas or utility company to vedfy BTU content. Due to the input rating reduction at high altitudes, the output rating of the appliance is also reduced and should be compensated for in the sizing of the equipment for applications. MAINTENANCE GENERAL KEEP APPLIANCE AREA CLEAR AND FREE FROM COMBUSTIBLE MATERIALS, GASOLINE AND OTHER FLAMMABLE VAPORS AND LIQUIDS: (SEE WARNING ON PAGE 5, LOCATING THE HEATER). Water heater maintenance includes periodic tank flushing and cleaning, and removal of lime scale. The unit should be inspected and adjusted to maintain proper combustion. Refer to the following table. A pedodic inspecgon of the venting system should be made. Where used, the water circulating pump should be oiled. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE Following are the instructions for performing some of the recommended maintenance. Unit inspection and adjustment should be performed by a competent technician. Tank Sediment Monthly Flushing Tank Lime Scale Semi UN-LIME® Removal Annually Delirr~r Relief Valve Inspect Semi Annually Clean Inlet Blower Screen and As Required Soft Brush Blower Wheel Vent System Inspect Every 3 Joints should Months be sealed 22 WAR N I N G: If you do not follow these instructions exactly, a fire or explosion may result causing property damage, personal injury or loss of life. BEFORE OPERATING: ENTIRE SYSTEM MUST BE FILLED WITH WATER AND AIR PURGED FROM ALL LINES A. This appliance does not have a pilot. It is equipped with an ignition device which automatically lights the burner. Do not try to light the burner by hand. B. BEFORE OPERATING smell all around the appliance area for gas. Be sure to smell next to the floor because some gas is heavier than air and will settle on the floor. WHAT TO DO IF YOU SMELL GAS: · Do not try to light any appliance. · Do not touch any electric switch; do not use any phone in your building. · Immediately call your gas supplier from a neighbor's phone. Follow the gas suppliers instructions. · If you cannot roach your gas supplier, call the fire department. C. Use only your hand to push in or turn the gas control knob. Never use tools. If the knob will not push in or turn by hand, don't try to repair it, call a qualified service technician, Force or attempted repair may result in a fire or explosion. D. Do not use this appliance if any part has been under water. Immediately call a qualified service technician to inspect the appliance and to replace any part of the control system and any gas control which has been under water. 1. ~ STOP! Read the safety information above on this label. 2. Set the thermostat to lowest setting. 3. Turn offall electric power to the appliance. 4. This appliance is equipped with an ignition device which automatically lights the burner. Do not try to light the burner by hand. GAS CONTROL KNOB 5. Remove top cover. 6. Push in control knob slightly and turn clockwise (...~ to "OFF". 7. Wait five (5) minutes to clear out any gas. If then smell gas, (~ STOP! Follow you in the safety informatio'h"above on this label If you don't smell gas, go on to next step. 8. Turn gas control knob counterclockwise to "ON". 9. Replace top cover. 10. Turn OD all electric power to the appliance. 11. Set thermostat to desired setting. 12. If the appliance will not operate, follow the instructions "To Tum Off Gas To Appliance" and call your service technician or gas supplier. )PLIANCE 1. Set the thermostat to lowest setting. 2. Turn off all electric power to the appliance if service is to be performed. 3. Remove top cover. 4. Push in gas control knob slightly and turn clockwise ¢ ~ to "OFF". Do not force. 5. Replace top cover. BTH 120 MODELS ONLY. 23 FOR YOUR SAFETY READ BEFORE OPERATING WARNING: If you do not follow these instructions exactly, a fire or explosion may result causing property damage, personal injury or loss of life. AThis appliance does not have a pilot. It is equipped with an ignition device which automatically lights the burner. Do no~t try to light the burner by hand B, BEFORE OPERATING smell all around the appliance area for gas Be sure to smell next to the floor because some gas is heavier than air and will settle on the floor. "WHAT TO DO IF YOU SMELL GAS" · Do not try to light any appliance. · Do not touch any electric switch; do not use any telephone in your building. · Immediately call your gas supplier from a neighbor's telephone. Followthe gas suppliers instructions. · If you cannot reach your gas supplier, call the fire department. C Use only your hand to switch the gas valve on or off. Never use tools. If the on/off switch will not move, don't try to repair it. Call a qualified service technician Force or attempted repair may result in a fire or explosion. D Do not use this appliance if any part has been under water, Immediately call a qualified service technician to inspect the appliance and to replace any part of the control system and any gas control which has been under water OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 1 Ilf~lSTOP! Read the safety information above on this label. 2. Set thermostat to lowest setting, 3. Turn off all electric power to the appliance· 4 This appliance is equipped with an ignition device which automatically lights the burner. Do not try to light the burner by hand 5 Move "Off/On" switch to the "Off' position Wait five(5) minutes to clear out any gas If you then on/off Switch smell gas, (~¢) STOP!. Follow "B" in the safety information above on this label. If you don't smell gas, go on to next step 6 Move "Off/On" switch to the "On" position 7 Turn on all electric power to the appliance. 8. Set thermostat to desired setting 9 If the appliance will not operate, follow the instructions "To Turn Off Gas To Appliance" and call your service technician or gas supplier. TURN OFF GAS TO APPLIANCE · Set the thermostat to lowest setting 3. Move "Off/On" switch to the "Off' position, de not force. 2. Turn off all electric power to appliance if service is to be performed 197775 00O REV XX BTH 150 MODELS ONLY. 24 FORYOUR SAFETY READ BEFORE OPERATING WARN I N (~: If you do not follow these iostructioos exactly, a fire or I~lk explosion may result causing property damage, personal injury or 'oss of life. I ~ BEFORE OPERATING: ENTIRE SYSTEM MUST BE FILLED WITH WATER ANO AIR PURGED FROM ALL LtNES. A This appliance does not have a pilot It is equipped with an ignition device which automatically lights the burner DO not try lo light the burner by hand, B BEFORE OPERATING smell all around the appliance Brae for gas Be sure to smell next tO the floor because some gas is heavier than Bit and will settle on the floor WHAT TO DO IF YOU SMELL GAS · Do not try to light any appliance · DO not tough any electric switch; do not use any phone in your building · Immediately call your gas supplier from a neighbor's phone Follow the gas supplier's instructions C Use only your hand to push in the control OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Menu Help ON/OFF SWITCH 1 (~1"~ STOP! Read the safety information above on this label '. 2. Set the ON/OFF switch on the control panel to the "ON" position. 3 Set the thermostat to the lowest setting 4. Set the ON/OFF switch on the control box to the "OFF" position 5 This appliance is equipped with a device which automatically lights the burner. DO NOT TRY TO LIGHT THE BURNER BY HAND, 6 Wait five (5) minutes to ~ clear out any gas. If you then smell gas,,~ STOP! Follow "B" in the safety information above on this label. If you don't smell gas, go to the next step. 7~ Turn on all electrical power to the appliance. 8. Set the ON/OFF switch on the control box to the "ON" post/t/on. 9. Set the thermostat to the desired setting. CAUTION: Hotter water increases the risk of scald injury. Consult the instruction manual before changing temperature. 10If the appliance will not operate, follow the instruc- tions "TO TURN OFF GAS TO APPLIANCE" and call your technician or gas supplier. WARNING: TURN OFF ALL ELECTRIC POWER BEFORE SERVICING. TURN OFF GAS TO APPLIANCE 1. Set the thermostat to the lowest setting 2. Set the ON/OFF switch on the control panel to the "OFF" postitioo. 3 Turn off all electrical power to the appliance if service is to be performed 197781-000 REV XX BTH 199/250 MODELS ONLY. 25 FLUSHING 1. Turn off the heater electrical disconnect switch. 2 Open the drain valve and allow water to flow until it runs clean. 3 Close the drain valve when finished flushing. 4 Turn on the heater electrical disconnect switch. DRAINING The heater must be drained if it is to be shut down and exposed to freezing temperatures Maintenance and service procedures may also require draining the heater, 1 Turn off the heater electrical disconnect switch 2 Close the cold water inlet valve to heater. 3. Open a nearby hot water faucet to vent the system, 4. Open the heater drain valve. TANK CLEANOUT CLEANOUT OPENING GASKET CLEANOUT~''~ COVER CLEANOUT ACCESS PANEL FIGURE 16. To dissolve and remove the more stubborn mineral deposits, A.O. Smith UN.LIME® Professional Delimer should be used. 5. If the heater is being drained for an extended shutdown, it is suggested the drain valve be left open dudng this period. · Follow FILLING instructions when restoring hot water service. SEDIMENT REMOVAL Waterborne impurities consist of the particles of soil and sand which settle out and form a layer of sediment on the bo[tom of the tank. For convenience, sediment removal and lime scale removal should be performed at the same time, LIME SCALE REMOVAL The amount of calcium carbonate (lime) released from water is in direct proportion to water temperature and usage. The higher the watar temperature or water usage, the more lime deposits are dropped out of the water. This is Ihe lime scale which forms in pipes, heaters and on cooking utensils Lime accumulation not only reduces the life of the equipment but also reduces efficiency of the heater and increases fuel consumption The usage of water softening equipment greatly reduces the hardness of the water. However, this equipment does not always remove all of the hardness {lime). For this reason it is recommended that a regular schedule for deliming be maintained. The depth of time buildup should be measured periodically. Heaters will have about 3" (7.6cm) of lime buildup when the level of lime has reached the bottom of the cleanout opening or about 1" (2,5cm) of lime buildup if it has reached the drain valve opening. A schedule for deliming should be set up, based on the amount of time it would take for a 1" (2.5cm) buildup of lime A.O. Smith UN*LIME® Professional Delimer is an easy to handle patented food grade acid formulated specifically for lime scale removal from all types of water using equipment. Available in 1 gallon (3.8L) (part no. 4763) and 5 gallon (19L) (part no. 4813) sizes. Hydrochloric base acids are not recommended for use on glass-lined tanks. A.O. Smith Form No. 4800, entitled "Why. When and How", describes tank cleaning methods and materials. UN-LIME and the booklet may be obtained through your A.O. Smith dealer or distributor. The cleanout opening is shown in Figure 16. To clean heater through cleanout opening, proceed as follow: 1 Turn off water inlet valve, the heater electrical disconnect switch and open drain valve 2 Remove outer cover plate from lower side of heater jacket. 3. Remove cover from cleanout opening, 4. Remove lime, scale or sediment using care not to damage the glass-lining, 5 Inspect cleanout plate gasket: If new gasket is required, replace with A. O Smith pad no. 99038. 6 Install cleanout plate. Be sure to draw plate up tight by tightening screws securely 7. Close drain valve, open water inlet line and turn on the power burner electrical disconnect switch. Example 1: initial inspection shows 1/2" (1.3cm) of lime accumulation. Therefore, the heater can be delimed once a year. Example 2: Initial inspection shows 2" (5cra) of lime accumulation, Therefore, the heater should be delimed every 3 months. Sediment and lime scale removal may be accomplished through the cleanout opening furnished on the heater, see Figure 25. The heater must be drained, see DRAINING, before removing cleanout cover on tank. 8 Check for water leakage 9 Replace outer jacket cover plate POWERED ANODE SYSTEM The BTH 120-250 are factory equipped with a powered anode system. The anodes are of a permanent design and do not need replacing unless damaged. 26 DRAIN VALVE AND ACCESS PANELS The heaters are equipped with a 3/4" drain valve. An access panel covers the cleanout opening in the tank which is sealed by a gasket and cover, figure 25. RELIEF VALVE At least twice a year, the temperature and pressure relief valve should be checked to ensure that it is in operating condition. To check the relief valve, lift the lever at the end of the valve several times. The valve should seat properly and operate freely, If water does not flow, remove and inspect for obstructions or corrosion Replace with a new valve of the recommended size as necessary. Inspection of the valve should be performed at least every three years. Do not attempt to repair the valve, as this could result in improper operation and a tank explosion. In areas with poor water conditions, it may be necessary to inspect the T&P valve more often than every three years. ,~ CAUTION BEFORE MANUALLY OPERATING THE VALVE, MAKE SURE THATA DRAIN LINE HAS BEENAI~ACHED TO THE VALVE TO DIRECTTHE DISCHARGETO AN OPEN DRAIN, FAILURE TO TAKE TH IS PRECAUTION COULD MEAN CONTACT WITH EXTREMELY HOT WATER PASSING OUT THE VALVE DURING THIS CHECKING OPERATION. If the temperature and pressure relief valve on the heater discharges periodically or continuously, it may be due to thermal expansion of water in a closed water supply system, or, it may be due to a faulty relief vane. Thermal expansion is the normal response of water when it is heated. In a closed system, thermal expansion will cause the system pressure to build until the relief valve actuation pressure is equaled. Then, the relief valve will open, allowing some water to escape, slightly Iowedng the pressure. Contact your water supplier or local plumbing inspector on how to control this situation. Two common corrections are listed in the Checklist and Se~ice Information which appears later in this manual. ABOVEALL, DO NOT PLUG THE TEMPERATUREAND PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE. THIS IS NOTA SOLUTION AND CAN CREATE A HAZARDOUS SITUATION. CIRCULATING PUMP The water heating system may include a circulating pump. Where used, it should be lubricated as directed by the circulator manufacturer. VENT SYSTEM Examine the vent system every 3 months. Points of inspection are as follows: 1. Check for obstructions and/or deterioration of vent piping and vent hood. Replace immediately where needed. 2. Vent pipe and vent hood screen should be cleaned of foreign material and soot. The screen is located inside the vent hood outlet and is accessible from the outside of the hood. Do not reach inside the vent hood when the heater is in operation. 3. Check all vent system connections for leakage and reseal as required using Hi Temp Silicone sealer or equivalent. 27 INSTALLATION DIAGRAMS ONE TEMPERATURE - ONE HEATER VERTICAL STORAGE TAN K FORCED CIRCULATION WITH OR WITHOUT BUILDING REClRCULATION CAUTION: IF THE PLUMBING REQUIRES THE USE OF PIPES WITH DISSIMILAR MATERIAL (FOR EXAMPLE, STEEL AND COPPER), USE DIELECTRIC UNIONS TO PREVENTAN ELECTRO-GALVANtC ACTION BETWEEN THE P~PING COMPONENTS WITH DISSIMILAR MATERIALS HOT WATER OUTLET *T&P THERMOMETER TANK TANK VACUUM RELIEFi VALVE CAUTION: iF BUILDING COLD WATER SUPPLY HAS A RACK- FLOW PREVENTER, CHECK VALVE OR WATER METER WITH CHECK VALVE PROVISIONS FOR THERMAL EXPANSION OF WATER IN THE HOT WATER SYSTEM MUST BE PROVIDED NOTE: CONNECT RETURN LINE FROM HOT WATER CIRCULATING LOOP (IF USED) TO COLD WATER INLET LINE * PIPE TO OPEN DRAIN INSTALL IN ACCORDANCE WITH LOC, AL CODES ONE TEMPERATURE -ONE HEATER HORIZONTAL STORAGE TANK FORCED CIRCULATION WITH OR WITHOUT BUILDING RECIRCULATION ADANGER SAFE TEMPERATURE Af F~XTURES SEE WATER TEMPERATURE CONTROL WARNING ON PAGE 4 IF HIGHER PREHEAT TEMPERATURES ARE *T&P NECESSARY TO ORTAIN ~DEQUATE ROOSTER ~ RELIEF OUTPUT, ADD AN ANTESCALD VALVE FOR HOT HOT WATER OUTLET RELIEF VALVE CAUTION: IF THE PLUMBING REQUIRES THE USE OF PIPES WiTH DISSIMILAR MATERIAL (FOR EXAMPLE, STEEL AND COPPER), USE D~ELECTRIC UNIONS TO PREVENTAN ELECTRO-GALVANIC ACTION BETWEEN THE PIPING COMPONENTS WiTH DISSIMILAR MATERIALS HEATER RETURN LINE FROM BUILDING CIRCULATING LOOP (IF USED) TANK TEMPERATURE CONTROL VACUUM RELIEF VALVE INSTALL PER LOCALCODES. PLUG COCK ~COLD WATER SUPPLY CHECK VALVE ~-- 3/4" #75 ALL BRONZE CIRCULATING PUMP 28 CIRCULATING PUMP WIRING DIAGRAM STORAGE TANK TEMPERATURE CONTROL 120V AC CIRCULATING PUMPH L2 NEUTRAL WIRING DIAGRAM FOR BOILER TO TANK LOOP AND/OR HOT WATER LOOP (IF USED). TWO TEMPERATURE - ONE HEATER HIGH TEMPERATURE WITH OR WITHOUT BUILDING RECIRCULATION ,~k DANGER TEMPERATURE SETTING SHOULD NOT EXCEEU SAFE TEMPERATURE AT FIXTURES SEE WATER TEMPERATURE CONTROL WARNING ON PAGE 4 IF HIGHER PREHEAT TEMPERATURES ARE NECESSARY TO OBTAIN ADEQUATE BOOSTER OUTPUT. ADD AN ANTI~CALD VALVE FOR HOT WATER SUPPLIED TO FIXTURES CAUTION: IF BUILDING COLD WATER SUPPLY HAS A BACK-FLOW PREVENTER, CHECK VALVE OR WATER METER WITH CHECK VALVE PROVISIONS FOR THERMAL EXPANSION OF WATER IN THE HOT WATER SYSTEM MUST BE PROVIDED VACUUM RELIEF VALVE INSTALL PER LOCAL CODES. · T& P RELIEF VALVE HEATER CIRCULATING PUMP WIRING DIAGRAM STORAGE TANK TEMPERATURE CONTROL 120V AC CIRCULATING PUMP~ L2 NEUTRAL WIRING DIAGRAM FOR BOILER TO TANK LOOP AND/OR HOT WATER LOOP (IF USED). 180°F *PIPE RELIEF VALVE TO OPEN DRAIN NOTE: IF TEMPERED WATER IS RECIRCULATBD, RETURN LINE SHOULD BE CONNECTED AT POINT iNSTALL IN ACCORDANCE WITH LOCAL CODES. CAUTION: IF THE PLUMBING REQUIRES THE USE OF P~PES WITH DISSIMILAR MATERIAL (FOR EXAMPLE STEEL AND COPPER) USE DIELECTRIC UNIONS TO PREVENTAN ELECTRO-GALVANiC ACTION BETWEEN THE PIEING COMPONENTS W~TH DISSIMILAR MATERIALS WATER OUTLET THERMOMETER VALVE VALVE TEMPERED WATER OUTLET COLD WATER ,,e"~SUPPLy 3t5" (30cra TO 38cm) I I J I 1/2" POINT "A" II PLUG CHECK COCK VALVE RETURN LINE FROM 180°F (82°C) CIRCULATING LOOP (IF USED) CIRCULATING PUMP WIRING DIAGRAM STORAGE TANK TEMPERATURE CONTROL 120V AC DISHWA~HER LINE " I~1 WIRING DIAGRAM FOR 180°F (82~C) LOOP (IF USED). 29 TWO TEMPERATURE -TWO HEATERS HIGH TEMPERATURE WITH OR WITHOUT BUILDING RECIRCULATION CAUTION: IF THE PLUMBING REQUIRES THE USE OF PIPES WITH DISSIMILAR MATERIAL (FOR EXAMPLE, STEEL AND COPPER), USE DIELECTRIC UNIONS TO PREVENTAN ELECTRO-GALVANIC ACTION BETWEEN THE PiPiNG COMPONENTS WITH DISSIMILAR MATERIALS V HEATER VACUUM RELIEF VALVE INSTALL PER LOCAL CODES. WATER COLD SUF~LY THERMOMETER TWO TEMPERATURE - THREE HEATERS (TWO PRE-HEATERS/ONE BOOSTER HEATER) WITH OR WITHOUT BUILDING RECIRCULATION ALL MANIFOLDING MUST BEEQUALLENGTH ADD CHECK VALVE WHEN CIRCULATING LOOP "--I MUST BE IDENTICAL HEATERS *T&p FOR MULTIPLE HEATER INSTALLATION SEE MANIFOLD KIT SPECIFICATIONS, PAGE 33 CAUTION: IF BUILDING COLD WATER SUPPLY HAS A BACK-FLOW PREVENTER, CHECK VALVE OR WATER METER WITH CHECK VALVE PROVISIONS FOR THERMAL EXPANSION OF WATER IN THE HOT WATER SYSTEM MUSTBE PROVIDED, VACUUM RELIEF VALVE LOCAL CODES. INSTALL PER CAUTION: iF THE PLUMBING REQUIRES THE USE OF PIPES WITH DISSIMILAR MATERIAL (FOR EXAMPLE, STEEL AND COPPER), USE DIELECTRIC UNIONS TO PREVENTAN ELECTRO-GALVANIC ACTION BETWEEN THE PIPING COMPONENTS WITH DISSIMILAR MATERIALS ,~ DANGER TEMPERATURE SETTING SHOULD NOT EXCEED SAFE TEMPERATURE AT FIXTURES SEE WATER TEMPERATURE CONTROL WARNING ON PAGE 4 t~ HIGHER PREHEATTEMPERATURESARE NECESSARYTO OBTAIN,ADEQUATE BOOSTER OUTPUT, ADD AN ANTi-SCALD VALVE FOR HOT WATER SUPPLIEDTO FIXTURES. 30 TWO TEMPERATURE - TWO HEATERS (ONE PRE-HEATER/ONE BOOSTER H EATER) WITH OR WITHOUT BUILDING RECIRCULATION ,~ DANGER TEMPERATURE SETTING SHOULD NOT EXCEED SAFE TEMPERATURE AT FIXTURES, SEE WATER TEMPERATURE CONTROL WARNING ON PAGE 4. IF HIGHER PREHEAT TEMPERATURES ARE NECESSARY TO OBTAIN ADEQUATE BOOSTER OUTPUT, ADD ANANTI-SCALD VALVE FOR HOT WATER SUPPLIED TO FIXTURES *~PRE-HEATER COLD WATER SUPPLY MAXIMUM 1 1/2" * PIPE RELIEF VALVE TO OPEN DRAIN ** 140°F (60°C) TO 150~F (66°C) SHOULD BE MAXIMUM WATER TEMPERATURE MAINTAINED IN THE PRE-HEATERS. 120°F (49°C) SHOULD BE TH E MINIMUM TEMPERATURE OF WATER INTHE PRE- HEATERS. CONNECT CIRCULATING LINE FROM FIXTURES, IF USED,TO COLD WATER SUPPLY LINE OF PRE-HEATER. CONNECT CIRCULATING LINE OF 180° F (82°C) OR BOOSTED WATER, IF USED,TO INLETWATER LINE TO BOOSTER. INSTALL IN ACCORDANCE WiTH LOCALCODES. HOT WATER TO FIXTURES ~r~ THERMOMETER PRE-HEATED WATERTO BOOSTER CAUTION: IF THE PLUMBING REQUIRES THE USE OF PIPES WITH DISSIMILAR MATERIAL (FOR EXAMPLE, STEEL AND COPPER), USE DIELECTRIC UNIONS TO PREVENTAN ELECTRO~GALVANIC ACTION BETWEEN THE PIPING COMPONENTS WITH DISSIMILAR MATERIALS VACUUMVALVE REUEF1 INSTAL~PER LOCALCODES. OUTLET "T&P RELIEF VALVE TYPICAL BOOSTER · HEATER CIRCULATING PUMP WIRING DIAGRAM STORAGE TANK TEMPERATURE CONTROL 120VAL~C CIRCULATING PUMPe NEUTRAL WIRING DtAGRAM FOR BOILER TO TANK LOOP AND/OR HOT WATER LOOP (iF USED). CIRCULATING PUMP WIRING DIAGRAM STORAGE TANK TEMPERATURE CONTROL WIRING DIAGRAM FOR 180°F (82°C) LOOP (IF USED). 31 TWO TEMPERATURE - ONE HEATER HIGH TEMPERATURE WITH RECIRCULATION OF SANITIZING LOOP CIRCULATING PUMP WIRING DIAGRAM STORAGE TANK TEMPERATURE CONTROL WIRING DIAGRAM FOR 180°F (82°C) LOOP {IF USED(. VACUUM RELIEF VALVE LOCALCODES. INSTALL PER CAUTION: IF THE PLUMBING REQUIRES THE USE OF PIPES WiTH DISSIMILAR MATERIAL (FOR EXAMPLE STEEL AND COPPER), USE DiELECTRiC UNIONS TO PREVENTAN E LECTRO-GAD/ANIC ACTION BETWEEN THE PIPING COMPONENTS WITH DrSSIMILAR MATERIALS SANiTIZiNG LOOP TO VICINITY OF 180°F (82°C) WATER OUTLET VACUUM DISHWASHER 4 BREAKER CONTROL =INAL RINSE SOLENOID ERMOMETER SUPPLY COLD TEMPERED WATER ~ WATER SUPPLY OUTLET 'TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE ) WATER HAMMER DISHWASHER 314" #7S ALL BRONZE LINE TEMPERATURE CIRCULATING PUMP CONTROL (NOTE 2) CHECK VALVE CHECK VALVE PLUG COCK (NOTE3) ~DANGER TEMPERATURE SETTING SHOULD NOT EXCEED SAFE TEMPERATURE AT FIXTURES SEE WATER TEMPERATURE CONTROLWARNING ON PAGE 5 IF HIGHER PREHEAT TEMPERATURES ARE NECESSARY TO OBTAIN ADEQUATE BOOSTER OUTPUT, ADD AN ANTNSCALD VALVE FOR H(~T WATER SUPPLIED I'D FIXTURES CAUTION: IF BUILDING COLD WATER SUPPLY HAS A BACK-FLOW PREVENTER. CHECK VALVE OR WATER METER WiTH CHECK VALVE PROVISIONS FOR THERMAL EXPANSION OF WATER IN THE HOT WATER SYSTEM MUST BE PROVIDED *PIPE RELIEF VALVE TO OPEN DRAIN IN STALL IN ACCORDANCE WITH LOCAL CODES NOTE 1: TOGGLE SWITCH CONTROLS 180~F (82°C) WATER CIRCULATION. INSTALL ON OR CLOSE TO DISHWASHER. TOGGLE SWITCH MUST BE CLOSED (ON) DURING THE RINSE OPERATION AND OPEN (OFF) WHEN DISHWASHER IS NOT OPERATING OR WHEN ON LONG STANDBY. NOTE 2: INSTALL LINE TEMPERATURE CONTROL IN AN UNINSULATED TEE BEYOND THE DISHWASHER TAKEOFF IN THE SANITIZING LOOP, CONTROL SHOULD BE SET AT 185°F (85°C). NOTE 3: ADJUST PLUG COCK SO THE SANITIZING LOOP FLOW RATE DOES NOT CAUSE UNNECESSARY TURBULENCE IN THE TANK. NOTE 4: IF TEMPERED WATER IS RECIRCULATED, RETURN LINE SHOULD BE CONNECTEDAT POINTA. 32 MANIFOLD KITS Precision cut type "L" all copper A.O. Smith manifold kits assure water flow balance of all units. Without this balance, the full water heating and storage potential of the system cannot be achieved. Plus, the units with the higher water flow may have a shortened lifE, Dimensions shown are for minimum space occupied by the water heaters assemblies. Space for the venting system and unit servicing must be added. TWO UNIT MANIFOLD THREE UNIT MANIFOLD 2 I/Z' INLET AND OUTLET ~ ~ .--.'~- 2 1/2" INLET AND OUTLET ~ .~.~MANIFOLD CONNECTIONS (191cm);I ~ I I TS" I /~,~__________.~ ~ ~ r -('.'CM) I ] I ~ ~ ~ ~~.i-.....~· FOUR UNIT MANIFOLD 33 CHECKLIST AND SERVICE INFORMATION IMPORTANT The installer may be able to observe and correct certain problems which might adse when the unit is put into operation or when it is re-fired after a prolonged shutdown. HOWEVER, it is recommended that only qualified servicemen, using appropriate test equipment, be allowed to service the heater. BE SURE TO TURN OFF THE ELECTRICITY WHENEVER POSSIBLE OR APPROPRIATE WHILE CHECKING EQUIPMENT. ~, WARNING FAILURE TO FOLLOWTHESE INSTRUCTIONS CAN RESULT ~N SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH. CAUTION: LABELALL WIRES PRIOR TO DISCONNECTION WHEN SERVICING CONTROLS, WIRING ERRORS CAN CAUSE IMPROPERAND DANGEROUS OPE~TION, VERIFY PROPER OPERA1 ION AFTER SERVICING BURNER OPERATIONAL PROBLEMS 1. Refer to TROUBLESHOOTING NOT ENOUGH OR NO HOT WATER 1. Be certain the electrical disconnect switch serving the water heater is in the ON position. 2. Check the fuses. · The electrical disconnect switch usually contains fuses. 3. The capacity of lhe heater may have been exceeded by a large demand for hot water. Large demands require a recovery period to restore water temperature. 4, Colder incoming water temperature witi lengthen the time required to heat water to the desired temperature If the heater was installed when incoming water temperature was warm, colder water creates the effect of less hot water 5. Look for hot water wastage and leaking or open hot water faucets. 6. Sediment or lime scale may be affecting water heater operation. Refer to MAINTENANCE for details. 7 Burner may not be firing at proper rate. · Check gas pressure. Adjust to obtain required manifold pressure. 8. Burner fan wheel may be dirty. · Clean fan wheel with a stiff brush 9. Condensate hose may be blocked where it connects to the exhaust elbow · Verify the condensate drains from the unit without restriction WATER IS TOO HOT 1 Refer to WATER TEMPERATURE CONTROL. WATER HEATER MAKES SOUNDS 1. Sediment or ~ime scale accumulations cause rumbling and pounding noises when the heater is operating. The sounds are normal, however, the tank bottom should be cleaned. Refer to MAINTENANCE for details. Some of the electrical components of the water heater make sounds which are normal · Contacts click or snap as the heater starts and stops. · Transformers often hum. WATER LEAKAGE IS SUSPECTED Check to see if the water heater drain valve is tightly closed. Aisc check the cleanout opening for leakage. The apparent leakage may be condensation which forms on cool surfaces of the heater and piping. If the outlet of the relief valve is leaking it may represent: · Excessive water pressure. · Excessive water temperature · Faulty relief valve Excessive water pressure is the most common cause of relief valve leakage It is often caused by a "closed system", If a check valve is in the inlet system it will not permit the expanded hot water volume to equalize pressure with the main. The relief valve must release this water or the water heater or plumbing system will be damaged. Refer to MAINTENANCE- RELIEF VALVE section in this manual. When such a condition is encountered, local codes or inspection agency should be consulted to determine which system is acceptable in your area, See CLOSED SYSTEM section in this manual also. TROUBLE-SHOOTING 1. Verify that the allowable vent length has not been exceeded and that the blower inlet screen has been removed if direct venting. 2. Verify that the condensation, which WILL be present in the heater and exhaust vent, will drain. 3 Check supply wire poladty - hot to hot and neutral to neutral and no "stray" current in neutral. 4. Heater is properly grounded, Checking these four (4) items first will often result in a timely solution to the service call ~k WARNING JUMPING OUT COMPONENTS AND/OR CIRCUITS DURING TROUBLESHOOTING CAN CAUSE SERIOUS PROBLEMS WITH THE UNIT'S OPERA~ lNG SEQUENCE AND IGNITION SAFETY IF YOU DO NOT HAVE THE PROPER TEST EQUlPMENll, I.E. AVOLT-OHM METERANDA MICROAMMETER, DO NOT ATTEMPTTO TROUBLESHOOT OR REPAIRA O. SMITH EQUIPMEN~ ALTERING THE CONTROLLERAND/OR CONTROLLER WIRING IN ANY WAY COULD RESULT IN INTERNAL DAMAGE TO THE MODULE CIRCUITS, POSSIBLYALTERING THE IGNITION SEQUENCEALLOWlNG GAS VALVES TO QPEN BEFORE THE HOT SURFACE IGNITER IS UP TO IGNITIQN TEMPERATURE NOTE: ANY BYPASS OR ALTERATION OF THE UNITS SAFETIES WILL RESULT IN VOIDING THE APPLIANCE WARRANTY~ Before performing any troubleshooting familiarize yourself with the particular appliance Refer to the SEQUENCE OF OPERATION and the connection diagram located on page 15 before continuing. Make sure the appliance is connected to a t20V AC power supply, manual gas valve is in the ON position, and all electrical connections are secure before continuing to troubleshoot this appliance ~ CAUTION }HE WATER HEATER iS POLARITY SENSITIVE BEFORE APPLYING ELECTRICITY TO THIS HEATER BE CERTAIN THAT SUPPLY HEATED WIRE TO GROUND CHECK INDICATES ZEROVOLTAGE. 34 MOTOR WILL NOT RUN 1. Confirm 120V AC to the controller. Aisc, to verity correct polarity, check for 120 V AC between hot supply and ground. If there is no voltage, check for a loose connection where it connects to the controltsr 2. If there is 120 volts to the controller, check for loose connections or a locked rotor. If the rotor cannot be freed the motor and blower assembly must be replaced, MOTOR RUNS, PREPURGE TIME ELAPSES BUT MAIN FLAME NOT ESTABLISHED. 1 Check to see if main manual gas valve is open. 2 Check for a loose connection at the transformer, or a defective transformer 3. Check for a loose connection at the gas valve. Check for open pressure switches or open reset button. Check for blockage in the intake and exhaust venting or at the vent hoods. If no blockage is found, check vinyl tubing for cuts or crimps. If this tubing is damaged it must be replaced. If these steps do not eliminate the problem, replace the pressure switches. Check to see if there is resistance across the igniter terminal with an OHM meter. If there is no continuity, the igniter is broken and should be replaced. If the igniter appears to function properly, then verify that the inlet pressure is within the range shown in Table 4 The gas valve supplied on the appliance is not designed to open against a higher inlet pressure of 10.5*WC (2.59kPa) for natural gas and 14.0'~NC (3.45kPa) for propane gas. At this time, also check to make sure the inlet pressure is not lower than 4.0"WC (.98kPa) for natura~ gas and 11.0"WC (2.74kPa) for propane gas If the inlet pressure is not within these limits then adjust the supply pressure accordingly If the inlet pressure falls within the allowable limits, then verify that the manifold pressure, when the gas is fully open, with the heater running. is as called out in Table 4: that is. 4 0"WC (98kPa) for natural gas and 10.0"WC (2 46kPa) for propane gas for the 120 and 150 models and 0"WC (0kPa) for both natural and propane gas 199 and 250 models. If the manifold pressure is not correct then adjust accordingly. See "ADJUSTMENT PROCEDU RE"in "OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS" sections for manifold pressure adjustment procedure. If the inlet and manifold pressures are within the limits specified in step 5. then reset the appliance. Verify 24V AC at the gas valve during the three (3) second ignition trial, after the igniter reaches operating temperature. If 24V AC at the gas valve is not seen during this period, the controller must be replaced. If there is 24V AC at the gas valve during the four second ignition trial and the manifold pressure does not increase above 0" WC then verity that the manual gas control valve is in the "ON" position (see page 20) If the valve is in the "ON" position and the previous voltage and gas pressure conditions are met, then the gas valve is defective and must be replaced. Note that a positive manifold pressure reading of approximately 1 5" (38 kPa) W.C is normal during the prepurge portion of the ignition cycle due to the location of the gas orifice. MOTOR RUNS, BURNER LIGHTS MOMENTARILY, THEN LOCKS OUT 1. Reset the appliance two more times to ensure that all of the air has been purged from the gas line. 2~ if the burner lights momentarily but does not sustain ignibon, vedty that the inlet pressure is not greater than 10.5'~VC (2.59 kPa) for natural gas and 14.0'~NC (3.45 kPa) for propane gas or lower than the minimal supply pressure which is 4.0'~NC (.09kPa) for natural gas and 11.0"WC (2.74 kPa) for propane gas. Also, verify that the manifold pressure is correct, that is, 4.0"WC (98kPa) for natural gas and 10 0"WC (2.46kPa) for propane gas for the 120 and 150 models and 0'~VC (0kPa) for both natural and propane gas 199 and 250 models, g the manifold pressure is not correct then adjust accordingly. See "ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE" in "OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS" sections for manifold pressure adjustment procedure. 3. Check for the reversed polarity in the supply wiring. This controller is polarity sensitive If the hot and neutra~ supply wires are reversed, the controller will not sense flame. Reverse the supply wires and try to fire the unit, NOTE: Always turn off and disconnect main supply wiring before servicing the unit, 4. Check connecting wire to the flame sensor. Verify that the flame sensor has not been damaged in any way. 5. Verity that the air supply is adequate. The air inlet screen or blower wheel may be restricted. Also, check the installation for proper ventilatip~, See AIR REQUIREMENTS. 6. Check the venting system for the correct sizing, excess or insufficient See VENTING. 7. Check for maximum inlet pressure of 10.5'~VC (2.59 kPa} for natural gas and 14.0"WC (3.45 kPa) for propane gas and the manifold pressure which is 4.0"WC (.98 kPa) for natural gas and 10.0"WC (2,46 kPa)for propane gas for the 120 and 150 models and 0"WC (o kPa) for both natural and propane gas 199 and 250 models. Please note that the manifold pressure listed is the maximum value for the manifold pressure. Do not set the manifold pressure higher than the value show in Table 4. OVER FIRING the heater will result in a rough ignition and/or noisy operation 8 Confirm that the air intst screen (see Figures 7 & 8) is free of obstrucfions. ~k CAUTION Do not reach into the burner housing or combustion chamber if the heater is still hot Allow the heater to cool and always use gloves as the combustion chamber and the burner sleeve aRd housing can become very hot after operation OVER FIRING is a dangerous condition that must be corrected GAS FAILS TO SHUT OFF Check for defective gas valve or thermostat. If operation is incorrect, replace, REPLACEMENT PARTS ' Replacement parts may be ordered through AC. Smith dealers, authorized servicers or disthbutors, Refer to the Yellow Pages for where to call or contact the AC. Smith Water Products Company, 500 Tennessee Waltz Parkway, Ashland City, TN 37015, 1-800-433-2515. When ordering parts be sure to state the quantity, part number and description of the items including the complete model and serial number as it appears on the product. Refer to the parts list for more information. 35 Model BTH Limited Warranty A. O. Smith Corporation, the warrantor, extends the following LIMITED WARRANTY to the owner of this water heater, THE TANK If the glass-lined tank in this water heater shall prove upon examination by the warrantor to have leaked due to natural corrosion from potable water therein, during the first THREE years after initial installation, the warrantor will supply a replacement tank less burner and controls or a complete new A.O. Smith water heater of equivalent size and current model at the warranthr's option. Some government agencies are requiring energy efficient standards for water heaters. In the event regulations prohibit sale of a model of equivalent size and construction, A,O. Smith will provide a model which complies with the regulations of your area, in which case the consumer will be charged the difference in pdce between the like replacement and the energy efficient model required~ The warranty on the replacement water heater will be limited to the unexpired term of the original warranty. 2. ALL OTHER PARTS If within ONE year after initial instaltation of this water heater, any part or portion shall prove upon examination by the warranlor to be defective in material or workmanship, the warrantor will repair or replace such part or portion at its option, 3 CONDITIONS AN D EXC E PTIONS This warranty shall apply only when the water heater is installed in accordance with local plumbing and building codes, ordinances and regulations, the printed instructions provided with it and good industry practices. In addition, a temperature and pressure relief valve, certified by AGNCGA and approved by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers, must have been installed. a. This warranty shall apply oniy when the heater is used: (1) used at temperatures not exceeding the maximum setting of its thermostat; (2) used at water pressure not exceeding the working pressure shown on the heater; (3) when ooerated free of the damaaina effects of uncontrolled water hamn/~r; (4) filled with potable water, free to circulate at all times and with the tank free of damaging water sediment or scale deposits; (5) used in a non-corrosive and non-contaminated atmosphere; (6) used with factory approved anode(s) installed; (7) in its original installation location; (8) in the United States, its territories or possessions, and Canada; (9) sized in accordance with proper sizing techniques for commercial and/or residential water heaters; (10) beadng a rating plate which has not been altered, defaced or removed, except as required by the warrantor; (11) operated with propedy installed dirt leg; (12) fired with the fuel for which it was factory built; (13) fired at the factory rated input; (14) operated with the inner and outer combustion chamber doors in place, b. Any accident to the water heater, any misuse, abuse (including freezing) or alteration of it, any operation of it in a modified form, or any attempt to repair tank leaks will void this warranty. _ c. This warranty is void if a device actino as a backflow orevention device [check valves etc.1 is installed in the cold water su~3DIv the heater iS connected to. unless an effective method of controllina thermal exoan~ion is also installed at the heatedst and ooerational at all times The relief valve installed on the heater is DDJ an acceptable method. 4 SERVICE AND REPAIR EXPENSES Under the limited warranty the warrantor will provide only a replacement water heater or pad thereof. The owner is responsible for all other soAis, Such costs may include but are not limited to: ,~ a. Labor charges for service removal, repair or reinstallafion of the water heater or any component pad; b Shipping, delivery, handling, and administrative charges for forwarding the new heater or replacement part from the nearest distributor and returning the claimed defective heater or part to such distributor c All cost necessary or incidental for any material aod/or permits required for installation of the replacement~ 5 LIMITATIONS ON IMPLIED WARRANTIES Implied warranties, including the warranty of merchantability imposed on the sale of this heater under state law are limited to one (1) year duration for the heater or any of its parts Some states do not allow limitafions on how long an implied warranty lasts, so the above limitation may not apply to you. 6. CLAIM PROCEDURE Any claim under the warranty should be initiated with the dealer who sold the boiler, or with any other dealer handling the warrantor's products. If this is not practicable, the owner should contact: U.S Customers Canadian Customers A O Smith Corporation A.O. Smith Enterprises Ltd. 500 Tennessee Waltz Parkway P O, Box, 310 - 768 Erie Street Ashland City, TN 37015 Stratiord, Ontario NSA 6T3 Telephone: (800} 323-2636 Telephone; (800) 265-8520 a. The warrantor will only honor replacement with identical or similar water heater or pads thereof which are manufactured or distributed by the warrantor. b. Dealer replacements are made subject to in-warranty validation by warrantor. ?~ DISCLAIMERS NO OTHER EXPRESS WARRANTY HAS BEEN OR WILL BE MADE IN BEHALF OF THE WARRANTOR WITH RESPECT TO THE MERCHANTABILITY OF HEATER OR THE INSTALLATION, OPERATION. REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE BOILER. TH E WARRANTOR SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WATER DAMAGE. LOSS OF USE OF THE UNIT, INCQNVENIENCE, LOSS OR DAMAGE TO PERSONAL PROPER~Y OR OTHER CONSEQUENTI~L DAMAGE THE WARRANTOR SHALL NOT BE LIABLE BY VIRTUE OF THIS WARRANTY OR OTHERWISE FOR DAMAGE TO ANY PERSONS OR PRQPERTY, WHETHER DIRECT OR INDIRECT, AND WHETH ERARISlNG IN CONTRACT OR TORT a. Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of the incidental or consequential damage, so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply Io you. b This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state Fill in the following for your own reference. Keen it. Registration is not a condition of warranty The model and sedal number are found on the heater's rating plate. Date Installed Dealer's Name Dealer's Address Model NO Serial NO. PhoneNo _City and State FILL IN WARRAN'[Y AND KEEP FOR FUTURE REFERENCE. 36 Zip Code ; · NOTES: 37 A.O. SMITH WATER PRODUCTS COMPANY 500 TENNESSEE WALTZ PARKWAY ASHLAND CITY, TN 37015 PHONE: 1-800~433-2545 FAX: 1-800-433~2515 www. aosmithwaterheaters.com / email: parts@hotwater, com 40 ~[or® Installation Manual EVOLUTION'"SERIES THE NEW STANDARD IN SOUND AND GRIND PERFORMANCE The Evolution series by InSinkErator® is a new standard in sound and grind performance. Featuring exclusive patented $oundSeaFM and MultiGrlndTM technologies, no food waste disposer grinds more with less noise. Parts Included: Stopper Quiet CollarTM Sink Baffle Sink Flanc~__~ Fiber Gasket Disposer Lower Mounting Ring -- Anti-Vibration MountTM Dishwasher Inlet Anti-Vibration Tailpipe MountTM Backup Flange Mounting Ring > 1f,2" Screws Snap Ring ~ >Jam-Buster®Wren% > DischargeTube~ Hose Clamp (~ > Extension Tube Discharge Tube Bio-Charge'" Bottle 2 Dimensions: Premier 6 11/16" 4" 12 5/8" 8 3/4" 5 3/4" £S~en~i~l 6 ~i~i6,, 4, 1~ 5i87 Compact 6" 4" 12 1/8" 8" 5 3/4" Cover Control 6 11/16" 4" 13 1/2" 10" 5 3/4" 3 Removal of old disposer: Disconnect drain trap from waste discharge tube. Disconnect dishwasher if connected to the disposer. Support disposer, insert end of Jam-Buster® wrench (K) into right side of mounting lug, and turn. Disposer will fall free. *WARNING: SHOCK HAZARD With the electrical supply turned off, flip disposer over and remove electrical cover plate. Save cable connector if applicable. *WARNING: SHOCK HAZARD With the electrical supply turned off, disconnect the disposer wires from the electrical supply. Loosen the 3 screws on the mounting assembly. Using a screwdriver, remove the snap ring. Remove flange from sink. 4 Remove old plumber's putty from sink with putty knife. Installation of new disposer: Evenly apply 1/2" thick rope of plumber's putty around flange (c). Press flange (C) firmly into sink drain. Remove excess putty. Insert fiber gasket (D), backup flanqe (E) and mounting ring (F). Hold in place while inserting snap ring (I). Place a weight such as the dis- poser on the sink flange to hold it in place. Use a towel to prevent scratching sink. Pull snap ring open and press firmly until it snaps into place. Tighten 1 1/2" screws (G) evenly and firmly against backup flange. Use shorter 1 1/8" screws (H) if sink is more than 3/8" thick. *CAUTION: DISHWASHER CONNECTION ONLY If you do not need to attach the dishwasher, cjo to step 17. Turn disposer (J) onto side and insert screwdriver into dish- washer inlet. 5 Installation of new disposer (continued): *CAUTION: DISHWASHER CONNECTION ONLY Knock out drain plug and remove plug from inside of disposer. *WARNING: SHOCK HAZARD. Turn disposer over and remove electrical cover plate. Pull out wires. DO NOT REMOVE CARDBOARD SHIELD. *WARNING: SHOCK HAZARD. With electrical supply turned off, insert cable connector (not included) and run electrical cable through access hole on bottom of disposer. Tighten cable connector. *WARNING: SHOCK HAZARD Connect white to white and black to black or red with wire nuts (not includ- ed); ground wire to green grounding screw. Unit must be grounded for safe and proper installation. Push wires into disposer (do not displace cardboard shield) and replace electri- cal cover plate. 6 Place tube (M or N) into Anti- Vibration Tailpipe Mount, Use provided tubes for best results. Secure with hose clamp (L). *CAUTION: USE ONLY INSINKERATOR SUPPLIED HOSE CLAMP. NON-APPROVED CLAMPS WILL VOID WARRANTY AS THEY WILL DAMAGE THE ANTI-VIBRATION TAILPIPE MOUNT Installation of new disposer (continued): Hang disposer by aligning 3 mounting tabs with slide-up ramps on mounting ring. Turn mounting ring until all 3 mounting tabs lock over the ridges on the slide-up ramps. (COVER CONTROL MODEL ONLY) Turn mounting ring until all 3 mounting tabs lock over the ridges on the slide-up ramps. Attach magnetic cover con- trol switch to the screws; Make sure plastic guides go UNDER mounting ring. You may need to trim tube for proper fit. Reconnect plumbing (and dishwasher connection if used). Make sure Anti-Vibration Tailpipe Mount is straight. Detach removable portion of spec label and place on a visible location. Insert Quiet CollarTM Sink Baffle into sink opening. Fill sink with water, then test for leaks. 7 (For SepticAssist Model Only.) INSTALLING THE BIO-CHARGE BOTTLE: Use only InSinkErator Bio-Charge'". See "Changing Bio-Charge'" Bottle" for safety instructions and information on obtaining Bio-Charge replacements. Do no squeeze the Bio*Charge bottle; squeezing the bottle may cause the Bio-Charge to discharge and spill. REPLACING THE BIO-CHARGE BOTTLE: To keep your septic system operating at peak efficiency, replace the Bio-Charge" bottle when it is empty. Bio-Charge'" is available wherever InSinkErator Septic Disposers are sold. For Bio-Charge reorders, questions or comments call toll free 1 (888) 527-1493. Unscrew Bio-ChargeTM dispenser cap nozzle counterclockwise until nozzle pops upward to dispensing position. Do not remove dispenser cap nozzle. Aligning bottle with concave side toward disposer, insert bottle up into holder until you hear a click and bottle snaps into place. Pull bottle down slightly to ensure it is engaged. Make sure disposer is off. Press button on disposer just above the bottle and pull bottle down to remove it. (Do not refill or reuse empty bottle.) 1. Remove stopper from sink opening and run strong flow of cold water. 2. Turn on wall switch to start disposer. 3, Slowly insert food waste into disposer and position stopper to minimize possible ejection of material while grinding. 4. After grinding is complete, turn disposer off and run water for a few seconds to flush drain line. 1. Place food waste into disposer grind chamber. Do not pack chamber with waste. Run a strong flow of cold water. 2. Place stopper back into sink opening in the disposer posi- tion (See Figure A). 3. Activate the disposer by turning the stopper left or right until the disposer begins grinding. 4. After grinding is complete, turn disposer off and run water for a few seconds to flush drain line. 4. In order to fill sink with water, invert the stopper to plug drain (See Figure B). 8 · Run disposer along with a moderate to strong flow of cold water, continue run cold water for 15 seconds after grinding is complete. · Avoid using hot water when grinding food waste. It is OK to drain hot water into the disposer between cjrinding periods. · Avoid pouring grease or fat into your disposer or drain. Standard Disposers mUl~,ll (Badger® Series) Evolution Series (Evolution Excel) Everyday food waste scraps ,~ Vegetable Peels Avoid grinding large amounts at one time - gradually feed peels in while disposer and water are both running Fibrous Materials (Celery, corn husks, artichokes) Avoid grinding Avoid large amounts grinding Hard Materials (Bones, fruit pits) Avoid grinding large amounts Stop worrying about what food you can or can't put in your disposer · Use a disposer cleaner to relieve objectionable odors caused by build-up, or grind citrus fruit peels to freshen up drain area. · Disposers may also be cleaned with Disposer Care®. This product is not sold by InSinkErator but is generally available in major home centers, hardware and grocery stores. For more information on Disposer Care®, contact Iron Out Inc. at 800-654-0791 or www. ironout.com. 9 CLEANING DISPOSER Over time, food particles may accumulate in the grind chamber and baffle. An odor from the disposer is usually a sign of grease and food buildup, caused by insufficient water flow during and after disposer use. To clean dis- poser: 1. Turn off disposer and disconnect power supply. 2. Place stopper in sink opening and fill sink halfway with warm water. 3. Mix 1/4 cup baking soda with water. Turn disposer on and remove stopper from sink at same time to wash away loose particles. 4. Remove Quiet Collar Sink Baffle and clean by hand or in dishwasher. Do not operate disposer without Quiet Collar Sink Baffle in place. Disposers may also be cleaned with Disposer Care®. This product is not sold by InSinkErator, but is generally avail~ able in major home centers, hardware, and grocery stores. For more information on Disposer Care®, contact Iron Out, Inc. at 1-800-654-0791 or www. ironout.com. RELEASING DISPOSER JAM This disposer is equipped with a Jam-Sensor CircuitTM that will prevent jams while grinding virtually any food mate- rial. In the unlikely event that the disposer is jammed, release it by following these steps. If motor stops while disposer is operating, disposer may be jammed. To release jam: 1. Turn off disposer and water. 2. Insert one end of self-service wreochette into cen- ter hole on bottom of disposer (see Figure A). Work wrenchette back and forth until it turns one full revolu- tion. Remove wrenchette. 3. Reach into disposer with tongs and remove object(s). Allow disposer motor to cool for 3 - 5 minutes, then lightly push red reset button on disposer bottom (see Figure B). (If motor remains inoperative, check service panel for tripped circuit breakers or blown fuses.) Figure A Length of Warranty by Model: Excel: 7 years SpaceSaver: 4 years Essential: 6 years Cover Control: 7 years Premier: 5 years Septic Assist: 4 years Compact: 4 years This warranty covers all replacement parts and repair labor to correct defects in disposer material and workmanship for the full warranty period from the date of installation in your home. If warranty service is required during the warranty period, contact an authorized InSinkErator® service center to replace or repair the unit in your home at no cost to you. If you have questions concerning your disposer or determining when service is needed, please call the toll free InSinkErator® AnswerLineTM to obtain the name of the authorized service center nearest you. The toll free number is 1 (800) 558-5700, or visit our website at www.insinkerator, com. This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state. If the manufacturer determines the unit should be replaced rather than repaired, the warranty on the replacement unit will be limited to the unexpired term of the original warranty. No other express warranty, written or oral, applies. If your disposer does not operate, follow these steps in order: 1. Check the things you can do yourself. Be sure the disposer is connected to the electric power and the fuses or circuit breakers are in working order. Reread the instruction book to ensure that you are operating the disposer correctly. 2.Call InSinkErator®, or visit our website for information or for the location of the authorized service center nearest you. The toll free number is 1 (800) 558-5700, or visit our website at www. insinkerator, com. 3. Write to us if a satisfactory solution is not reached in steps 1 and 2. Our address is: InSinkErator® Service Department 4700 21st Street Racine, Wisconsin 53406 USA When writing or calling, supply the following information: date, your name, your address, and your phone number. Describe the product by model number, serial number, date purchased, place purchased, and service history (including name and address of service agent). Clearly describe the problem and service required. NOTE: Warranty is determined by unit serial number and date of installation. Purchase or installation receipt may be required to verify warranty status. The foregoing warranty does not apply to damage or inoperation resulting from accident, alteration, misuse, abuse, improper installation, installation not in accordance with these instructions or local electrical and plumbinq codes. Warranty will be voided if installed in a commercial or industrial application. 10 the appliahce is properly grounded. Do not mod fy the plug provided with the appliance- if it will not fit theo~Jtlet have a proper outlet installed by a qualifie~ele~tHcian. · This disposer must be properly qrounded. · Do not attach ground wire to gas suppy ppe · Disconnect power before installing orservicing disposer. · If three-prong grounded plug is used, plug must be inserted into three-hole grounded receptac e · Ail wiring must comply with local electrical codes. · Do not reconnect electrical current at main ser~ cepaneiunt proPer grounds are ~stalJed. · Read all instructions before using the appliance. · To reduce the risk of injury, close supervision is required when an appliance is used near children. · Do not put fingers or hands into a waste disposer. · Turn the power switch to the off position before attempting to clear a jam, removing an object from the disposer or pressing reset button. · When attempting to loosen a jam in a waste disposer, use the self-service wrenchette. · To reduce the risk of injury by materials that are expellable by a waste disposer, do not operate the dis- poser without the Quiet CollarTM Sink Baffle in place. Do not put the following into a disposer: clam or oys- ter shells, caustic drain cleaners or similar products, glass, china, or plastic, large (whole) bones, metal (such as bottle caps, steel shot, tin cans, or utensils),~ hot grease or other hot liquids. · When attempting to remove objects from a waste dis- poser, use long-handled tongs or pliers. · This product is designed to dispose of normal house- hold food waste; inserting materials other than food waste into disposer could cause personal injury and/or property damage. · To reduce the risk of injury, do not use the sink con- taining the disposer for purposes other than food preparation (such as baby bathing or washing hair). · Do not dispose of the following in the disposer: paints, solvents, household cleaners and chemicals, automo- tive fluids, plastic wrap. · Replace Quiet Collar Sink Baffle when worn to help prevent entry or ejection of material and water. · FIRE HAZARD: Do not store flammable items such as rags, paper or aerosol cans near disposer. Do not store or use gasoline or other flammable vapors and liquids in vicinity of disposer. 11 I.nSinkE, rator I Evolution Essential - Multigrind Page 1 of 2 inOerator Evolution Essential® The Evolution Essential~ featuring Multigdnd technology does what standard food waste disposers cannot, handles far more volume, and makes far less racket -- a perfect solution for a wide variety of kitchens Our powerful multigrind food waste disposers are the right choice when replacing an existing unit or designing a brand new kitchen You can choose between five Evolution models, including Evolution Septic Assist®, designed specifically for' homes with septic systems With an InSinkErator~ food waste disposer in your kitchen, chicken bones, fruit nnds, coffee grounds and more can go right in the sink -- where they're vidually liquefied to safely flow into your sewage system or septic tank You'll enjoy a cleaner food preparation area, and less bagged garbage cluttering your home, Food waste disposers provide an environmentally responsible alternative to transporting food waste to landfills. And they can help reduce greenhouse gas emissions. At capable wastewater treatment plants, food waste can be conveded to biosolids and used as fertilizer. Capable plants can also capture methane gas and recycle it as an energy source (Check the plant in your area) Learn more about disposers and the environment. What's more, if you've never owned a food waste disposer, you're in for a pleasant surprise. InSinkErator~ disposers are economical to operate: in fact, they're among the least expensive installed kitchen appliances. Household Disposers and Accessories Brochure The Evolution Essential® offers the following features: · MultiGrindmTwo grind stages let you quickly grind difficult food waste you wouldn't put in a standard disposer, like cele~/and potato peels. · SoundSeal®Makes the Evolution Essential® at least 40% quieter than standard disposers. · 40-Ounce Stainless Steel Gdnd Chamber and Gdnd Components handle more volume than standard disposers. · 3/4 Horsepower Dura-Ddve~ Induction Motor gives you more horsepower than standard disposers, http://www.insinkerator.com/product/product.php?id=202&template=hhd 2/10/2011 InSinkE, ratorI Evolution Essential - Multigrind Page 2 of 2 Why Have a Disposer? Enviroomental Benef'~s Disposer DO'S & Don'ts · Quiet-Collar~ Sink Baffle ensures quiet operation. ~ 800,55~,5700 http://www.insinkerator.com/producffproduct.php?id=202&template=hhd 2/10/2011 Dishwasher Record Ail Information For Future Reference Brand: Purchase Date: Model #: Serial #: (see Features page for location) Questions ? (United States) ~866,-213-939 7 (Canada) Product Registration Card ~ Please fill in completely, sign and return promptly! Safety Instructions ........................ 2 Features .............................. 3 Operating Instructions ........................ 4 Preparing and Loading Dishes ............... s-6 Dishwasher Dispenser and Detergents ................ Factors Affecting Performance ....................... Care and Cleaning .......................... 9-10 Connecting Portable Dishwasher ....................... Solutions to Common Dishwashing Problems...~2-~3 Troubleshooting ............... Consumer Services Warranty & Service ............................... 14 READ AND SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS P/N 154637701 (0701) Important Safety Instructions This symbol will help alert you to such dangers as personal injury, burns, fire and electrical shock. To reduce the risk of fire, electrical shock, or injury when using your dishwasher, follow basic precautions including the following: Read all instructions before using your dishwasher. Use your dishwasher only as instructed in this Use and Care Manual. This Manual does not cover every possible condition and situation that may occur. Use common sense and caution when installing, operating and maintaining any appliance. DISHWASHER MUST BE ELECTRICALLY GROUNDED. Read the Installation Instructions for details. · This dishwasher is designed to operate on regular house current (120 V, 60 Hz). Use a circuit equipped with a 15 ampere fuse or circuit breaker. Use a 20 ampere fuse if dishwasher is connected with a food waste disposer. · Do not operate dishwasher unless all enclosure panels are in their proper place. · Remove the door to the washing compartmentwhen removing an old dishwasher from service or discarding it. Keep young children and infants away from dishwasher when it is operating. Do not let children abuse, sit, stand or play on door or racks of a dishwasher. Use only detergents and rinse agents recommended for use in a dishwasher. Store dishwasher detergent and rinse agents out of the reach of children. Do not wash plastic items unless marked "dishwasher safe" or the equivalent. Check with manufacturer for recommendations, if not marked. Items that are not dishwasher safe may melt and create a potential fire hazard. If the dishwasher drains into a food disposer, make sure disposer is completely empty before running dishwasher. Disconnect electrical power to dishwasher before servicing. Repairs should be done by a qualified technician. Do not tamper with controls. Do not touch the heating element during or immediately after use. When loading items to be washed: - Locate sharp items and knives so that they are not likely to damage the door seal or tub. - Load sharp items and knives with the handles up to reduce the risk of cut-type injuries. Under certain conditions, hydrogen gas may be produced in a hot water system that has not been used for 2 weeks or more. HYDROGEN GAS IS EXPLOSIVE. If hot water system has not been used for such a period, before using dishwasher, turn on all hot water faucets and let water flow from each for several minutes. This will release any accumulated hydrogen gas. HYDROGEN GAS IS FLAMMABLE. Do not smoke or use an open flame during this time. Do not store or use combustible materials, gasoline or other flammable vapors and liquids in the vicinity of this or any other appliance. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS ©2002 Electrolux Home Products, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in U.S.A. Dishwasher Features Your dishwasher, illustrated below, cleans by spraying a mixture of hot, clean water, and detergent against the soiled surfaces of your dishes and tableware. Each cycle starts with a pre-drain. Next, the dishwasher fills with water to a level even with the heating element. This water is constantly pumped through the rotating spray arm and sprayed onto the dishes. Soiled water is pumped out and replaced with clean water during a cycle. The number of water fills depends upon the cycle being used. --__ ControIPanel Upper Rack __ Upper SprayArm Door Spring Lower Rack Lower Spray __ Panel Motor Toe Kick Leveling Legs Operating Instructions Getting Started 1. Check Filter (See Cleaning Filter) 2. Load dishwasher (See Preparing and Loading Dishes). 3. Add detergent (See Dishwasher Dispenser & Detergents). 4. Add rinse aid, if needed (See Rinse Aid). 5. Select wash cycle (See Cycle Chad). 6. Select desired OPTIONS. 7. See page 11 for instructions on connecting the portable dishwasher. 8. Run hot water faucet nearest dishwasher until water is hot. Turn water off. 9. To start, close door to latch. Cycle Chart Cycles Description To Select Cycle Water Time* Washes/ (approx.) (approx.) Rinses Hea~ For heavily soiled dishes · Turn dial to HEAVY WASH. 7.0 gal. 143 min.* 2washes Wash andsilverware. · SelectdesiredOPTIONS. 5.8 h'lp~eL 5rinses 36.4 liters Norwtal For regularly soiled dishes · Turn dial to NORMAL WASH. 5.2 gal. 128 min.* 2 washes Wash andsilverware. · SelectdesiredOPTIONS. 4.4 i'rpgal. 4rinses 19.8 liters Light For lightly soiled or pre-rinsed · Turn dial to LIGHT WASH. 4.4 gal. 112 min. 2 washes Wash dishes and silverware. · Selectdesired OPTIONS. 3.6 i'np.g~. 3 rinses 16.5 liters Rinse/ For rinsing dishes that will be · DO NOT USE detergent. 0.9 gal. 20 min. 1 rinses I. Icld washedlater. · TumdialtoRINSE/HOLD. .74 iTp.gal. · SelectCOOLDRYoption. 3.4 liters Delicate For lighty soiled or pre-rinsed · Turn dialto DELICATE. 3.5 gal. 80 min.* 2washes Delicate dishes. · SelectdesiredOPTIONS. 2.9 imp.gal. 2rinses 13.2 liters Plate Forwarming dishes and serving · Load Clean plates and dishes to Warmer )latesbeforeservinghotfoods. bewarmed. · Turn dial to PLATE WARMER. · Press HOT DRY Option. * Includes dry time. Operating Instructions Dish Preparation It is not necessary to rinse dishes before putting them into the dishwasher. Just remove large pieces and quantities of food, bones, pits, etc. Empty glasses and cups. It may be necessary to presoak or lightly scour firmly cooked-on or baked-on foods. Foods such as mustard, mayonnaise, vinegar, lemon juice and tomato-based products may cause discoloration of stainless steel and plastics if allowed to sit for a long period of time. Unless the dishwasher is to be operated at once, it is best to rinse off these food soils. · Load dishes facing the center of the rack so that the water spray from the rotating spray arm can reach soiled surfaces. · Be sure large items do not block the detergent dispenser, preventing it from opening during the wash cycle. · To be sure an item is dishwasher safe, read the manufacturer's care instructions. · If the dishwasher drains into a food disposer, be sure disposer is completely empty before dishwasher is started. · To save energy, wash full loads. · For best washing results, load correctly and avoid overloading. continued Energy Options Hi-Temp Wash Option When HI-TEMP WASH ON option is selected, the dishwasher heats the water in the main wash to approximately 140°F (60°C). Wash action will continue but timer will not advance until proper temperature is reached. The hotter water provided by this option helps activate dishwasher detergent to clean food grease and soil from dishes. HI- TEMP WASH ON option can be used with any cycle except RINSE HOLD and is not recommended for use with CHINA. To turn off option, select HI-TEMP WASH OFF. Heated Dry Option HEAT DRY ON option provides faster drying since the heating element is on during the drying podion of cycle. The HEAT DRY option in combination with rinse aid will give you excellent drying results. The energy to use HEAT DRY costs pennies per cycle. You may turn offthe HEAT DRY option, however you will have items in your dish load that will not be dry at the end of the cycle. With either option, you may see water vapor coming from vent during the washing and/or drying portion of cycle. On some models, the vent is closed during washing to hold moisture and sound inside and then opens for drying. The drying option may be changed at any time during the cycle and affects only the drying period. Preparing and Loading Dishes Loading the Top Rack Glasses and cups--Place grasses and cups against outside pins at an angle. Cups with a concave bottom will collect water. Small plates and saucers--Place dishes between middle two rows of pins. Plasticware--Load plasticware in the top rack to avoid melting. Bowls--Place bowls between the middle 2 rows of pins facing down. Miscellaneous items--Place long handled knives and utensils in top rack. Cup Shelf--The cup shelf can be folded down over short items (juice glasses, cups, etc.) for more loading space. When using cup shelf, alternate items with layer below so that water can reach all inside surfaces. Loading the Bottom Rack Large plates and platters--Place between the support pins with soiled sides facing inward. Bowls, casseroles and sauce pans-- Load upside down or at an angle facing ~nward. Slightly tilting items will provide better drainage. Pots and pans--Place upside down and at an angle. Do not allow handles to protrude through bottom of rack, blocking wash arm rotation. Load large items at the sides and not across the front so they do not block the detergent dispenser preventing it from opening. Loading the Silverware Basket Load sharp items with handles up. Be sure items do not protrude through the holes in the basket and stop the rotation of the spray arm. Load silverware so items are mixed in each section to prevent nesting. Water spray cannot effectively reach nested items. 6 Adding a Dish 1. Make sure there is a full wash cycle yet to be completed so that any added items are thoroughly washed and rinsed. 2. Unlatch door and wait for water action to stop. 3. Open door and add dish. 4. Firmly close door to latch and resume cycle, Dishwasher Dispenser & Detergents Filling the Detergent Dispenser The detergent dispenser has one covered and one uncovered cup. Detergent in the uncovered cup falls into the dishwasher when the door is closed. The covered cup opens automatically to release detergent. How much Detergent to use The amount of detergent to use depends on the water hardness. Water hardness is measured in grains per gallon. Using too little detergent can result in poor cleaning and hard water filming or spotting. Using too much detergent in soft water can cause a permanent film called etching. Your local water company, water softener company or county extension agent can tell you the water hardness in your area. The use of industrial grade detergent can damage the heating coil and other pads of the dishwasher leading to damage to the unit and surrounding property. Use only household grade automatic dishwasher detergents. Use only fresh automatic dishwashing detergent. Other detergents will cause oversudsing. Add detergent just before starting cycle. Store detergent in a cool, dry location. Moist or caked detergent will not dissolve properly. Do not fill both washcups, unless you have very hard water, see chad below*. Pre Wash Cup Large Wash Cup Top Cover (Heavy Loads) Cover Latch Cup ~ (Light Loads) Note: If the cover is closed on the Main Wash Cup, open by pressing the cover latch. Detergent Usage Guide Cycle Heavy Wash NormalWash Light Wash Rinse/Hold Soft Water (0-3 grains) 1.5 teaspoons (each cup- 1/4 full) 1.5 teaspoons Main Wash cup- 1/4 full) No Detergent Medium Hard Water (4-8 grains) 4 teaspoons (each cup-fill to line above "Regular") 4 teaspoons (Main Wash cup-fill to line above "Regular") No Detergent Hard Water (9-12 grains) 6teaspoons (each cup- completelyfull) 6 teaspoons (Main Wash cup- completely full) No Detergent Very Hard Water* (over 12 grains) Each Cup- Completely Full ' (water softener recommended) Main Wash Cup- Completely Full (water softener recommended) No Detergent (water softener recommended) *Note: For very hard water, detergent alone may not be enough. A water softener is recommended to improve water quality and dishwashing performance. Try adding more detergent at the beginning of the main wash portion of the cycle. As a rule, use 1 teaspoon for each grain above 12. Unlatch the door, open slowly and add detergent to the bottom of the tub. Close the door to latch and the dishwasher will continue through the cycle. G Factors Affecting Performance Rinse Aid Rinse aid greatly improves drying and reduces water spots and filming. Water "sheets" off dishes rather than forming water droplets that cling and leave spots. A dispenser, located next to the detergent cup, automatically releases a measured amount of rinse aid during the last rinse. If spotting and poor drying are problems, increase the amount of rinse aid dispensed by rotating the dial to a higher number. The dial is located under the dispenser cap. The indicator will be dark when full and will show clear when it is time to refill. To add liquid rinse aid, turn dispenser cap 1/4 turn counterclockwise and lift out. Pour in rinse aid until liquid touches the indicated fill level. Replace cap. Do not overfill since this can cause oversudsing. Wipe up any spills with a damp cloth. The dispenser holds enough for 35 to 140 washes, depending on setting. Dispenser Opening Indicator Less -- More Adjustable setting Water Pressure Water pressure should be between 20 and 120 pounds per square inch. Low water pressure occurs most often during periods of high water consumption, such as when laundry or showers are being done. To determine if you have enough water pressure, put a 2 quad container under fully opened hot water faucet nearest the dishwasher. It should fill in less than 14 seconds. Be sure all other faucets are turned off during test. Water Temperature Hot water is needed for best dishwashing and drying results. Water entering dishwasher should be at least 120°F (49°C) to give satisfactory results. To check water temperature entering dishwasher: · Turn on hot water faucet nearest dishwasher for several minutes to clear cool water from pipes. · Hold a candy or meat thermometer in stream of water to check the temperature. · If temperature is below 120°F (49°C), have a qualified person raise the hot water heater thermostat setting. Important: Before starting a cycle, run hot water to clear cool water from pipe. The HEAT DRY option in combination with rinse aid will enhance drying performance. The energy required to use the HEAT DRY option costs pennies per cycle. You may choose not to select the HEAT DRY option; however you will have items in your dish load that will not be completely dry at the end of the cycle. Dispenser Cap 8 Care and Cleaning Burn Hazard Allow heating element to cool before cleaning the interior. Failure to do so can result in burns. Outside--Occasionally wash with a mild nonabrasive detergent and water. Rinse and dry. Inside--The inside of the dishwasher is self- cleaning with normal use. To clean stainless steel wipe with the grains. Use a Dishwasher Safe Detergent to help with the stains or discolorations. NEVER use products that contain Chlorine Bleach or Citric Acid. Important: The dish'rasher motor is permanently lubricated at the factory and does not need to be oiled. Care of Drain Air Gap If a drain air gap was installed for your built-in dishwasher, check to make sure it is clean so the dishwasher will drain properly. Drain air gaps are usually mounted on countertop and can be inspected by removing the cover. A drain air gap is not part of your dishwasher and is not covered by this warranty. Winterizing A dishwasher left in an unheated place should be protected from freezing. Have a qualified person do the following: To Disconnect Service: 1. Turn off electrical power to the dishwasher at the supply source by removing fuses or tripping circuit breaker. 2. Shut offwater supply. 3. Place a pan under the inlet valve. Disconnect water line from inlet valve and drain into pan. 4. Disconnect drain line from pump and drain water into pan. Note: See installation Instructions for more details. To Restore Service: 1. Reconnect the water, drain, and electrical power supply. 2. Turn on water and electrical power supply. 3. Fill both detergent cups and run dishwasher through a NORMAL WASH Cycle. 4. Check connections to make sure they do not leak. Note: See Installation Instructions for more details. 9 Care and Cleaning continued Property Damage Hazard Freezing temperatures may cause water lines to rupture. Be sure all supply lines to and circulating lines within dishwasher are protected. Failure to do so could result in property damage. Cleaning the Filter For optimum performance, your dishwasher is equipped with a filter assembly featuring a main filter, cup and fine filter as shown in the drawing above, All food fragments are removed from the dishwasher as water passes through the filter assembly. Each pad of the assembly should be cleaned often to ensure that all food fragments are removed from the dishes. To remove food fragments from the filter assembly, the filters must be removed from the dishwasher. To remove the filters, pull up on the edge of the main filter. Next, rinse the main filter and fine filter under running water. Cleaning with a brush may also be necessary to remove any fragments trapped in the filters. Once cleaning has been completed, simply reassemble the filter as shown in the drawing above. To ensure that the filter is fully seated, please press down on the top of the main filter. Using the dishwasher without a properly installed filter is not recommended as it will reduce the cleaning efficiency and may damage dishware. Cleaning the Spray Arm The spray arm may need to be cleaned to insure that there are no clogs to the spray arm jets and bearings due to hard water chemicals. To remove spray arm simply hold the spray arm in place and turn the retaining nut clockwise and pull up on the spray arm lifting offthe shaft. To clean the spray arm use warm soapy water using a soft brush to clean the jets and bearings. To replace the spray arm simply set the spray arm on the shaft, take the retaining nut and turn it counter clockwise till it has locked into place. 10 Connecting and Disconnecting the Portable Dishwasher The portable dishwasher must be connected to a faucet and electrical outlet each time it is used. Follow directions on this page to properly connect dishwasher. IMPORTANT: Make sure door is latched before moving dishwasher. Faucet Adapter The power cord and faucet coupler with hoses are located in a compartment in Assembly (Figure A) back of dishwasher. A special adapter must be installed on faucet before you can connect dishwasher (Figure A). 1. Remove faucet adapter assembly from literature package. 2. Unscrew existing sink faucet aerator. 3. Check faucet spout to see if threads are inside or outside. · If threads are on inside of faucet spout, use both rubber washers. · If threads are on outside of faucet spout, use one rubber washer only. · If faucet has no threads, an adapter kit with instructions for attachment to a non-threaded spout is available at most hardware stores. 4. Assemble faucet spout as shown in Figure A. Connecting the Portable Faucet Adapter Assembly (Figure B) Connecting the Portable Dishwasher 1. Run water at faucet until it is hot. Turn off faucet. 2. Pull hoses out of compartment. 3. Push collar down and slip faucet connector onto faucet adapter (Figure B). 4. When connector snaps into place, release collar. 5. Slowly turn on hot water all the way. 6. Plug power cord into grounded outlet. Disconnecting the Portable Dishwasher 1. VVhen cycle has finished, unplug power cord and return it to compartment. 2. Turn off hot water. 3. Press red button on coupler to release water pressure. 4. Press down on collar to release coupler. 5. Empty remaining water from coupler and return it to compartment. Electric Shock Hazard Avoid fire hazard or electrical shock. Do not use an adapter plug, extension cord or remove grounding prong from electrical power cord. Failure to follow this warning can cause serious injury, fire or death. Grounding type wall receptacl Powersupply cord with 3-prong grounding plug IMPORTANT: A sink spray hose can burst due to constant water pressure while in use. If your spray hose is installed on same water line as the dishwasher, it is your responsibility to disconnect sink°s spray hose and to plug hole. Electrical Connection for a Portable Dishwasher An electrical supply of 120 volts, 60 Hz, AC only, 15 amps is required. For your safety, the dishwasher must be grounded. If there is a malfunction or breakdown, grounding will reduce risk of electrical shock. This dishwasher has a power cord with a 3-prong grounding plug. It must be plugged into a mating 3-prong grounding type receptacle, installed and grounded in accordance with the National Electrical Code and any local codes and ordinances. 11 Common Dishwashing Problems and Solutions Dishes not clean--check pages 4 to 8 for information on correct wash cycle, proper loading, water temperature, water pressure, hard water, amount of detergent, old and ineffective detergent, and dish placement. To maximize wash performance clean the filter of all large food particles after each wash. To ensure that you clean the filter correctly refer to page 12. Dishes not drying can be greatly improved by using a rinse ~d andhot water. Hot water raises temperature of dishes to speed up drying. When loading, invert cups and bowls so that water can run off. Avoid nesting of articles. If dishes are not completely dry at end of cycle (which may occur when COOL DRY setting is used), open door, roll out racks, and allow dishes to air dry. Spotting--spots form when hard water droplets evaporate leaving a deposit. Low phosphate detergents increase the problem in hard water. To prevent, use hot water and a detergent with a higher level of phosphates (preferably 8.7% or higher), or use more ora Iow phosphate detergent. Be sure to use a rinse aid. If water is very hard, it may be necessary to install a water softener. Load glasses and plates so they have minimum contact with racks and pins. Avoid overloading. Spotting will occur where dishes and glasses touch. Cloudy films and streaking are usually caused by a combination of hard water and an insufficient amount of detergent. Low phosphate detergents are also a factor. To correct, increase amount of detergent, check water temperature and always use a rinse aid. If water is very hard, it may be necessary to install a water softener. Etched film on glassware is caused by using too much detergent in soft or softened water. This film cannot be removed. It is more likely to occur on soft leaded glass or expensive crystal. An early warning of this condition is a cloudy iridescent appearance on glasses. To prevent, be sure dishwasher is getting a full fill of water. Water should reach base of heating element. If water level is Iow, have water pressure checked by a plumber. Use less detergent and make sure water temperature is not higher than 150°F (66°C). Underload to assure thorough rinsing. Use the COOL DRY Option. Chipped dishes and glasses can result from rough handling and improper loading. Do not put glasses in direct contact with other items. Place glasses securely against pins. Crazing of older china and pottery happens when items are subjected to very hot water. Once crazing (fine cracks in the glaze) appears, it cannot be removed. Do not machine wash again or condition may worsen. Coffee and tea stains can occur when water contains traces of iron. To avoid stains, rinse cups out immediately after use. Increase amount of detergent and use a rinse aid. Water temperature should be approximately 140°F (60°C). If problem persists, install a water softener with an iron removal unit. To remove stains, hand wash cups in solution of 1/2 cup (120 mi) bleach and a quart (1 L) of warm water. Rinse thoroughly. Gray-black stains on dishes are caused by manganese in water supply. To correct, install a manganese filtering system into house water supply. Reddish-brown stains on dishes, glasses and interior are caused by iron in water. To avoid iron stain, increase detergent, use water heated to approximately 140°F (60°C) and a rinse aid. It may be necessary to install a water softener with an iron removal unit. To improve appearance, use a commercial rust and lime scale remover. Plastic items can lose their shape due to high temperatures of automatic dishwashing. Read labels before washing. Place washable items in top rack away from heating element. Discoloration of plasticware by some foods, such as tomato sauce, can stain plasticware. If stained, soak item in solution of 1 tablespoon dishwasher detergent and a quart of hot water or in a solution of 1/2 cup (120 mi) bleach and a quart (1 L) of hot water. Fading of patterns and metallic trim is due to many washings, detergent and hot water. 12 Common Dishwashing Problems and Solutions continued Troubleshooting Most of today's china is dishwasher safe. Antique, handpainted china, and handpainted pottery should be washed by hand. Do not place si!,ver ,n.e, xt to ,or to.u, ching stainless steel utensils in oisnwasner silverware basket. This can cause pitting of stainless steel blades. (Most silver knives have stainless steel blades. Db not let blades touch other stainless steel utensils during wash cycle.) Tarnish on silver plate occurs when worn down to the base metal and turns a bronze color when exposed to hot water and detergent. Remove bronzing by soaking item in vinegar for 10 minutes or use a silver polish. For permanent protection, have silver replated. Silver tarnish can be caused by prolonged contact with air or with foods containing sulphur like eggs, mayonnaise, or seafood. Contact with undissolved detergent can also cause tarnish. To prevent this, rinse silver soon after use. Use care not to pour detergent directly onto silver. Remove tarnish with a silver polish. Discoloration of stainless steel--Food soil can create a film or discoloration. To avoid, rinse stainless items promptly. Food soil films can be removed with a stainless steel cleanser or mild cleanser. Rinse thoroughly. Pi .tting ,of stainless steel is ca,used by prolonged contact with detergent granules and foods like salt, mayonnaise, fruits, butter or milk. To prevent, rinse soon after use. Do not allow detergent to fall directly onto stainless steel items. Discoloration of aluminum--Anodized (colored) aluminum cannot withstand machine washing. Resulting loss of color is permanent. Other aluminum may darken when machine washed. To decrease chance of discoloration, do not place aluminum directly beneath detergent dispenser. To brighten darkened items, scour with soap filled steel wool pads. For severely darkened pans, simmer an acidic food or a solution of 2 teaspoons (10 mi) cream of tartar per quart (1 L) of water for 1/2 hour. Scour with soap filled steel wool pad, rinse and dry. Knife handles become loose when the cement is exposed to very hot water. Test wash a single knife for several weeks. Damaged knives should be professionally re-cemented. Before calling for service, review this list. It may save you both time and expense. This list includes common experiences that are not the result of defective workmanship or material. Noise problems? It is normal to hear swishing and pulsating sounds. These sounds mean that water is circulating through the dishwasher. It is normal to hear motor sounds before water enters tub. Loud ticking usually means something is hitting wash arm. See Preparing and Loading Dishes. Vibrating or rattling sounds can mean dishes are touching each other. See Preparing and Loading Dishes. Operating problems? Be sure door is firmly closed. It is normal for dishwasher to pause between cycles. Leaking? Check for items sticking out of dishwasher that could prevent door from closing and sealing properly. Use only fresh dishwashing detergent to avoid oversudsing. Water coming through door vents? When a dish is added after starting dishwasher, wait a few seconds before latching door. This permits entering cold air to expand slowly inside dishwasher. Dishes not dry? Check to see if rinse aid dispenser needs refilling. Hot water temperature may be too tow (min. 120°F 49°C). If COOL DRY option is being used, additional drying time may be required with door open. Water in tub? A small amount of water in bottom of tub is normal. It keeps water seal lubricated. Detergent left in cup? Detergent may be too old. Discard old detergent. Use fresh detergent. Dishes may not be loaded properly. Be sure items do not protrude from front of bottom rack preventing detergent cup from opening. 13 Your appliance is covered by a one year limited warranty. For one year from your original date of purchase, Electrolux will pay all costs for repairing or replacing any parts of this appliance that prove to be defective in materials or workmanship when such appliance is installed, used and maintained in accordance with the provided instructions. Exclusions This warranty does not cover the following: 1. Products with original serial numbers that have been removed, altered or cannot be readily determined. 2 Product that has been transferred from its original owner to another party or removed outside the USA or Canada. 3. Rust on the interior or exterior of the unit. 4. Products purchased "as-is" are not covered by this warranty. 5. Food loss due to any refrigerator or freezer failures, 6. Products used in a commercial setting. 7. Service calls which do not involve malfunction or defects in materials or workmanship, or for appliances not in ordinary household use or used other than in accordance with the provided instructions. 8 Service calls to correct the installation of your appliance or to instruct you how to use your appliance. 9 Expenses for making the appliance accessible for servicing, such as remova of tr m, cupboards, sheves. etc.,which are not a part of the appliance when it is shipped from the factory. 10. Service calls to repair or replace appliance light bulbs, air filters, water filters, other consumables, or knobs, handles, or other cosmetic parts. 11. Surcharges including, but not limited to, any after hour, weekend, or holiday service calls, tolls, ferry trip charges, or mileage expense for service calls to remote areas, including the state of Alaska. 12. Damages to the finish of appliance or home incurred during installation, including but not limited to floors cabinets, walls, etc. 13. Damages caused by: servic~ performed by unauthorized service companies; use of pads other than genuine Electrolux parts or parts obtained from pemons other than authorized service companies; or external causes such as abuse, misuse, inadequate power supply, accidents, fires, or acts of God. DISCLAIMER OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES; LIMITATION OF REMEDIES CUSTOMER'S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY UNDER THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SHALL BE PRODUCT REPAIR OR REPLACEMENTAS PROVIDED HEREIN. CLAIMS BASED ON IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FORA PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO ONE YEAR OR THE SHORTEST PERIOD ALLOWED BY LAW, BUT NOT LESS THAN ONE YEAR. ELECTROLUX SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES SUCH AS PROPERTY DAMAGEAND INCIDENTAL EXPENSES RESULTING FROM ANY BREACH OF THIS WRITTEN LIMITED WARRANTY ORANY IMPLIED WARRANTY. SOME STATES AND PROVINCES DO NOTALLOWTHE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR LIMITATIONS ON THE DURATION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THESE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOTAPPLYTO YOU. THIS WRITTEN WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS. YOU MAYALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS THAT VARY FROM STATE TO STATE. If You Need Service Keep your receipt, delivery slip, or some other appropriate payment record to establish the warranty period should service be required. If service is performed, it is in your best interest to obtain and keep all receipts, Service under this warranty must be obtained by contacting Electrolux at the addresses or phone numbers below. This warranty only applies in the USA and Canada. In the USA, your appliance is warranted by Electrolux Major Appliances North America, a division of Electrolux Home Products, Inc. In Canada, your appliance is warranted by Electrolux Canada Corp. Electrolux authorizes no person to change or add to any obligations under this warranty. Obligations for service and parts under this warranty must be performed by Electrolux or an authorized service company. Product features or specifications as described or illustrated are subject to change without notice. USA 1.800,944.9044 Electrolux Major Appliances North America P.O, Box 212378 Augusta, GA 30907 [] Electrolux Canada 1.800.668.4606 Ele~rolux Canada Corp, 5855Ter~ Fox Way Mississauga, Ontario, Canada L5V 3E4 14 Installation Built-In Ins truc t i one D i s hwa sher If you have questions, call 800-944-9400 (US),800-245-8352(Canada)or visit our website at: www. Frigidaire.com ~] S BEFORE YOU BEGIN IMPORTANT-The dishwasher Read these instructions MUST be installed to allow for future completely and carefully, removal from the enclosure if service is required. IMPORTANT- Observe all If you received a damaged dishwasher, governing codes and ordinances, you should immediately contact your · Note to Installer - Be sure to leave dealer or builder. these instructions for the Optional Accessories -See the Owner's consumer's and local inspector's Manual for available custom panel use. kits · Note to Consumer -Keep these instructions with your Owner's FOR YOUR SAFETY Manual for future reference. · Skill Level - Installation of this Read and observe all CAUTIONS and dishwasher requires basic mechanical WARNINGS shown throughout these and electrical skills. Proper instructions. While performing installation is the responsibility installations described in this of the installer. Product failure booklet, gloves, safety glasses or due to improper installation is not goggles should be worn. covered under the ELECTROLUX Appliance Warranty' ~e WARNING · Completion Time - 1 to 3 Hours. New loroi,cetkerld~oleleclricald~ec~,li~,er installations require more time than ilijllrytgp~l'Siis, tkelistallerml~SlellSl~tkat replacement installations, tke diskwasaer is cempletely eaclesed at tae ~ time afinstallation. READ CAREFULLY. KEEP THESE INSTRUCTIONS. Installation Preparation PARTS SUPPLIED: "Two #8 Phillips flat hcod wend corews, 5/8" Icog to scours dishofaslmr te underside of countertep [in literature package]. "Two I'hillips head, color matehod teekick screws lin literature package]. 2 Wood Screws 2 Color Natcand Screw Type Toekick Screws ifcoe Clamp MATERIALS YOU WILL NEED: -- For, rate, ecoiilrscoion nsf and 90o Elhow [3/8,,NPT external thread en one end, opposite end sized to fit water supply] "Itirsnd mltape "gL Listed wire nuts [3] Materials for New Installations Only: "Air gap for drain hcoe, if required Waste tee ter house plumbing, ff applicable ilcoti'h:al cable or power cord, if applicable Screw I~pe hose cismpa Shale relief ter electrical connection Hand sbfft-off valve Water fine 3/8" min. copper Ccollidl' for extending draie line, if applicable Nasd Sbut- Wire Nuts [3] 90" Elbow, Eerrele Off Valve Tlread and Compression if ut teal Tape Electrical Cable Not Water line Waste Tee [or Power Cord, if applicable] Air Gap Screw Type Strain Relief Nose Clamps TOOLS YOU WILL NEED: [] PbSlipa ~d corewd~er [] 5~if" amd 1/4" eofd~er [] 6"Adjustable wrench [] Level [] CarpeNters sqsere [] Hatstyglasses [] Bcoket te catch water when flushing tee lice [] Sieves flashlight For New Installations ~ Only: Ncokst [] Tubing cutter ~ [] griS asd apprsp'iofe bits [] Hats saw set tiicves Level I/4 I~.--~, ,~-..~~,~---,~, and §/16" ~ Nsf drive' '" S" Adjustable Safely Glasses Hale Saw Set lubing Cutter Measuring Tape Installation Preparation PREPARE DISHWASHER ENCLOSURE 32.5" Underside of CounterLop to Floor Square 7-5/8" Min. and 8" Max. Plumb Plumbing and Electric Se~'vice F~sure A MU,~ En[e{' Shaded · 18e rough lialliuct lipenilig lest be at least 24" deep and 17-5/8" fi 18" wide. The npeliiug should be 32.5" max. height. · Tile diskwasker wast lle iasfiIted lin that drain Iluce is ne mare than 10 feet ill leogtk fir proper drainage. · Tin dishwasher must in filly eucluced lin fie top, sides and back, and must nat supped ac)' pad nf the UClilucm'B. CLEARANCES: When installed into a comer, allow 2" min. ~learance beiwece dishwasher and adjacent cabinet, wall or otber appliances. Allow 2a-5/8,, min. clearance Mm the freer ef the diabwasher for deer epceing. Figure B / C~ntertop ' 25-5/8" -- Clearance for Door Opening 2" Minimum Figure B Note: AOA installation, [324/2"] beneath 34" high caunteHeps may be accomplished by adjusting tho toekick and leveling legs. DRAIN REQUIREMENTS · FIIIOw lucucl lilduc and lirdiliaucuc. · Da alt exlieed lO feet distance fi drain. · On lilt connuct drain ItBUC fram antler devilies tn the diskwasker draia ieuc. · OiSiwasier mlist lle clanucted ti waste line with an air gap [nit si#lied] ir 32" milimUl iigb drain lucg, depending lin ialial Bides aid irdinalceS to prevent lluch flew ilfi the diskwaliier. · Air lap list le used if waste tee or disposer ciucuctilfl is less tlluc 18" allove tile flucr to prevuct siplmilg. DRAIN PREPARATION lite type of drain Installation depends on answers te tko telllWi# questions: [] ge Ilical liedes Ir crdillanucs roguiro an air gap? [] Will waste tee ir disposer cennectiuc be less tllan 18" #ave the fllOr? [] Will installation have a drain Ilep less tim 32" alleve floor? If tile answer tO.~TY If tile 3 qleSliOns allove is YES, Method 1 MUST be use~.OtllerwJseeJtllerMetllodler Metlled 2 may lle used. Figure C or Figaro 9. CAUTION: An air lap MOST BE USEn If fie drain lllse is liucnucted to waste tee ir disposer Ilwer tkuc 18" akeve itle flair. Faillre ti provide tie proper drain liaucelitiil ieight with air gap ir 32" lilimm, kip drain Iccp will rosnlt in improper draining if tko diSllWasller. Method 1 - Air Gap with Waste Tee. or Di~oser m _~ m Method 2 - High Drain with Waste Tee or Disposer Previde a metkod te afluck drain hose fi nndereide gf ucletemp. Install waste fie or disposer and air laP aucording to maucficfiror's instructions. CABINET PREPARATION · Orlll a 14/2" dia. bile te fie cakiuct wall wltilia tile slladnd arouc Ii#wa il Flglro A for tie droll base cuclielitluc. The bile sllucld in smoetk Y/itl eli slurp edges. Installation Preparation PREPARE ELECTRICAL WIRING WARNING Fen PERSONAL SAEEIY: Bemove house fuse ir igel circuit brcaker before hegifluiq installation. 90 nut use au extension curd or adapter plug with this appliance. Electrical Requirements protected by a 15 or 20 ampere circuit breaker ur time delay tese. · Wiring must he 2 wire with ground. · If the eleot['ical supply dues let meet the akove rognircmeuts, call a licensed electrician keterc proceeding. Grounding Instructions - Cable Direct This appliance mast be cnnnected tea grounded metal, permanent wiring s)'stem, ur au equipment grounding canducter must he run with the circlit cnnduntero and he connected to the eqiipment grounding terminal Ir lead on the appliance. Grounding Instructions - Power Cord Models his appliam mast he grounded, te the event efa malfunction ur breakdown, grounding will reduce the risk ef electrical ShlCk ky proviiilg a path If toast rcsistaace ter electric ulrrcut. Tko plug mist he Ptelled into an appropriate elLiOt that is installed aid grouuded ia accnrdauue with lanai codes awl irdiuaucus. WARNING 1ko improper uuuuectiou uf the equipment grcuwiiq ceaductlr can result tea risk ef electric shock. Check with a qlalified electrician or sereice reprcsentative if yea are ie dlnbt that the appliance is properly grounded. 1-1/2" Dia. from Cabinet White Cabinet Preparation & Wire Routing · Tko wiring may enter the opening fram either side, rear or the floor within the shaded area. · Cut a 1-1/2" max. dia. hale to admit the electrical cable. The hole must ie frae if sharp edges. If the cabinet wall is metal, the bale edge must le cgvercd with a knskiug. · Guile direct Clllectlufis may pass throigi the same bile as the droiB hlse aid kaL water NUB, if CllVeUlelt. If califlet wall is metal, the bole edge must wi clYerod with a kushilg. NOTE: lower CB;dS with plan must pass thrclgh a separate bile. Electrical Connection to Dishwasher wall · Fur RUWUr curd cuuuuctiuus, install ! 3-prong grounding type receptacle. 1lie power-supply receptacle ter the agpli#ae shall be iustalied in a uakinut ar ua u wall adjacent tn the undercnunter space in which the appliance is te he installed. Installation Instructions PREPARE HOT WATER LINE · file line way entel` fl'Brai eithel, side, leal, er flood, witiia tile shaded ella siowa le figill F. · file line way ilass thlloop tile samwa hale as tie electl,ical cable and drain lose. al,, cot an additional 14/2" din. ilele to acclm]m]edate tie watel, line. If pBwel' nard with plug is ised, watel, line e]est let pass thlelgk ilnwel, cord hole. Valve Hot~ .... From Cabinet 3" From Floor Cabinet Face- Water Line Connection · Tllll riff the water Slpply. · Ifllltall a ilalld sillt-off valve ie ae accessible [eeatiae, suck as elided, tile sick. Ioptioeal, bet stllllkly leOlii]amwalded ned may be reqeilld ky local cedes.] · Water sgnestill is BO tie left side If tie lisiwasilel'. Illstall tile init wetil` Illet lile, eSlnl le less tiaa 3/8" 9.B. egilper tlillel, itllti the line as sbgWll II ribald F aid extend tin`ward at least 18" film] dial, wall. · AdjlSt water lenten, tin, 120°F ti 150°i timpeletnll. · Flush weter lille ti eleal lilt dekris. · file hit water Slpilly file ilresnull must be 20420 PSi. BEFORE YOU BEGIN [oeati and set aside tie ilaekage elletaining 2 Pilillips ilead ceulltirtlp walltilg sellws aid 2 additieealtoeklek sellwe [lllcatid ill tile litilltule ilackage]. I STEP ~ CHECK DOOR BALANCE Tn ebellk tie deal` kalallee, held the tap nf tile disbwasbel, firmly. Increase I Decrease Figure G · Opell tie dim' SllWly, if tile Illin, dllps Wiel released, iesllase llilrill tiesien. If tile dell' closes when llleased, desllase tilCilll. · Pill tie spring adjnstment ilia eli llf tile bales, insert il tie next 8igllest Il, lowest bile aid test alllll. · Adjust blti Coed, springs ti ti8 same telSiOn. · Continue mowing tile sill,lng pin lntil dial, is ilalaoned. A CAUTiON: Opening tile deed, will canse tie diskwasbel, to tip ferwal'd. Il lit Illl tie lilt Ilftl pi ire rill! ti IIItlll tie illillUilr, ir .~ it is necessal,y to Ipe, tile deer, held tie tip ef tie disbwasiel, securely witil eno 8aed and hold tile deed, with tile ethel, hand. 5 Installation ISTEP 2 /ADJUST LEVELING LEGS · Neve the dishwasher close te tie iostellation location and lay it on its kook. Adjust to Installation Height · Heascro iostallatteu height and dishwasher beigkt. Extend leveitol legs cat from the dishwasher base, I/4" less than installation beigkt. ]REMOVE TOE ICK Remove tie 4 tvektek screws. Lift off tie 2 piece toekick. Instructions' STEP 4] INSTALL 90° ELBOW · Wrap 90° elbow witk thread seal tape. · Jastell a 90° elbow onto tie water valve. Fill Hose 90° Elbow Water Valve Bracket Thread Seal Tape · 9o not over tigbteo 90° elbow, water valve bracket could bend er water valve fitticg could brock. · Position tie end ef tko elbow to face the rear cf the dishwasher. Installation Instructions I STEP 5pOSITION WATER LINE AND HOUSE WIRING · Position water supply Iivo and louse wirial aa the fidor el the Igeeilg fe avoid iaferferelCe with base of diskwasler and camp#eats under dishwasher. House- Line Wiring ~TEP 6]INSERT DRAIN HOSE THROUGH CABINET .Insertdraigkoseintucabiaetwallkole. lfaggwarcordis ased, gl~etleeadthraaglaseparafelele. Insular Blanket Maximum Drain Hose 10' Drain ~ Hose / Hous % WirJn( Power Cord (If Used) Figulre N TI P: Positiau mater line and keuvo wiring earle flair te avoid ilferferalvo witi lava af disiwasher. I STEP 71SLIDE DISHWASHER PARTIALLY INTO CABINET DO NOT PUSH AGAINST FRONT PANEL WITH KNEES. DAMAGE WILL OCCUR. · Slide dishwasher anti the epeliog a few iackes It a time. Front Door Panel With Knee. Damage to The Door Panel Will Occur. 3o Not Push Against PZgu~e 0 · As yea pranced, pull tke drain kose tkraugb the opening under the sink. Stup pashiug wilco tie dislwasler is a few inches fei'waN of adjutant caklaetry. · Make sure draiu bose is net kinked under the dishwasher and tkera is ua iuferferaace wife fee water line and wiring or any atler component. Installation Instructions [STEP 8~ POSITION DISHWASHER T/NDER COUNTERTOP · Checkta he sara that warns ara secure uuder the dishwasher and net pinclied ar in contact with door springs er other dishwasher cumpunents. TIP: Check thb issulatiua blanket, if equipped. It should ke pesitiuued so it is ust bunched ap ar iuturtsrisg with doer springs. Check by opening and cissiug the doer. · Push dishwasher isth cabinet. The froot camera af the disbwaalier door shastd be flash with cabinet daora. Be careful ust th dent fraut panels with knees ar damage coantertap or cabinets with dislwasher ga~s. /~/~-'~ Reposition Dishwasher Do Not Push ^gain [font Door Panel With ~. ~U~ ~ ~ r STEP 9] LEVEL DISHWASHER IMPORTANT - liishwa.ar · Place level aa deer nad rack track isside the tab as sliuwa th check that the dishwasher is level. Check Level- Front to Back Check Level Side Figure Q · Level the dishwasher by adjustiug the fear leveling legs individually. to Adj, Figure R TIP: Pill isw~r rack act, allot kalfway, itkeck ts he sara the rack does not rail thrward or lank ists dishwasher. If the rank rails In either dirastieu, the dishwasker mast be ivveled again. · If daar hits tlie tub, tlie disbwasker is nat installed curractl~,. Adjust leveliug legs th align Our th tab. 8 Installation Instructions I STEP 10]SECURE DISHWASHER TO CABINET 1'lie dishwasher mst be sec,,red th the c,,u,,tertop. · Pgsitiu the diskwasher s,, that the t,,b flange alig,,s with the freer face of the caki,,et frame. IMPORTANT: Che,,k to be s,,re the di~~hwasher is centered i,, the ,,peathg and there is lie i,,terference with adja,,ent cabinets when ,,pentag or cl,,sing the deut. b t f t · Festa the dishwashel' th the ,,ndereide ef the ,,g,,,,tertop with tee 2 Phillips screws previded. IMPORTANT- itri.,,,.wa straigkt and flash. PretNdi~~g screw heads will s,,rat,,h tie top of the ,,,,,,frei panel a,,d can interfere with d,,,,l' cl,,si,,g. ISTEP 11 [CONNECT WATER SUPPLY C,,,,nect water supply t,, 90° eth,,w. · Slide ClnpreSSill met, then ferrlle evel, end of watel, line. · Insert water li~~e inte 99o eth~~w. · Slide fertile against elb~~w and SB,,ra wifll ,,empressiefl pply Line IMP ORTANT - Ch,,,h f, h, s,,re tut d,,ir sprilg dues lot rah or cutact the fill iBSe Ir water Slpply line. Test by ,,pe,,i,,g a,,d CllSteg the dolt. Re-ra,,te tke it,,es if a railing I,,Ise Ir iflterfereBe,,CClre. 9 Installation Instructions I STEP 12 1 CONNECT DRAIN LINE FOLLOW ALL LOCAL CODES AND ORDINANCES. The drein hose molded end will fit 5/8", 3/4" er I" dillmeter cnnflections on the air gap, waste tee llr disposer. Set on the marked line as required for your Installetiln. Cutting Lines IMPORTANT: Do not cut corrugated portion of hose Figu~e U · If a longer drain hose is required, add ap Ill 42" of tenglh a total of 10 ft. te the factlry instlllted hose. Use 5/8" or 7/ 8" inside dillmeter hose alld a coupler tll cnnlect the two bose ellds. Secure tko cnanectinn with hose clllmps. Hose Clamp Hose Clamp · Senlre the drain hose tn tko air laP, waste tee er dispnser with clamps. NOTE: TOTAL BBAIN NOSE LFNGTO MOST NOT EXCE[O 19 FEFT FOR PSOPER DRAIN OPERATION. DRAIN LINE INSTALLATION · Cellnect dreill lille te ai~' gap, waste tee or displlser nsillg either prevteusly deterflliled metknd. Method I - Air gap with waste tee or disposer Waste lee Installation Figure W Method 2 - High drain loop with waste tee or disposer Fasten to underside ~ofcounte[top 32" ,, V~in Min. Fasten to underside _ ~ of counte~c )~1J18 32, , Mir' Min. 1., Waste Tee InstallaUon mt¢osei'l~dsttanml IMPORTANT - -RemoYe ~ Disposer When ngllflenlteg drain line tn disposer, ~ Plug ckenk teke sure tkat drain plug bas been rewaved. DISNWASFlEII WILL NOT 9BAIN IF PLUG IS LEFT IN PLACE. TIP: Avoid lllnllecessary service cllll ckarges. Always he sire disposer drain plug has been remnved keflre attaching dishwasker drain hose tn the disposer. 1 o Installation Instructions STEP 13 I CONNECT POWER SUPPLY Vlrlfy tilt Illllr Il tm'lei iff at iii SllrSs. · Usmeve jlecttoll bix cover "A". · LlCste the tiree dishwasher wires, [white, black aid green[ with stripped ends. Inert dishwasher wires through the small kate in tiejiictiee hex "B". ·Secere USese wiring to tie bettem If the junctiln hex with a strong relief "C". · User wire lite ti COOlest incoming ground ti green, white te wiitte aid Illaek ti knack "g". · Usplace jlnnttoa kix curer "E". Check te be sure that wires are Blt pinched lader the cover. WARNING If hence wiring is not 2-wire with grennd, a greind must be provided by the installer. WUSn llUlSe wirtnl is aluminum, he sure te use gL Listed alti-oxidast Cllllpgund and aluminum-to-copper clniectore. STEP 14] PRE-TEST CHECKLIST llllSW till list after Illtllllll year iteiWliilr ti allll susrlln fir a IlrUlae nail tilt Is lit Smrll il yllr tllrrllty. [] Check ti he sure power is OFF. [] Opel dior and remove all team and paper packaging. [] Llcate toe Owner's Malual ii tko literature package. [] Read the Owner's Maleal for eperatifll IlStrentilns. [] Check door apeainl and clinton, if dear dies lit ipen and ciasa freely or teldS tn tell, check spring adjlstmests. See Step I. [] Check to be sire tllat wiring is secure under the lishwasller, net Lliflcked ur in nestast with deer sprilgs er ether components. See Step 9. [] Check dior alignment with tub. If deer kits tub, level dishwasher. See Step 10. [] Pull lower rack out, ablet half way. Check to US CUrB it dies eot rail back or terward on the deer. If the rack waves, adjest leveling legs. See Step 19. [] Check dior alillmelt with cakilst. If kalr hits nakilet, repesitill er relevel disiwasier. See Step 10. [] Verify water Slpply aid droll USes are lit kill[ed Ir to cestact with stker csmpelents. SEitost witll miter Ir ~. disllwaSller frame colld Calve lense. See Step I. [] lira eB tko silk kit water falaet aid verify water temperetlre. Incamtog water temperetlre mist ke ketween 126°F and 150~f. A minimum if 120~f telperatlre is required ter kelt wash perterwaace. See "Prepare Set Water Line", page 5. [] Add 2 quarts ef water ti the iliflm If the disiwasller to lubricate the pimp seal. [] Turn on water supply. Check for leaks, tighten connections if hooded. [] Remove protective film if present frem tko central panel and door. 1 1 Installation Instructions STEP 15] DISHWASHER WET TEST m Turn on power supply [or plug power cord into ouOet, if equipped]. [] Turn dialto Normal "Wash" position. [] Close door. [] Check lo be sure teat water entern tee dishwasher. If water does not enter the disllwesher, check to be sure that water and power are turned on. [] Check tel' leaks ender the dishwasher. If a leak is found, turn pewer sepply off, then Ifghten connections. Restore power after leak is ~i~-,~,]. caused by door rubbing ur hitting ngaiflst adjacent cabinetry. Repositlon the dishwasher If nscnssa~. See Step 9. [] The dishwasher will drain and turn off about 5 to 7 minutes alter the first fig. Check drain lines. If 1saks are found, turn power off at the breaker and corrnct plumbing as necessary. Restorn power after corf'ectisns are made. See Step 12. [] Open dishwasher door and make sum most of the water has drained. If net, check teat dispeser plug has been remevnd and/er air gap is net plugged. See Step 13. Aisu check drain line lot kinking. [] Run tee ctshwnshm'thrnegh ansther fill and drnin cycle. Checklor leaks and COlTect If rnquirnd. [] At tee end of drain, open deer and turn dial te OFF position. STEP 161 REPLACE TOEKICK · Place 2-pidce toekick against the legs gf the dishwasher. · Place the inner teekick piece [with slats] against the teskick bracket, file slits sbesid aliBI with taekick bl'SCkat screw bales. Allew the tlekick ti thank the fleer. · Place larger thekick ever tka inner piece and install 4 thekick ecl'twa. · 9se additialal 2 screws tkat are provided far iesthllatiess iver 33-1/2" Ilgb. · gsa kath toekick pieces for all iecthllatiln knights. STEP 17] LITERATURE Be sale th leave esfllplete literotllro package nad Installation IastruCtlles with cesSnlaec. BUILT-IN BEVERAGE CENTER / REFRIGERADOR PARA EMPOTRAR INSTRUCTION MANUAL MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES Model Numbers / Nos. de Modelos: BCA5102S8,1 BEFORE USE, PLEASE READ AND FOLLOW ALL SAFETY RULES AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS. La seccibn en espa~ol empieza en la p~gina 15 Avanti Products has a policy of continuous improvement on its products and reserves the right to change materials and specifications without notice. Avanti Products, A Division of The Mackle Co., Inc. P.O. Box 520604 - Miami, Florida 33152 www,avantiproducts.com TABLE OF CONTENTS Appliance Safety 3 Important Safeguides 4 Help Us Help You ... 5 Parts and Features 6 Important Safety Instructions 7 Installation Instructions 7 Before Using Your Beverage Center Installation of Your Beverage Center Electrical Connection 8 Extension Cord 8 Reversing the Door Swing of Your Wine Appliance Installing Stainless Steel Handle (Model BCA5105SG-1 Only) 10 Operating Your Beverage Center ON/OFF Power & Control Panel Lock Function 10 Setting the Temperature Control 10 Interior Light 11 Door Lock 11 Care and Maintenance 11 Cleaning Your Beverage Center 11 Power Failure 11 Moving Your Beverage Center 11 Energy Saving Tips 11 Troubleshooting Guide 12 Service for Your Appliance 13 Wiring Diagram 13 Your Avanti Products Warranty Instrucciones en Espa~ol 14 15 - 17 Registration Information and Registration Card 19 APPLIANCE SAFETY Your safety and the safety of others are very important. We have provided many important safety messages in this manual and on your appliance. Always read and obey all safety messages. This is the Safety Alert Symbol. This symbol alerts you to potential hazards that can kill or injure you and others. All safety messages will follow the Safety Alert Symbol and either the words "DANGER", "WARNING" or "CAUTION". Danger means that failure to heed this safety statement may result in severe personal injury or death. Warning means that failure to heed this safety statement may result in extensive product damage, serious personal injury, or death. Caution means that failure to heed this safety statement may result in minor or moderate personal injury, or property or equipment damage. All safety messages will alert you do what the potential hazard is, tell you how to reduce the chance of injury, and let you know what can happen if the instructions are not followed. IMPORTANT SAFEGUIDES Before the appliance is used, it must be properly positioned and installed as described in this manual, so read the manual carefully. To reduce the risk of fire, electrical shock or injury when using the appliance, follow basic precaution, including the following: · Plug into a grounded 3-prong outlet, do not remove grounding prong, do not use an adapter, and do not use an extension cord. · Replace all panels before operating. · It is recommended that a separate circuit, serving only your appliance be provided. Use receptacles that cannot be turned off by a switch or pull chain. Never clean appliance parts with flammable fluids. These fumes can create a fire hazard or explosion. And do not store or use gasoline or other flammable vapors and liquids in the vicinity of this or any other appliance. The fumes can create a fire hazard or explosion. · Before proceeding with cleaning and maintenance operations, make sure the power ~ine of the unit is disconnected. · Do not connect or disconnect the electric plug when your hands are wet. · Unplug the appliance or disconnect power before cleaning or servicing. Failure to do so can result in electrical shock or death. Do not attempt to repair or replace any part of your appliance unless it is specifically recommended in this material. All other servicing should be referred to a qualified technician. FOLLOW WARNING CALL OUTS BELOW ONLY WHEN APPLICABLE TO YOUR MODEL Use two or more people to move and install appliance. Failure to do so can result in back or other injury. · To ensure proper ventilation for your appliance, the front of the unit must be completely unobstructed. Choose a well-ventilated area with temperatures above 60°F (16°C) and below 90°F (32°C). This unit must be installed in an area protected from the element, such as wind, rain, water spray or drips. · The appliance should not'be located next to ovens, grills or other sources of high heat. · The appliance must be installed with all electrical connections in accordance with state and local codes. A standard electrical supply (116 V AC only, 60 Hz), properly grounded in accordance with the Natiooal Electrical Code and local codes and ordinances is required. Do not kink or pinch the power supply cord of appliance. The fuse (or circuit breaker) size should be 15 amperes. · It is important for the appliance to be leveled in order to work properly. You may need to make several adjustments to level it. · Never allow children to operate, play with or crawl inside the appliance. · Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents of abrasives on the interior. These cleaners may damage or discolor the interior. · Do not use this apparatus for other than its intended purpose. HELP US HELP YOU... Read this guide carefully. It is intended to help you operate and maintain your new Beverage Center properly. Keep it handy to answer your questions. If you don't understand something or you need more assistance, please call: Avanti Customer Service 800-220-5570 Write down the model and serial numbers. You'll find them on a plate located on the rear outside wall of the Beverage Center. Please write these numbers here: Date of Purchase Model Number Serial Number Keep proof of original purchase date (such as your sales slip) with this guide to establish the warranty period. CAUTION: THIS BEVERAGE CENTERIS NOT DESIGNEDFORTHE STORAGE OF MEDICINE OR OTHER MEDICAL PRODUCTS. Use these numbers in any correspondence or service calls concerning your Beverage Center. If you received a damaged Beverage Center, immediately contact the dealer (or builder) that sold you the Beverage Center. Save time and money. Before you call for service, check the Troubleshooting Guide. It lists causes of minor operating problems that you can correct yourself. IF YOU NEED SERVICE We're proud of our service and want you to be pleased. If for some reason you are not happy with the service you receive, here are some steps to follow for further assistance. FIRST, contact the people who serviced your Wine Chiller. Explain why you are not pleased. In most cases, this wild solve the problem. NEXT, if you are still not pleased, write all the details, including your telephone number, and send it to: Customer Service Avanti Products 10880 NW 30 Street Miami, FL 33172 USA PARTS & FEATURES BCA$102SS-1 1 Control Panel Housing 7 Security Lock 2 Control Panel 8 Bottom Grille 3 Interior Light 9 Leveling Legs (4) 4 Interior Fan 10 Cooling Vent 5 Beverage Shelf (1) 11 Stainless Steel Door Handle 6 Flat Shelves (2) 12 Stainless Steel Door BCA5105SG- 1 1 Control Panel 6 Flat Shelves (2) 2 Security Lock 7 Bottom Grille 3 Stainless Steel Door Frame 8 Leveling Legs (4) 4 Stainless Steel Door Handle 9 Cabinet 5 Beverage Shelf IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS .~/WARNING,~ To reduce the risk of fire, electrical shock, or injury when using your appliance, follow these basic precautions: · Read all instructions before using the Beverage Center. · DANGER or WARNING: Risk of child entrapment. Child entrapment and suffocation are not problems of the past. Junked or abandoned appliances are still dangerous.., even if they will "just sit in the garage a few days". · Before you throw away your old Beverage Center: Take off the door. Leave the shelves in place so that children may not easily climb inside. · Never allow children to operate, play with, or crawl inside the appliance. · Never clean appliance parts with flammable fluids. The fumes can create a fire hazard or explosion. · Do not store or use gasoline or any other flammable vapors and liquids in the vicinity of this or any other appliance. The fumes can create a fire hazard or explosion. -Save these instructions- INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE USING YOUR BEVERAGE CENTER · Remove the exterior and interior packing. · Check to be sure you have all of the following parts: 1 Beverage Shelf · 2 Flat Shelves · 2 Keys · 1 Stainless Steel Handle Assembly with 2 Screws, 2 Flat Washers and 2 Lock Washers · 1 Door Lower Hinge Bracket for Door Opening from the Right Side · 1 Instruction Manual · Before connecting the Beverage Center to the power source, let it stand upright for approximately 2 hours. This will reduce the possibility of a malfunction in the cooling system from handling during transportation. · Clean the interior surface with lukewarm water using a soft cloth. Install the handle on the left side of the door. INSTALLATION OF YOUR BEVERAGE CENTER · This appliance is designed to be for free standing installation or built-in (fully recessed). · Place your Beverage Center on a floor that is strong enough to support it when it is fully loaded. To level your Beverage Center, adjust the front leveling legs at the bottom of the Beverage Center. Locate the Beverage Center away from direct sunlight and sources of heat (stove, heater, radiator, etc.). Direct sunlight may affect the acrylic coating and heat sources may increase electrical consumption. Extreme cold ambient temperatures may also cause the unit not to perform properly. · Avoid locating the unit in moist areas. · Plug the Beverage Center into an exclusive, properly installed-grounded wall outlet. Do not under any circumstances cut or remove the third (ground) prong from the power cord. Any questions concerning power and/or grounding should be directed toward a certified electrician or an authorized Avanti Products service center. ELECTRICAL CONNECTION /~Warning/~ Improper use of the grounded plug can result in the risk of electrical shock. If the power cord is damaged, have it replaced by an authorized Avanti Products service center. This appliance should be properly grounded for your safety. The power cord of this appliance is equipped with a three-preng plug which mates with standard three prong wall outlets to minimize the possibility of electrical shock, Do not under any circumstances cut or remove the third ground prong from the power cord supplied. For personal safety, this appliance must be properly grounded. This appliance requires a standard 115/120 Volt AC -/60Hz electrical ground outlet with three-prong. Have the wall outlet and circuit checked by a qualified electrician to make sure the outlet is properly grounded. When a standard 2-preng wall outlet is encountered, it is your responsibility and obligation to have it replaced with a properly grounded 3-prong wall outlet. The cord should be secured behind the appliance and not left exposed or dangling to prevent accidental injury. The appliance should always be plugged into its own individual electrical outlet which has a voltage rating that matches the rating label on the appliance. This provides the best performance and also prevent overloading house wiring cimuits that could cause a fire hazard from overheated. Never unplug the appliance by pulling the power cord. Always grip the plug firmly and pull straight out from the receptacle. Repair or replace immediately all power cords that have become frayed or otherwise damaged. Do not use a cord that shows cracks or abrasion damage along its length or at either end. When moving the appliance, be careful not to damage the power cord. ~ EXTENSION CORD Because of potential safety hazards under certain conditions, it is strongly recommended that you do not use an extension cord with this appliance. However, if you must use an extension cord it is absolutely necessary that it be a UL/CUL-Listed, 3-wire grounding type appliance extension cord having a grounding type plug and outlet and that the electrical rating of the cord be 115 volts and at least 10 amperes. ~ REVERSING THE DOOR SWING OF YOUR APPLIANCF This appliance has the capability of the door opening from either the left or right side. The unit is delivered to you with the doer opening from the left side. Should you desire to reverse the opening direction, please call service for reversal instructions. INSTALLING STAINLESS STEEL HANDLE (MODEL BCA5105SG-1 ONLY) This wine cellar includes a stainless steel handle that is not required to operate this unit. To install the handle please follow the below instructions: For your convenience the screws used in the installation of the handle have been put in place at the factory. 1. Pull away the door gasket in the area where the handle is to be installed on the left side as shown below in Illustration # 1. The gasket is easily displaced by hand, no tools are necessary. 2. Align the handle with the screws installed. Tighten the screws using a Phillips head screwdriver until the handle sets both flush and secured tightly against the door frame. (DO NOT over tighten as this will cause damage to the handle assembly). 3. Replace the door gasket to its original position. 4. If you choose not to use the handle supplied, simply follow step 1 to access the installation screws and remove them and then place the two decorative plugs into the two holes separately. Continue on to step 3 to replace the door gasket to its original position. Illustration # 1 Gasket Phillips Head Screw Illustration # 2 Phillips Head Screw Driver Handle OPERATING YOUR BEVERAGE CENTER It is recommended you install the Beverage Center in a place where the ambient temperature is between 23°-26°C/72o-78oF. If the ambient temperature is above or below recommended temperatures, the performance of the unit may be affected. For example, placing your unit in extreme cold or hot conditions may cause interior temperatures to fluctuate. The range of 1°-6°C/34°-43OF may not be reached. BCA5102SS-1 ¢ BCA5105SG-1 You can select temperature display setting from Fahrenheit to Celsius degree by touching the °FI°C mark. Fahrenheit or Celsius degrees indicator will appear in blue color in the temperature display window. > ON/OFF POWER To turn OFF the appliance, touch the ON / OFF or (~) mark and hold for 2 seconds. ;~ Control Panel Lock (Model BCA5105SG-I ONLY). · Your Wine chiller is equipped with an automatic Control panel lock function. This function will prevent any unwanted changes to your temperature or power settings. ,, The lock function wilI activate automatically 12 seconds after the last time a button is pushed on the control panel. To unlock the control panel lock press and hold the (~l') and the {-,b) buttons for 3 seconds the control laanel will beep and blink once indicating that the control panel is active and the settings can be changed. SETTING THE TEMPERATURE CONTROl You can set the temperature as you desire by touching the UP or DOWN mark. When you touch the two marks for the first time, the LED readout will show the original temperature set at previous time (the temperature preset at the factory is 3°C/38°F). · The temperature that you desire to set will increase I°F or 1°C if you touch the UP mark once, on the contrary the temperature will decrease I°F or 1°C if you touch the DOWN mark once. · The temperature inside the unit will be appeared in blue color in the display window. NOTE: · If the unit is unplugged, power lost, or turned off, you must wait 3 to 5 minutes before restarting the unit. If you attempt to restart before this time delay, the Beverage Center will not start. · When you use the Beverage Center for the first time or restart the Beverage Center after having been shut off for a long time, there could be a few degrees variance between the temperature you select and the one indicated on the LED readout. This is normal and it is due to the length of the activation time. Once the Beverage Center is running for a few hours everything will be back to normal. 10 ~' INTERIOR LIGHT Model BCA5105SG-1: You can turn the interior light ON or OFF by touching the mark ~. The light will be turned off automatically if it remains ON for 10 minutes. You have to touch the mark ~ again and the light will turn back on. Model BCA5102SS-1: The interior light with be turned ON every time the door is opened and OFF once the door is closed. > DOOR LOCK Your unit is provided with a lock and key combination. The keys are located inside the plastic bag that contains the User's Guide. Insert the key into the lock and turn it counterclockwise to unlock the door. To lock the door do the reverse operation making sure metal pin is engaged completely. Remove the key and place it in a secure place for safekeeping. CARE AND MAINTENANCE ~- CLEANING YOUR BEVERAGE CENTER · Turn off the power, unplug the appliance, and remove all items including shelves. · Wash the inside surfaces with a warm water and baking soda solution. The solution should be about 2 tablespoons of baking soda to a quad of water. · Wash the shelves with a mild detergent solution. · Wring excess water out of the sponge or cloth when cleaning area of the controls, or any electrical parts. Wash the outside cabinet with warm water and mild liquid detergent. Rinse well and wipe dry with a clean soft cloth. · Do not use steel wool or steel brush on the stainless steel. These will contaminate the stainless steel with steel particles and rusting may occur. POWER FAILURE Most power failures are corrected within a few hours and should not affect the temperature of your appliance if you minimize the number of times the door is opened. If the power is going to be off for a Ion~]er period of time, you need to take the proper steps to protect your contents. MOVING YOUR BEVERAGE CENTER · Remove allitems. Securely tape down all loose items (shelves) inside your appliance. · Turn the adjustable leg up to the base to avoid damage. Tape the door shut. · Be sure the appliance stays secure in the upright position during transportation. Also protect outside of appliance with a blanket, or similar item. ENERGY SAVING TIPS The Beverage Center should be located in the coolest area of the room, away from heat producing appliances, and out of the direct sunlight. 11 PROBLEMS WITH YOUR BEVERAGE CENTER? You can solve many common Beverage Center problems easily, saving you the cost of a possible service call. Try the suggestions below to see if you can solve the problem before calling the servicer. TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE Beverage Center does not operate. Not plugged in. The appliance is turned off. The circuit breaker tripped or a blown fuse. Beverage Center is not cold enough. Check the temperature control setting. External environment may require a higher setting. The door is opened too often. The door is not closed completely. The door gasket does not seal properly. Turns on and off frequently. The room temperature is hotter than normal. A large amount of contents has been added to the Beverage Center. The door is opened too often. The door is not closed completely. The temperature control is not set correctly., The door gasket does not seal properly. The light does not work. Not plugged in. The circuit breaker tripped or a blown fuse. The light button is "OFF". Vibrations. Check to assure that the Beverage Center is level. The Beverage Center seems to make too much The rattling noise may come from the flow of the noise, refrigerant, which is normal. As each cycle ends, you may hear gurgling sounds caused by the flow of refrigerant in your Beverage Center. Contraction and expansion of the inside walls may cause popping and crackling noises. The Beverage Center is not level The door will not close properly. The Beverage Center is not level. The door was reversed and not properly installed. The gasket is dir[y. The shelves are out of position. 12 SERVICE FOR YOUR BEVERAGE CENTER We are proud of our customer service organization and the network of professional service technicians that provide service on your Avanti appliances. With the purchase of your Avanti appliance, you can have the confidence that if you ever need additional information or assistance, the Avanti Products Customer Service team will be here for you. Just call us toll-free. AVANTI PRODUCTS CUSTOMER SERVICES Product information Whatever your questions are about our products, 800-323-5029 help is available. Part Orders You may order parts and accessories that will be 800-220-5570 delivered directly to your home by personal check, money order, Master Card, or Visa. In-Home Repair Service An Avanti Products authorized service center will 800-220-5570 provide expert repair service, scheduled at a time that is convenient for you. Our trained servicers know your appliance inside and out. WIRING DIAGRAM PLUG CONTROL PCB 13 YOUR Avanti Products WARRANTY WHAT IS COVERED LIMITED ONE-YEAR WARRANTY For one year from the date of purchase by the original owner, Avanti Products wilt, at its option, repair or replace any part of the unit, which proves to be defective in material or workmanship under normal use. During this period Avanti Products will provide all parts and labor necessary to correct such defects free of charge, so long as the unit has been installed and operated in accordance with the written instructions in this manual Avanti Products will provide you with a reasonably similar replacement product that is either new or factory refurbished. In rental or commercial use, the warranty period is 90 days. All Avanti Appliances of 3.5 cubic feet capacity or less must be brought/sent to the appliance service shop for repair. Staple your sales receipt here. Proof of original purchase date is needed to obtain service under warranty. LIMITED SECOND THROUGH FIFTH YEAR WARRANTY For the second through the fifth year from date of original purchase, Avanti Products will provide a replacement compressor free of charge due to a failure. You are responsible for the service labor and freight charges. In rental or commercial use, the limited compressor warranty is one year and nine months. Cost to move the appliance to the servicers' shop and back to the user's home, as may be required, are the user's responsibility. WHAT IS NOT COVERED · Content losses of food or other, due to spoilage. · Incidental or consequential damages. Parts and labor costs for the following will not be considered as warranty: · Door springs, and/or frames. · Inner door panels, door rails and/or door supports. · Light bulbs and/or plastic housing. · Plastic cabinet liners. · Punctured evaporator that voids the warranty on the complete sealed system. · Repairs performed by unauthorized servicers. · Shipping and handling costs associated with the replacement of the unit. · Service calls that do not involve defects in material or workmanship such as customer education, door reversal, or proper installation. · Surcharges including, but not limited to, any after hour, weekend, or holiday service calls, tolls, ferry trip charges, or mileage expense for service call to remote areas, including the State of Alaska. Service calls that are related to external problems, such as abuse, misuse, inadequate electrical power, accidents, fire, floods, or acts of God. Replacement of house fuses or resetting circuit breakers. · Failure of the product if it is used for other than its intended purpose. · This warranty does not apply outside the Continental USA. 14 ATENCION INSTRUCCIONES PARA LA CONEXION A TIERRA Este aparato electrodombstico debe estar conectado a tierra. En caso de un cortocircuito el~ctrico, la conexibn a tierra reduce el riesgo de choque elbctrico proporcionando un cable a tierra con una enchufe de conexi0n a tierra. Este enchufe debe estar conectado en un tomacorriente instalado correctamente y conectado a tierra. ADVERTENClA - El uso inadecuado del enchufe de conexi0n a tierra puede resultar en un riesgo de choque el~ctrico. Consulte con un electricista o persona de reparaciones competente si no comprenden bien las instrucciones de conexibn a tierra o si existe alguna duda sobre si el aparato esta conectado a tierra correctamente. NO USE UN CORDON DE PROLONGACION ELECTRICA Use un tomacorriente de pared exclusivo. No conecte su vinera a cordones de prolongaci~n el6ctrica o junto a cualquier otto electrodom~stico en el mismo tomacorriente de pared. ADVERTENCIA IMPORTANTE: Una vinera vacia es una atraccibn muy peligrosa para los ni~os. Saque todas [as juntas, pestillos, tapas o puerta de todo electrodomestico que no estb en uso, o tome alguna medida para asegurar que no presente pe gro. INSTRUCCIONES DE INSTALACION Saque los embalajes exteriores, limpie bien el exterior con un paso suave seco, y el interior con un paso h0medo y tibio. Evite colocar la vinera ceroa de una fuente de calor, luz de sol directa, o lugar h~medo. UbicaciOn 1. Seleccione un lugar con su piso fuerte y nivelado. 2. Evite la luz directa del sol o calor. La luz directa del sol puede afectar la capa de acrilico. Las fuentes de calor en su proximidad provocar~n un consumo mayor de electricidad. OPERACION Para evitar vibraciones, el compadimiento interior debe estar bien nivelado. La temperatura variar~ dependiendo de la cantidad de botellas almacenadas y la frecuencia con que se abre la puerta. Cuando la vinera no se use por un periodo largo, desconecte el enchufe y deje la puerta entreabierta. Nota: Espere entre 3 a 5 minutos antes de volver a enceader si el funcionamiento ha sido interrumpido. Se recomienda que Ud coloque su vinera en un lugar donde la temperatura ambiental se mantenga entre 23-25 grados centigrados. Si la temperatura ambiental oscila afuera de esos limites, pueda afectar la temperatura de la caja. Por ejemplo, si su unidad est~ situada en lugares donde hay temperaturas muy frias o calientes tambi~n puede afectar la temperatura de la caja. 15 Para encender el electrodombstico, oprima el botOn marcado "ON OFF" o" ~)" para 2 segundos. Modelo: BCA5102SS-1 Modelo: BCA5105SG-1 0N~F ENCENDIDO/APAGADO Para apagar el refrigerador de vino, presione el botbn de 3 segundos. ~ ) y mant6ngalo presionado por un minimo PANEL DE CONTROL DE SEGURIDAD {Modelo BCA5105SG-1 Solamente) Su refrigeradora de vino est~ equipada con un Panel de Control de Seguridad de funci~n autom~tica. Esta funcibn previene cualquier cambio no deseado en el control de temperatura. · La funci0n de seguridad se activara autom~ticamente 12 segundos despu~s de la ~ltima vez que cualquier bot6n del Panel de Control sea presionado. · Para poder hacer cambios en el Panel de Control, presione y mantenga presionados los botones ('~) y (,J,) por 3 segundos, el Panel del Control emitir~ un sonido de "Beep" y parpadeara una vez, indicando que el Panel de Control ha sido activado y que puede efectuar cambios en los controles. Operaci(~n Oprima los botones marcado "/~ "y "~" Iocaliz, ado,,s e,n el ,p, anel de controles para programar la temperatura. Al presionar los botones marcados z~ o ~ por primera vez, el indicador en la pantalla mostrar~ la temperatura programada de f~brica o la m~s reciente. Oprima el bot0n marcado (z~) una vez y la temperatura aumentar~ un grado. Si Ud oprime el botOn mamado (~) una vez la temperatura bajar~ un grado. Luz interior Modelo: BCA5105SG-1 La luz interior se controla manualmente y no funciona al abrir ni cerrar la puerta. Para prender o apagar la luz, presione el boron marcado (~)',/~) de la luz ubicado en el panel de control. Si la luz esta prendida, por mas de 10 minutos, se apagara autom~ticamente Modelo: BCA5102SS-1. La luz inerior se controla autom~ticamente y funciona al abrir y cerrar la puerta. Cerradura de la puerta Su unidad viene equipada con una combinaci0n de cerradura y Ilave. Las Ilaves (2) est~n dentin de la bolsa pl~stica junto al manual de instrucciones. Introduzca la Ilave en la cerradura y girela hacia la izquierda para abrir la puerta. Para cerrarla, gire la Ilave hacia la derecha. Quite la Ilave y col<Squela en un lugar seguro para evitar que se pierda. 16 Desconflelaci6n Su refrigerador para vinos ha sido dise~ado con un sistema de descongelaciOn de "cicIo autom~tico". Las superficies refrigeradas del compartimiento para vinos se descongela autom~ticamente, durante el ciclo "apagado" del control de enfriamiento (termostato). El agua descongelada del compartimiento es eliminada autom~ticamente, encauzAndola hacia una bandeja de goteo ubicado en el compresor. La transferencia de calor del compresor evapora el agua. ADVERTENCIA Aseg0rese de tener la puerta abierta completamente se Ud desea remover las repisas o moverlas hacia adelante para extraer una botella. NOTA: Para remover las repisas corredizas, vacie las repisas antes de sacarlas. H~lelas aproximadamente un tercio hacia afuera basra que la marca en el rail se alinee con el poste pl~stico en ambos lados. Levante cada repisa y s~quela suavemente de la unidad. Para reemplazar de nuevo la repisa, repita los pasos anteriores en direcci0n opuesta. Limpieza Para limpiar el interior, use un paso suave con una soluciOn de una cucharada de bicarbonato de sodio por cada cuarto de agua, o una soluciOn de espuma de jabOn suave, o un detergente suave. Para lavar las rejillas, s~quelas desliz~ndolas con cuidado, y use una solucibn de detergente suave; luego s~quelas con un paso suave. Limpie el exterior con un paso hbmedo suave y un poco de detergente suave o productos de limpieza para electrodom(~sticos. Corte de corriente La mayoria de los cortes de corriente se corrigen en una o dos horas y no afectar~n las temperaturas de su vinera. Sin embargo, Ud. deber~ reducir la cantidad de veces que abra la pueda cuando la corriente estb apagada. Si Ud. se muda Saque o asegure todos los articulos dentro de su vinera. Para evitar que los tomillos nivelantes se averien, girelos completamente hacia la base. Algunas reglas importantes para el uso correcto de ta vinera. · Las bebidas se deben guardar en botellas cerradas. · No sobrecargue el compartimiento interior. · No abra la puerta a menos que sea necesario. · Si la vinera se guardara sin uso pot periodos largos, se sugiere que, luego de una limpieza cuidadosa, se deje la pueda entreabierta para permitir que et aire circule dentro de la caja y evitar una posible formacibn de condensaci0n, moho u olores. · Nunca cubra los estantes del compartimiento para vinos con papel de aluminio o cualquier otro material para cubrir estantes que puedan obstrair la circulacibn del aire. 17 18 REGISTRATION INFORMATION Thank you for purchasing this fine Avanti products. Please fill out this form and return it within 100 days of purchase and receive these important benefits to the following address: Avanti Products, A Division of The Mackle Co., Inc. P.O. Box 520604 - Miami, Florida 33152 USA Protect your product: We will keep the model number and date of purchase of your new Avanti Products product on file to help you refer to this information in the event of an insurance claim such as fire or theft. Promote better products: We value your input. Your responses will help us develop products designed to best meet your future needs. .......................................................... (detach here) .......................................................... Avanti Registration Form Name Model # Serial # Address Date Purchased Store/Dealer Name City State Zip Occupation As Your Primary Residence, Do You: Area Code Phone Number E]Own E}Rent Did You Purchase An Additional Warranty: [~Extended [3Food Loss ~]None Reason For Choosinq This Avanti Product: Please indicate the most important factors that influenced your decision to pumhase this product. E]Price I~Product Features I~Avanti Products Reputation E~Product Quality E3Salesperson Recommendation E~Friend/Relative Recommendation ~]Warrenty [~Other rqunder18 rq18-25 1~26-30 E331-35 [~36-50 [~over 50 Marital Status: [~Married [~Single Is This Product Used In The: E]Home [~Business How Did You Learn About This Product: [~Advertising [3In Store Demo [3Personal Demo E3Other Comments 19 PRINTED IN CHINA 2O NO. Code Part Name Qty. ! ~ )Gi2-22 2onnecting Tube ! 2 )G!3-! Drip Tray ! Door Reversal The door is 25Lbs. by itself, so get a friend to help. 1) Open the door. 2) Remove the two screws that hold the door to bottom hinge. 3) Remove door by pulling out and away from the top hinge. Set door aside for now. 4) Take out right lower hinge and replace it with left lower hinge that came in the bag with the accessories, apply parts on the opposite side. 5) Unscrew the upper hinge pin, remove it, and replace it on the opposite side. 6) On the door, you will see a plug on the right side take this plug out and insert it on the c side. 7) Turn the door over and remove the two screws that are on the left side. Save the 8) Install the door by positioning the top hinge pin into the bushing then putting the two screws in place on the bottom of the door. Some alignment might be necessary to make the door close properly. 9) Remove and replace the handle on the opposite side of the door. ge. corn Safety Information ........2, 3 Operating Instructions Care and Cleaning ........ 6-8 Control Settings ............ 4 Refrigerator Features ........ 5 Replacing the Light Bulb ..... 6 Installation Instructions ...9-11 Troubleshooting Tips ....12, 13 Consumer Support Consumer Support..Back Cover Warranty ................. 15 ATTENTION: Defrosting--Do not use sharp, pointed objects to remove frost or ice from surfaces of the freezer compartment. Doing so could puncture the cooling coil, causing the unit to lose its ability to maintain cold temperatures and voiding the warranty. See the Care anti Cleaning section for instructions on defrosting the freezer compartment. 2 Cubic Foot Models 3 Cubic Foot Models 4 Cubic Foot Models 6 Cubic Foot Models Write the model and serial numbers here: Model # Serial # Find these numbers on a label inside the refrigerator on the side wall. 16209639PO09 49~60439 11-05 JR GE App/iances GMRO6AAP - GE SpacemakerTM 6.0 Cu, Ft. Compact Refrigerator Dimensions (in inches) 34-1/8 Front View ~---23-5/8 >[ 24-1/4 Air Clearances O0 Each side (in.) 0t Top (in.) Back{in,) ~lf installed against a wall allow 1-1/4" on hinge side to allow proper door opening, Note: Freezer compartment is for short-term storage of frozen food. The frozen food compartment of this refrigerator will make ice, and pre-frozen foods can be stored for about two weeks. It will not effectively freeze fresh foods or provide long-term storage for meats, poultry, or fish. Accessories (available at additional cost): TPK6 (for black unit only) - Optional custom trim kit for wood panels only · Thickness - 3/32" or less · Width - 22-3/4" · Length - 29-1/2" Weight Limitation for custom panels is 5-lbs. max. Top View Specification Revised 9/04 310942 For answers to your Monogram,® GE ProfileTM or GE® appliance questions, visit our website at ge.corn or call GE Answer Center® service, 800.626.2000, GE Appliances GMR06AAP - GE Spacemaker'" 6.0 Cu. Ft. Compact Refrigerator Features and Benefits · Two Wire Cabinet Shelves (1 Adjustable) - Creates convenient food storage with two durable, easy-to-clean shelves · Two Mini Ice 'N Easy Trays - Release ice cubes with a quick twist · Two Fresh Food Door Shelves - Puts food within easy reach · Can Rack - Holds 12-ounce beverage cans · Built-In or Freestanding Capability - Offers installation flexibility · Color-Matched Visor Handles · Model GMRO6AAPWW - White on white · Model GMRO6AAPBB - Black on black Specification Revised 9/04 310942 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION READ ALL INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE USING. WARNING! Use this appliance only for its intended purpose as described in this Owner's ManuaL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS When using electrical appliances, basic safety precautions should be followed, including the following: This refrigerator must be properly installed and located in accordance with the Installation Instructions before it is used. Do not allow children to climb, stand or hang on the shelves in the refrigerator. They could damage the refrigerator and seriously injure themselves. Do not store or use gasoline or other flammable vapors and liquids in the vicinity of this or any other appliance. Before replacing a burned-out light bulb, the refrigerator should he unpluggedin order to avoid contact with a live wire filament. (A burned-out light bulb may break when being replaced.) Keep fingers out of the "pinch point" areas; clearances between the doors and cabinet are necessarily small. Be careful closing doors when children are YS the area. Unplug the refrigerator before cleaning and making repairs. NOTE: We strongly recommend that any servicing be performed by a qualified individual Turning the temperature control dial to the O££posifion stops cooling but does not shut off power to the refrigerator. ii, DANGER! RISK OF CHILD ENTRAPMENT PROPER DISPOSAL OF THE REFRIGERATOR 2 Child enwapment and suffocation are not problems of the pasL Junked or abandoned refrigerators are still dangerous... even ff they will sit for 'lust a few days." If you are getting rid of your old refrigerator, please follow the instructions below to help prevent accidents. Before You Throw Away Your Old Refrigerator or Freezec · Take off the doors. YS Leave the shelves in place so that children may not easily climb inside. Refrigerants All refrigeration products contain refrigerants, which under federal law must be removed prior to product disposal, ffyou are getting rid of an old refrigeration product, check with the company handling the disposal about what to do. §e. com USE OF EXTENSION CORDS Because of potential safe~/ hazards under certain conditions, we strongly recommend against the use of an extension cord. However, if you must use an extension cord, it is absolutely necessaxT that it be a Ublisted, :?,-wire grounding type appliance extension cord having a grounding type plug and outlet and that the electrical rating of the cord be 15 amperes (minimum) and 120 volts. HOW TO CONNECT ELECTRICITY Do not, under any circumstances, cut or remove the third (ground) prong from the power cord. For personal safety, this appfiance must be properly grounded. The power cord of this appliance is equipped with a 3-prong (grounding) plug which mates with a standard :?,-prong (grounding) wall outlet to minimize the possibility of electric shock hazard from this appliance. Have the wall outlet and circuit checked by a qualified electrician to make sure the outlet is properly grom~ded. If you have only a standard 2-prong wall outlet, it is your personal responsibility and obligation to have it replaced with a properly grounded 3-prong wall outlet. The refrigerator should always be plugged into its own individual electrical outlet which has a voltage rating that matches the rating plate. This provides the best performance and also prevents overloading house wiring circuits which could cause a fire hazard from overheated wires. Never unplug your refrigerator by pulling on the power cord. Always grip plug firmly and pull straight out from the outlet Repair or replace immediately all power cords that have become frayed or otherwise damaged. Do not use a cord that shows cracks or abrasion damage along its length or at either end. When moving the refrigerator away from the wall, be careful not to roll over or damage the power corel. READ AND FOLLOW THIS SAFETY INFORMATION CAREFULLY. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS About the control on the refrigerator. The control will look like one of the above. Control Settings The temperature control maintains the temperature in the refiigerator. Setdng the control at COO/. is the warmest setting. Setting the control at COIJl£$Tis the coldest setting. Set the control at CORD. Allow 24 hours for the refrigerator to reach the C0/-~ temperature. If you want a colder or warmer temperature, move the dial one setting at a dme. Moving the control to OFFstops cooling but does not turn off the power to the refrigerator. Setth~g the control to one of the snowflake positions may cause freezing in the refrigerator depending on file room temperature. How To Test Temperatures Use the milk test. Place a container of milk on a shelf and check it a day later. If the milk is too warm or too cold, adjust the temperature control. After changing the control, allow 24 hours for the refrigerator to reach the temperature you have set. 4 About the refrigerator features. Shelves To re~nove a shelf, lift up the back slightly and pull forward. Some models have multi-position shelves that can be moved to different levels. Ice Troy Compartment This compartment is designed for production of ice cubes and short-term storage (a few days at most) of some commercially- frozen foods when in contact with the evaporator (cold surface in compartrnent.) Door Shelves Shelves on the door provide convenient storage for frequendy used items. Some models have doors that are deep enough to store large bottles. Key-Ejecting Lock (on some mode/si Tbe key for the spring-loaded lock is automatically ejected-- key will not remain in lock in either the open or closed position. Keep the key out of reach of children and away/rom the refrigerator If a replacement key is needed, it can be ordered by visiting our Website lie. eom, or calling GE Parts and Accessories, 800.626.2002. Order part WR05X10006. 5 Care and cleaning of the refrigerator. Clean/n9 the Outside Keep the outside clean. Wipe with a clean cloth lightly dampened with kitchen appliance wax or mild liquid dish detergent. Dry and polish with a clean, soft cloth. Do not wipe the refrigerator with a soiled dish cloth or wet towel. These may leave a residue that can erode the paint Do not use scouring pads, powdered cleaners, bleach or cleaners containing bleach because these products can scratch and weaken the paint finish. Protect the paint finish. The finish on the outside of the refrigerator is a high quality, baked-on paint finish. With proper care, it will stay new-looking and rrrst-free for years. Apply a coat of kitchen appliance wax when the refrigerator is new, and then at least twice a year. Cleanin§ the Inside To help prevent odors, leave an open box of baking soda in the refrigerator. llnplu§ the refri§erator before cleanin§. If this is not practical, wring excess moisture out of sponge or cloth when cleaning around the control. Use warm water and baking soda solution-about a tablespoon (15 mi) of baking soda to a quart (1 liter) of water. This both cleans and neutralizes odors. Rinse and wipe dry. Other parts of the refrigerator-including door gaskets, fruit and vegetable drawers, and all plastic parts-can be cleaned the same way. Do not wash any plastic refrigerator parts in the dishwasher Replacin§ the Light Bulb (on some models) Unplug the refrigerator before replacing a burned-out bulb. Setting the controls to OFFdoes not remove power to the light circuit. The light bulb is located behind the temperature control housing and is visible through the slots in the housing. Reach up through the opening at the bottom of the control housing and gently unscrew the light bulb. Replace with a bulb of the same or lower wattage. §~com Defrosting (on push button defrost models only) Defrost whenever frost on the wall of the/ce tray compartment becomes 1/4" thick. To defrost. fr Remove foods and ice ways from the refrigerator and ice way compartment. fr Ensure drip way is below ice tray compartment to collect water. fr Push in the red "Defrost Button" located in the center of the temperature control dial. Defrost cycle will start immediately. NOTE: Turning the temperature control dial to the OFFposition is not required. Defrosting usually takes a few hours. When defrosting is complete, the red "Defrost Button" will release automatically. Then the refrigerator will resume nmxnal operation while moving towards the set telnperature. NOTE: After defrosting, allow a few hours to reach the set temperature before making any further adjustments. To defrost faster, keep the door open. Also, pouring warm (not hot) water on the frosted part may speed defrosting. D0 not use boiling water---it ~nay damage plastic parts. CAUTION: If you decide to "speed up" the defrost cycle by manually removing ice, NEVER use a sharp or metallic instrument to chip away the ice as it may damage the cooling coils. (^ punctured cooling coil will cause serious problems and void the warranty.) Do no use any electrical device in defrosting your refrigerator: After defrosting: fr After red "Defrost Button" has released, empty water from the drip tray. Wash the tray with warm water. DU, the drip tray completely. ~ Wipe the ice way compartment with a damp cloth. fr Return drip tray to below ice tray compartment. ~ Return food and ice trays to the refrigerator and close the door. IMPORTAfr~ If the red "Defrost Button" is pushed accidentally, it can not be manually released. The defrost cycle will run until complete. To speed up the defrost cycle, remove the drip tray and apply a warm damp cloth against the temperature sensing wire located on the underside of the ice way coinpartment. After several minutes, the heat from the warm cloth will raise the temperature of the thermostat, causing the defrost cycle to end and releasing the red "Defrost Button." The refrigex'ator will then resume normal operation. NOTE: If ice buildup is very thick, it may keep the ice tray compartment door from opening or closing completelg Don't try to force it open or closed; after defrosting, the door will open and close easil~ Care and cleanin§ of the reffi§erator. Oefrostin9 (on manual defrost models on/y) Defrost whenever frost on the wall of the/ce tray compartment becomes 1/4" th/~k. Never use a sharp or metallic instrument to remove frost as it may damage the cooling coils. (A punctured cooling cell will cause serious problems and void the warrant~) We recommend using a plastic scrape~ Do not use any electrical device in defrosting your refrigerator To defrost YS Remove foods and ice trays from file ice tray compartment. YS Set the temperature control dial at OFFposifion. YS On models without a drip tray, place a pan beneath the ice tray comparUnent to collect water: Defrosting usually takes a few hour's. To defrost faster, keep the door open. Also, pouring warm (not hot) water on tile frosted part may speed defrosting. 0o not use boiling water--it may damage plastic parts. After defrosting: YS Empty water from tile drip tray or from the pan placed beneath file ice tray compartment. Wash the tray or pan with warm water. YS Wipe the ice tray compan_ment with a damp cloth. YS Turn the temperature control to the desired setting and return food and ice trays to the refrigerator. NOTE: If ice buildup is ved/ thick, it may keep the ice tray compartment door from opening or closing completelg Don't tdz to force it open; after defrosting, the door will open and close easily Preparing for Vacation For long vacations or absences, remove food and unplug the refrigerator. Move the control to the O££posifion, and clean file interior with a baking soda solution of one tablespoon (15 ml) of baking soda to one quart (1 liter) ofwaten Leave the door open. Preparing to Move Secure all loose items such as shelves and ice trays by taping them securely in place to prevent damage. Be sure the refrigerator stays in an upright position daring moving. Preparing to instafl the refrigerator. ge. corn Read these instructions completely and carefully. Refrigerator Location to Do not install the refifigerator where the temperature will go below 50°F (10°C) because it will not mn often enough to maintain proper temperatures. to Install it on a floor sU'ong enough to support it fully loaded. to If the 9 cubic foot model is placed on a countertop or stand, the front surface of the door should be 3" or more back from the edge of the countertop or stand to avoid accidental tipping of the appliance during normal use. to Do not install it closer than 5" (15 cra) next to a range. The following applies only to the 2, 3 and 4 Cubic Foot Models: ?~' Do not install it in a recessed area. to Do not build in the refrigerator. Clearances Allow the following clearances for ease of installation and proper air circulation. Z 3 and 4 6 Cubic Foot Cubic Foot Models Model only Sides 1/9" (13 mm) 0' (0 mm)* Top 2' (51 mm) 0' (0 mm) Back 2' (51 mm)** O' (0 mm) *1-1/4" (32 mm) for hinge side clearance **From the rear cabinet surface to tire wall Turn counterclockwise to raise, clockwise to lower. tevelin9 Le§s (on some models) Adjustable legs at the front comers of the refi'igerator should be set so the refrigerator is firmly positioned on the floor and the front is raised just enough that the door closes easily when opened about halfway. To adjust the leveling legs, mm the le~ counterclockwise to raise the refiigerator, clockwise to lower iL 9 Preparing to instafl the refrigerator. Hinge cover .,,.~ Plug buttons ~ o~ Hinge Bottom hinge Leveling legs Door Reversal (on some models) l. Remove the small plug button on the left side of the door top cap. 9. Remove the three plug buttons or screws on the left side on top of the cabinet. 3. Remove the plastic hinge cover by lifting it up by the front edge. 4. Remove the three screws from the top hinge. 5. Lift the door up and off the bottom hinge (right side). 6. Tilt the refrigerator cabinet back to remove the fight leveling leg. 7. Remove the screws on the bottom hinge (fight side) and the left leveling leg. Move the bottom hinge to the left side and secure it with the screws and leveling leg. IMPORTANT: The left leg has a spacer that must be moved to the right side leveling leg when the door swing is reversed. 8. Screw the right leveling leg, with the spacer in place, back in place on the right side. 9. Position the door on the left bottom hinge. With the magnetic gasket holding the door in place, secure the top hinge with screws. 10, Make sure the door is aligned vvith the refrigerator cabinet/~efore continuin§. Il. Replace the hinge cover on top of the hinge. 19. Put the plug button in the hole on the right side of the door cap. 13. Put the three plug buttons or screws on the fight side on top of the cabinet. l0 Left~ ~ ~. Top ~ ~ plate Door top cap ES, COrn Door Reversal (on some mode/s) 4 Cubic Foot Models 1. Remove the two screws at the back of the top cover. 2. Remove the top cover by lifting the back up about 2" and then sliding it forward. 3. Remove the small plug button on the left side of the door top cap. 4. Remove the three screws on the upper hinge (right side). Remove the hinge. 5. Remove the three screws at the left hinge location on the top plate. 6. Remove the screw in the middle of the top plate and remove the top plate. 7. Lift the door up and off the bottom hinge (right side). 8. Tilt the refrigerator cabinet back to remove the right leveling leg. 9. Remove the screws on the bottom hinge (right side) and the left leveling leg. Move the bottom hinge to the left side and secure it with the screws and leveling leg. IMPORTAtVE: The left leg has a spacer that must be moved to the right side levering leg when the door swing/s reversed. 10. Screw the right leveling leg, with the spacer in place, back in place on the right side. 11. Position the door on the left bottom hinge. With the magnetic gasket holding the door in place, secure the top hinge with screws. 12. Make sure the door is aligned with the refrigerator cabinet before continuing. 13. Replace the top plate and screws. 14. Slide the top cover back in place and replace the two screws. 15. Put the plug button in the hole on the right side of the door top cap. Before you call for service... Troubleshooting 77ps Save time and money! Review the chart below first and you may not need to call for service. Possible Causes What To Do not Control in OFFpo~4tion. ~ Move the control to a temperature setting. Refrigerator is * Push the plug completely unplugged, into the oudeL The fuse is blown/circuit * Replace fuse or reset breaker is tripped, the breaker. Red defrost button was pushed accidendy (on push button models). See IMPORTANT: text in Defrosting under Care and Cleaning. /2 Front leveling legs ~ See Leveling Legs. (on some models) need adjusting. !~O00r Will not open Refrigerator is on an uneven surface. Use shims to level the refrigerator. Normal when refrigerator * Wait 24 hours for the is fwst plugged in. refrigerator to completely cool down. Often occurs when * This is normal. large amounts of food are placed in refrigerator. Door left open. · Check to see if package is holding door open. Hot weather or frequent * This is normal. door openings. Temperature control ~ See About the control. set at the coldest setting. Not enough clearance * See Clearances in Preparing from the waft. to install the rofrigerator. Refrigerator is locked (lock is available on some models). Unlock the door with the key. If the key has been lost, a replacement key can be ordered by visiting our Website ge. coIl~, or calling GE Parts and Accessories, 800.626.2002. Order part WR05X10006. ge. corn Troubleshooting .tips Possible Causes What To Do Temperature contrnl * See About the control. not set cold enough. Warm weather or * Set the temperature frequent door openings, control one step colder. See About the control. Door left open. * Check to see if package is holding door open. Cabinet sides are warm ~ This is normal for a hot (applies only to 9, 3 and wall type condenser. 4 Cubic Foot Models). Red defrost button was * See IMPORTANT: text in pushed accidentally Defrosting under Care and (on push button models). Cleaning. Foods transmitting odor * Foods with strong odors to refrigerator, should be dghdy wrapped. · Keep an open box of baking soda in the refrigerator; replace every three months. Interior needs deaning. · See Care and cleaning. Defrost water pan needs cleaning. · See Care and cleaning. Not unusual during * Wipe surface dry. periods of high humidity. Too frequent or too long door openings. Temperature control set too cold. See About the control 13 Refrigerator Warranty. (For customers in the United States) All warranty service provided by our Factory Service Centers, or an authorized Customer Care® technician. To schedule service, on-line, 24 hours a day, visit us at ge. corn, or call 800. GE. CARES. Please have serial and model numbers available when calling for service. Staple your receipt here. Proof of the original purchase date is needed to obtain service under the warranty. GE Will Rep/ace: Anypart of the refrigerator which fails due to a defect in materials or workmanship. During Otis limited one-year warranty, GE will also provide,/tee of charge, all labor and related service costs to replace the defective part. Service adps to your home to teach you how to use the product. Improper installation, delivery or maintenance. Failure of the product if it is abused, misused, or used for other than the intended purpose or used commercially. Loss of food due to spoilage. Damage caused after delivery. Replacement of house fuses or resetting of drcuit breakers. Replacement of the light bulbs. Damage to the product caused by accident, fire, floods or acts of God. Inddental or consequential damage caused by possible defects with this appliance. Prodnct not accessibl~ to provide required service. EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES--Your sole and exclusive remedy is product repair as provided in this Limited Warranty. Any implied warranties, inc/udin9 the implied warranties of merabantaM/ity or fitness for a particular purpose, are limited to one year or the shortest period allowed by/aw. This warranty is extended to the original purchaser and any succeeding owner for products purchased for home use within the USA. If the product is located in an area where service by a GE Authorized Servicer is not available, you may be responsible for a trip charge or you may be required to bring the product to an Authorized GE Service location for service. In Alaska, the warranty excludes the cost of shipping or service calls to your home. Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state. To know what your legal rights are, consult your local or state consumer affairs office or your state's Attorney General Warrantoc General Electric Company. Louisville, KY 40225 /5 .Consumer Support. GE Appliances Website ge. coIR Have a question or need assistm~ce with your appliance? Try, the GE Appliances Website 24 hours a day, any da),' of the year! For gq-eater convenience arid ~faster seiMce, you can now dovmload Owner's Manuals, order parts, catalogs, or even schedule ser~4ce ou-Iine. You can also "Ask Our Team of Exper[s~"'' your questions, and so much more... Schedule Service Expert G[ repair service is only one step away frnm your door: Get on-line and schedule your serwce at your convenience 24 hours any day of the year! Or call 800.GE.CARES (800.432.2737) during normal business hours. Real Life Design Studio ge. corn GE supports the Universal Design concept-products, services and environments that can be used by people of all ages, sizes and capabilities. We recognize the need to design for a wide range of physical and mental abilities and impairments. For details of GE's Universal Design applications, including kitchen design ideas for people with disabilities, check out our Website today. For the hearing impaired, please cai1 800.TDD.GEAC (800.833.4322). Extended Warranties §~com Purchase a GE extended warranty and learn about special discounts that are available while your wanm~ty is still in effect. You can purchase it on-line anytime, or call 800.626.2224 during normal business hours. GE Consumer Home Services will still be there after your warranty expires. Parts and Accessories Individuals qualified to service their own appliances can have parts or accessories sent direcdy to their homes (VISA, MasterCard and Discover cards are accepted). Order on-line today, 24 hours every day or by phone at 800.626.2002 during normal business hours. Instructions contained in this manual cover procedures to be performed by any user. Other servicing generally should be referred to qualified service personnel. Caution must be exerorsed, since improper servicing may cause unsafe operation. Contact Us ge. cam If you are not satisfied with the service you receive from GE, contact us on our Website with all the details including your phone number, or write to: General Mmlager, Customer Relations GE Appliances, Appliance Park Louisville, KY 40225 Register Your Appliance R~ter your new appliance on-li~, e~a. t your convenience! Timely product registration wdl allow for enhanced communlcauon and prompt service under the terms of your warranty, should the need arise. You may also mail in the pre-printed reghtra~on card included in the packing material. Printed in China INSTALLATION MANUAL Manufactured by AQUA-AIR MANUFACTURING 542 W. Confluence Ave., Salt Lake City, Utah 84123 (801) 265-9699 or (800) 916-5777 FAX (801) 268-3856 Planning your Built-in Total Cleaning System Locate the Power Unit in an area where it is protected from freezing. Also required are electrical power, hot and cold water and a sanitary drain. Allow access to the power unit to service and change internal debris screen. Vacuum Inlets for commercial and residential applications are usually located on inside walls, in hallways or at the bottom of stairs. Install sufficient valves to reach and clean every corner, closet and stairway while allowing for furniture and equipment placement. A variety of Inlet Valves are available for in-wall installation as well as a "vacuum inlet / water outlet" for mounting on the surface. Approximately one inlet is needed for every 700 - 800 sq. ' (60-70 sq. m.) Vacuum Tubing and Fittings connect the Vacuum Inlets to the Vacuum Power Unit. The Tubing System is routed either up to an attic or pipe chase, or down to the lower level or basement. Hot Water Outlets may be provided under a sink or near another hot water source or piped directly to a Water Outlet located adjacent to the Vacuum Inlet. Installation Kits are available to connect to Hot Water Valves under a sink or for Water Outlets in the wall to match adjacent Vacuum Inlets. Inline Cleaning Chemical Injectors can be used to provide cleaning solution to be used as a pre-spray or as a rinse. Automobile Interior Cleaning Systems are installed with the Power Unit located in or near the Cleaning Bays or in an adjacent Equipment Room. Cleaning Stations are located either in or between each bay. Use either an Aqua-Air automobile cleaning station or In-wall vacuum inlet, water and pre-spray outlets. Vacuum Hoses for dry only and wet/dry cleaning with water line, are available in lengths from 25' to 50'. It is desirable to design a system to use shorter hoses. The use of shorter hose length gives the user more efficient system and one that is easier to use and store. AQUA-AIR Wet/Dry Installation Components Vacuum Inlet / Water Outlet In-Wall Mounting Kit Includes (2) Mounting Plates, Water Outlet with Quick Disconnect, Hayden Vacuum Inlet with rust resistant pins and screws and Matching Water Outlet cover · AA134 Hayden Almond Inlet Outlet In-Wall Kit · AA'I35 Hayden White Inlet Outlet In-Wall Kit · AA136 Hayden Ivory Inlet Outlet In-Wall Kit Water Outlet Covers Matches the Hayden Vacuum Inlets · AA156Hayden Almond · AA152Hayden White · AA151 Hayden Ivory Water Outlets (in-Wall) · Includes Mounting Disconnect, AA141 Plate, Water Outlet with Quick Water Outlet Vacuum Inlet / Water Outlet Surface Mounting Kit with on/off Switch Vacuum Inlet, Water Outlet with Quick Disconnect and on/off switch in a 3.5" x 3.5" xl 1" Box to mount on wall surface. · AA131 Inlet/Outlet surface mount with switch Under-Sink Water Outlet with Quick Disconnect Kit Includes 3/8"C x 3/8"C x 1/4"C Tee, 1/4" hose Disconnect · AA102K · AA103K · AA104K Outlet Kit with 6' hose Outlet Kit with 10' hose Outlet Kit with 20' hose and Quick Auto Detail Cleaning Station Part #AA124 Complete Cleaning Station including vacuum inlet, water outlet with quick disconnect, pre-spray cleaning solution outlet with quick disconnect, on/off switch and vacuum and pre-spray hose hangers. 2 AQUA-AIR Wet/Dry Model AA-130/150 Back-flow Preventer 90 degree ell with 2" metal end Water solenoid V~nlCUUm take tank Ifloat connect to cold water T exhaust to outside mounting board Flapper valve 1-1/2" DWV pipe extends inside 2" drain to allow waste bucket to drop down 6" ~ (2" coupling on top) 2" DWV to Drain 3 Models AA-130 and AA-I$0 LOCATE the POWER UNIT: in an area where it is protected from freezing. Before installation, assure that there is sufficient height 84" (2m), electrical power (20 amp.[15 amp. Cdn.] 120 VAC), hot and cold water and a sanitary drain. Allow access to service and change debris screen. P3WER UNIT MOUNTING BOARD: (included in shipping box) should be firmly attached to the wall. From the top center of the Mounting Board allow 10" (260 mm) from the ceiling, 18" (460mm) on each side and 67" (1700mm) down to the drain. EXHAUST: Insert the 90-degree street ell with metal end (included) in Power Unit vacuum motor exhaust. The Exhaust Air should be vented to the outside using as direct a route as possible. DRAIN to SANITARY SEWER: The Power Unit should be drained into a 2" DVVV Stand Pipe connected via a P-trap to the sanitary sewer. Using Teflon tape or sealant on threads, thread the 1-1/2" ABS adapter into the bottom (Do Not Over Tighten) Mount the FLAPPER (check) VALVE at a 45-degree angle using the 1- 1/2" 45 degree spigot-elbow provided. Connect via another 1-1/2" 45 degree elbow to a 12" (300mm) piece of 1-1/2" DWV pipe extending down inside the 2"DVVV Stand Pipe. Allow the Waste Tank to drop 6" (150mm) to service waste tank debris screen. Water Spray Solenoid and Backflow Preventer: (Located on left side of Power Unit) Connect to cold water faucet using fittings and 1/4"ID hose supplied. Unit is equipped with Watts N388 Anti-Siphon Vacuum Breaker. ADJUSTING the WATER SPRAY: The Volume of Cold Water sprayed into the Waste tank can be adjusted by the turning the handle of the needle valve located below the Solenoid clockwise to decrease flow. By lowering the waste tank and starting the Power Unit the flow can be metered by placing a 4 cup (1 h) measure under the cone to catch the water. Adjust to receive 9 cups (2 I.) per minute. 4 AQUA-AIR Wet/Dry Model AA-250 to vacuum inlets 18/2 or 20~2 wire to vacuum inlets Mounting Boards Connect Power Head to -- Separation Tank using DVVV (plumbing) pipe and fittings (not supplied) 45 degree street ell with metal ell 90 degree street ell 90 deg ell 1-1/2" D~rop ~ pipe extends inside 2 "drain to allow waste bucket ,t,o d d°wn iI Exhaust to outside Flapper Valve 2" DWV pipe to drain LOCATE the POWER UNIT in an area where it is protected from freezing. Before installation, assure that there is sufficient height 84" (2.1m), electrical power (2 x 20 amp. [15 amp. CDN.] 120 VAC), hot and cold water as well as a sanitary drain. Allow access to service and change debris screen. 5 MOUNTING BOARDS: (included in shipping box) should be firmly attached to the wall. Power Head may be mounted adjacent to Separation Tank or at another convenient location. To mount side by side, from the top center of the Mounting Boards allow 24" (610 mm) between boards, 10" (260 mm) from the ceiling on the Power Unit and 1" (2.5 mm) on the separator tank, 18" (460mm) on each side and 67" (1450mm) down to the drain. EXHAUST: The Exhaust Air should be Insert the metal end of the 45-degree elbow (included) directed towards the back into the upper motor exhaust. Use a 90-degree street ell and muffler either up or down. Insert the metal end of the 90-degree elbow (included) into the lower motor exhaust. Attach muffler and vent to the outside using as direct a route as possible. DRAIN to SANITARY SEWER: The Power Unit should be drained into a 2" DVVV Stand Pipe connected via a P-trap to the sanitary sewer. Using Teflon tape or sealant on threads, thread the 1-1/2" ABS adapter into the bottom of the Power Unit. (Do Not Over Tighten) Mount the FLAPPER (check) VALVE at a 45-degree angle toward the wall using the 1-1/2" 45 degree spigot elbow provided. Connect via another 1-1/2" 45 degree elbow to a 12" (300mm) piece of 1-1/2" DVVV pipe extending down inside the 2"DVVV Stand Pipe. Allow the Waste Tank to drop 6" (150mm) to service waste tank debris screen. WATER SPRAY SOLENOID: (Located on left side of Power Unit) Connect from cold water faucet to the bottom hose barb on the solenoid using fittings and 1/4"1D Water Hose supplied. Run hose from the top of the solenoid to the inlet of the back-flow preventer on the separation tank mounting board. Connect back- flow outlet to hose barb on the Separation tank inlet. ADJUSTING the WATER SPRAY: The Volume of Cold Water sprayed into the Waste tank can be adjusted by the turning the handle of the needle valve located below the Solenoid clockwise to decrease flow. By lowering the waste tank and starting the Power Unit the flow can be metered by placing a 4 cup (1 I.) measure under the cone to catch the water. Adjust to receive 9 cups (2 I.) per minute. In-Wall Vacuum Inlets and Water Outlets Rough-in to under-floor trunk line Rough-into overhead trunk line. Vacuum Inlet - Use 2" O.D. PVC Vacuum Tubing and Fittings. · Nail or screw mounting plate (PA131 or for 2"x3" walls PA132) to stud, preferably at same height as the electrical plugs. · Glue (using PVC glue) a Short 90degree elbow (PA089) to the mounting plate (elbow pointing down), · For under-floor trunk line glue vacuum tubing (PA046) into elbow and extend through floor plate to trunk line. · For overhead trunk line glue (2) 90degree sweep spigot elbows (PA092) into each other then into short 90degree elbow on the mounting plate. Extend tubing up through top plate to trunk line. 18/2 or 20/2 Iow voltage control wire. · Run wire through upper opening on the mounting plate and attach to the vacuum tubing with tie straps. Splice wires at Vacuum Tee or home run each line. Water Outlet · Assemble the Water Outlet by gluing quick disconnect to the back of the mounting plate. Note: direct the elbow on the quick disconnect up for trunk lines under the floor and down for overhead trunk lines. This allows for the tubing to be looped to allow for later servicing of the quick disconnect. · Connect the water line to the fitting on the back of the quick disconnect and secure water line to vacuum tubing or stud leaving the loop free to move. 7 Installation of the Vacuum Tubing ~.~"high point" Down from vacuuminlet 1"- 2"to 10' tUp from vacuum inlet run absolutely plumb or on slope down The tubing system is muted either up to an attic or pipe chase, or down to the lower level or basement. Vertical Branch lines must reach a "high point" immediately above or as close as possible to the vertical line and enter the trunk line from above or on a slope. This is to avoid "drain-back" from the trunk line overfilling the P-trap at the inlet valve. The trunk line should be firmly supported absolutely plumb or at a slope down to the unit. Drop the trunk line down 1-1/2" before each tee to stop the water from running back up the line. When a vacuum inlet is installed on the same er lower floor level than the Power Unit, it is preferable to run the tubing up to a high point above the inlet and down to the Power Unit. Where impossible or impractical to drop the line down before each tee, a trap ("speed bump") may be installed before the tee. ~ Note: Care should be taken that the system is regularly rinsed with water when the following situations exist: · When it is impossible or impractical to run the line to a high point and then down to the Power Unit · If the lines are run "plumb" without a drop down before each tee or a trap (speed bump) has been installed in the lines. 2/18 or 2~20 Iow voltage control wire. · Splice wires at Vacuum Tee or home run each line. · Attach to the vacuum tubing with tie straps. · Connect to Power Unit 8 To Retrofit an Existing Home or Business Most buildings can be retrofitted with an Aqua-Air Wet/Dry Cleaning System. Determine that the following exists: 1. A location for the Power Unit with drain, water and electricity. 2. Areas in, on or behind walls that the piping could be run to convenient locations for Vacuum Inlets. 3. Vacuum Tubing can be run from these Inlet locations to the Power Unit through either the attic, a chase, a basement or on the surface of walls in the case of commercial or storage areas. Vacuum Inlets can be installed in a hollow wall where the depth of the hollow space is 3-1/2" or greater. The wall must be accessible from above, below of through a closet or chase from behind. NOTE: In-Wall Water Outlets (See page 8 and 10) should be installed at the same time as the Vacuum Inlets. When running the tubing up from under the floor: Drill 2-1/2" or larger hole directly under the Inlet. After drilling, check to see that the space is unobstructed · Using a Mounting Plate as a template mark and cut a hole, the same height as electrical plugs, in the drywall or wallboard. · Remove the side flange of a Mounting Plate and glue on a short bend 90-degree elbow facing down. The control wire should be secured to and come out of the top space in the mounting plate. · Connect the wire to the two screws on the Vacuum Inlet and install the inlet valve (electrical contacts on the top). Measure and install the vacuum tubing from below the floor. When running the tubing down from above: Drill a 2-1/2" or larger hole through the top plates at the center of the hollow space between the studs. After drilling check to see that the space is unobstructed. Drop the electrical control wire down from the top. · Using a Mounting Plate as a template mark and cut a hole 4" to the left the hole drilled in the top plate and the same height as electrical plugs, in the drywall or wallboard. · Remove the side flange of a Mounting Plate and glue a short bend 90-degree elbow facing down. Glue a medium spigot ell into a second medium spigot ell. Glue the ells into the short 90 ell extending to the left. · Secure the control wires to the inside of the medium 90 ell and extend out of the top space in the mounting plate. Insert the mounting plate and ells into the wall. Connect the wire to the vacuum inlet and install the inlet valve (electrical contacts on the top). Measure the vacuum tubing and after gluing outside of the tubing and holding the control wire from above, twist tubing into ell. 9 · When installing the tubing behind the wall: Use a Mounting Plate as a template, mark and cut hole in the drywall. Drill a 2-1/4 hole (centered on first hole) through the back wall. · Remove the side flange of a Mounting Plate and glue a coupling to the mounting plate. Connect the control wire to the Vacuum Inlet and install the inlet valve (electrical contacts on the top). · Measure and glue a length of pipe to the coupling and install short bend 90-degree elbow. Complete the tubing for the system. (See Page 11 -- Installation of the Vacuum Tubing to complete the cleaning system) In-Wall Water Outlets: (Locate adjacent to the Vacuum Inlet) · Using a Mounting Plate as a template mark and cut a hole 6 or more to the left or 7" or more above the Vacuum Inlet. (Be consistent) · Use 3/8 ID or 1/2 ID PEX (or other approved) tubing for the water lines. Drill hole for the water line in top or bottom plate to the left side of the hollow space. · To allow for service of the water outlet, loop the tubing above the outlet when coming up from below, or below the outlet when coming down from the top. (See illustration page 8) · Using Water Outlet components (part # AA141 or from Kits #AA134 - 36), remove flange from the side of the mounting plate. (Use the mounting plate that has the 5/16 (9mm) spacer ring on inlet) · For 1/2 (13mm) thick walls glue quick disconnect cap assembly to the mounting plate using the 5/16 (9mm) spacer ring. Adjust for thicker walls. · Pull the water tubing out through the hole in the wall and connect to the tubing to 1/2 MPT swivel adapter. Attach tubing adapter to mounting plate assembly. · Slide the tubing and mounting bracket back into the wall and then pull back to fit snug in the hole. Attach the AQUA-AIR Wet/Dry water outlet covers (AA151 -- AA156) to match the vacuum inlet valves being used. NOTE: The In-wall water outlets terminate with MPT to accommodate the use of a _ MPT swivel adapter.. By removing the _ x _ MPT hex nipple, connection to the tubing can be made with a tubing adapter that terminates in _ MPT. 10 Automobile Interior Cleaning System Installation 2" O.D. central vacuum tubing and fittings 2118 or 2~20 control wire From additional Cleaning Stations To Power Unit Vacuum hose hanger Hot Water line Water Taps Hot Cold ._..T o Power Pre-spray line Pre-spray outlet Pre-spray hose hanger Automobile Detail Cleaning Station Part # AA124 Chemical Injector Part # AA031 or #AA033 11 Under-Sink Water Outlet Installation Determine Type of Water Lines: The hot water supply to a kitchen or vanity sink is usually by one of the following methods: A. The standard supply valve which connects onto household plumbing and adapts to a 3/8" copper of plastic tube riser. B. 3/8" or 1/2" Poly-B or PEX tubing Install an Under-Sink Water Outlet on standard supply valve. Use an Under-Sink Adapter Kit Part #s AA102K[6'], AA103K[10'] or AA104K [20'] a. Turn off hot water valve and remove supply tube from valve b. Install 3-Way adapter on valve and tighten nut c. Cut upper supply tube to length and connect to 3~Way adapter. (It is recommended that you replace this supply tube, thus assuring a good seaL) d. Strap hose to cabinet or wall to supply strain relief for 3-Way valve. Use a small hose rack for longer lengths of hose. Install an Under-Sink Water Outlet on PEX or Poly-B tubing Obtain from a plumbing supply the appropriate tee, valve and adapters to 1/8"female pipe thread. a. Turn off hot water valve and remove supply tube from valve b. Install tee, valve and adapters to 1/8" female pipe thread. c. Connect braid hose Part #'s AA10216'], AA103110'] or AA104 [20']. Use 2.(Part # BR122) brass 1/4" mpt x 1/4" ferule adapters on each end of the braid hose. d. Connect adapter hose 1/8'~ female adapter Installed in (b) above. e. Install female 1/8" disconnect on other end of hose and secure hose 12 PA046 PA088 PA089 PA090 PAO91 PA092 PA093 PA094 PA095 PA087 PA096 PA097 PA098 PA045 PA086 PA131 PA132 PA140 PA134 PA135 PA 136 PA137 PA099 PA100 PA101 PA138 PA138R PA139 PA139R PA141 PA141R PA142 Vacuum Tubing and Fittings Pipe Vacuum 2" OD Ell 90 degree short socket Ell 90 degree Short Ell 90 degree Medium Spigot Ell 90 degree Sweep Ell 90 degree Sweep Spigot Ell 45 degree Ell 45 degree Spigot Ell 45 degree Spigot Grey Tee 90 degree Wye 45 degree Coupling Stop Inlet Valve Extension Muffler Round Muffler Square Mounting Plate 2x4 Mounting plate 2x3 Plaster Guard Hayden Coupling reducing 2" x 1.63 Grey Pipe Strap 2" Pipe Strap 2-1/4" Pipe Cap Inlet Valve VacuValve Ivory Inlet Valve VacuValve White Inlet Valve VacuValve Black Inlet Valve Hayden White Inlet Valve Hayden White Rust Resistant Inlet Valve Hayden Ivory Inlet Valve Hayden Ivory Rust Resistant Inlet Valve Hayden Almond Inlet Valve Hayden Almond Rust Resistant Inlet Valve Hayden Metal Antique Brass 13 Cleaning Solution Injector AA031 (water flow adjustable) with bypass Use this injector for commercial application where water flow adjustment is required for large floor tools or bypass is required. AA033 (adjustable for dilution rate) Use this injector for automobile interior cleaning pre-spray. Locate the Injector adjacent to the Power Unit or a Hot Water Faucet. · Attach Injector Box to wall using (6) pan head screws. · Connect to Hot Water faucet using kit supplied. (10'of 3/8" hose and faucet adapter) · Connect the water tubing from the in-wall outlets or pre-spray outlets to the Pre-Spray/Rinse outlet on the top of the Injector Box. · For Automobile Interior Cleaning remove the brass plug on the left side of the injector box and connect to the tubing from the water outlet on the automobile cleaning station. (See illustration on page 7) Vacuum Inlet / Water Outlet Surface #AA131 · Remove Vacuum Inlet cover by removing the two screws. · Remove front cover from Inlet/Outlet Box by prying gently with a flat blade screwdriver at each of the (8) tab locations. Pull down to allow the brass pipe and fittings to slide through top cap and towards you and completely remove cover. · Securely mount the box to a flat surface with four screws. Run the control wire in through the small hole behind the brass pipe leaving 3" slack inside box. Connect ends to the switch. To control the Motor through the inlet valve run one wire direct to the valve, the other to the switch and a jumper wire to the other contacts. · Replace the cover and snap into place over tabs. Install Vacuum Inlet using the (2) #10 x 1" Screws Provided. · You are now ready to connect the vacuum tubing, water line and control wire to the box. Auto Detail Cleaning Station Part #AA124 · To open cover, remove the Valve Inlet by removing the (2) screws. Pull on the right side open to open the front cover. · Attach the box firmly to the wall with fiat screws through the back. · Run the control wire from the switch on each station to the Power Unit. Close the cover and reinstall the vacuum inlet. · To run the vacuum tubing up to an over-head trunk line, glue a 90 degree sweep spigot elbow into the coupling on the bottom of the cleaning station. Run the tubing to the side and up to trunk line. · Run pre-spray line from the left brass fitting on the top of each station to the pre-spray outlet on the injector and water line from the right fitting to the water outlet on the injector. 14 IMPORTANT This information included in this Installation Manual is intended to be of assistance in the Installation of the AQUA-AIR Wet/Dry Built-in Total Cleaning Systems. Each jurisdiction may have specific codes and regulations with regard to appliances that are installed in buildings and connected to their water and drain systems. It is your responsibility to verify local codes as regards to equipment and qualification of trades-persons used in the installation of these systems. AQUA-AIR Manufacturing does not warranty the installation or the materials used in installation of these systems. Under-Sink Water Outlet Installatlon: Stepi: Locate hot water supplY line and valve under sink, Turn off valve Step 2: Using the proper tools remove the si~ supply mbe&ose from the valve; Step 3: Connect the 3-way adapter and outlet hose to the valve. Step 4: , . R.e~n~t the s~p~ sup~ p~.tub~ho~ to me lop or me aaapter. Slep 5: Tighten all fittings, do not over-lighten, Turn on the valve and check for leaks~ Using the hook mad screw provided attach ~h¢ solu!ioU hose rathe cabinet to provide strain relief fi3r the 3~way a~pmn Step 7: Attach hase hanger m eabi~t or leave ho~ coiled on cabinet floor, Faucet Adapter Installation Instructions: Step i: Remove aerator from Paucet in sillk. (This can usmdly be done by handbutmay require pliers~ Ifyou need to use pliers be sure i~ot [o ma~ the fi~J:sh on the aerator au you remove iL) Be sure the gasket comes out with fl~e aerator. Step 2: With the gasket provided screw the adaptor into the t~mcet. Step 3: The solution hose wi!! now screw directty to the adaptor. Step 4: NOte: When finished, remove hose and adaptor and re-in_stall aera- tor. (It is a go~xl idea to Clean out the aerator prior to re- L, astallation. If the standard faucet adaptor does not fi~ your sink uniVersal a~ptors are available. COMMERCIAL AUTOMATIC WASHER INSTALLATION AND SETUP INSTRUCTIONS LAVEUSE AUTOMATIQUE GUIDE D'UTILISATION ET D'ENTRETIEN FOR QUESTIONS ABOUT FEATURES, OPERATION/PERFORMANCE, PARTS, ACCESSORIES OR SER¥1CE CALL: 1 ~800.688.9900 IN CANADA, CALL: 1.800.8076777 AU CANADA, POUR DES QUESTIONS ,g, PROPOS DES CARACT~RISTIQUES, DU FONCTIONNEMENT/RENDEMENT, DES PIECES, DES ACCESSOIRES OU DU SERVICE, COMPOSEZ LE: ~ .800.807.6777 VISIT OUR WEBS1TE AT WWW. MAYTAGCOM M ERCIALLAU N DRY. COM OU VISITEZ NOTRE SITE INTERNET A WVV~V. MAYTAGCOMM ERCIAL LA U N DRY, COM PARA OBTENER ACCESO AL MANUAL DE USO Y CUIDADO £N ESPAiC, IOL, O PARA OBTENER INFORMACIQN ADICIONAL ACERCA DE SU PRODUCTO, VISITE: WWW. MAYTAG.COM. TENGA LISTO SU NOMERO DE MODELO COMPLETO. PODR,~, ENCONTRAR EL NOMERO DE MODELO Y DE SERIE EN LA ETIQUETA UBICADA DEBAJO DE LA TAPA DE LA LAVADORA. W10165327A TABLE OF CONTENTS WASHER SAFETY ....................................................................................................................3 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................... 4 Tools and Par~s ..................................................................................................................... 4 Options ................................................................................................................................ 5 Location Requirements ......................................................................................................... 6 Drain System ........................................................................................................................ 7 E[ectrical Requirements ........................................................................................................ 7 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS ........................................................................................... 8 Remove Transport System .................................................................................................... 8 Connect the Inlet Hoses ....................................................................................................... 9 Route the Drain Hose ......................................................................................................... 10 Secure the Drain Hose ...................................................................................................... 10 Level the Washer ................................................................................................................ 11 Complete Installation ......................................................................................................... 11 SETUP INSTRUCTIONS ........................................................................................................ 12 General User Information ................................................................................................... 12 Control Setup Procedures ................................................................................................... 13 Start Operating Setup ......................................................................................................... 13 Washer Diagnostic Mode ................................................................................................... 16 CLEANING YOUR WASHER ................................................................................................. 17 Water Inlet Hoses ............................................................................................................... 18 ASSISTANCE OR SERVICE ..................................................................................................... 18 Accessories ........................................................................................................................ 18 WARRANTY .......................................................................................................................... 19 TABLE DES MATIERES SI~CURITI~ DE LA LAVEUSE ................................................................................................... 21 EXIGENCES DqNSTALLATION ............................................................................................. 22 Outiliage et pi~ces ............................................................................................................. 22 Options .............................................................................................................................. 23 Exigences d'emplacement .................................................................................................. 24 Syst&me de vidange ............................................................................................................ 25 Specifications ~lectriques ................................................................................................... 25 INSTRUCTIONS D'INSTALLATION ..................................................................................... 26 D~pose du syst~me de transport ......................................................................................... 26 Raccordement des tuyaux d'alimentation .......................................................................... 27 Acheminement du tuyau de vidange .................................................................................. 28 Immobilisation du tuyau de vidange .................................................................................. 28 R~glage de I'aplomb de Ia laveuse ..................................................................................... 29 Achever I'installation .......................................................................................................... 29 INSTRUCTIONS DE CONFIGURATION .............................................................................. 30 Information g~n~rale pour I'utilisateur ............................................................................... 30 Procedures de r~glage des syst~mes de commande ........................................................... 31 Param~trage pour mise en marche ..................................................................................... 31 Mode de diagnostic de la laveuse ...................................................................................... 35 N~TOYAGE DE ~ ~VEUS[ .............................................................................................. 36 Tuyaux d'arriv~e d'eau ....................................................................................................... 37 ASSISTANCE OU SERVICE .................................................................................................... 37 Accessoires ......................................................................................................................... 37 GARANTIE ............................................................................................................................. 38 WASHER SAFETY Your safety and the safety of others are very important. We have provided many important safety messages in this manual and on your appliance. A~ways read and obey all safety messages. This is the safety alert symbol. This symbol alerts you to potential hazards that can kill or hud you and others. All safety messages will follow the safety alert symbol and either the word "DANGER" or "VVARNING.' These words mean: You can be killed or seriously injured if you don't immediately follow instructions. You can be killed or seriously injured if you don't follow instructions. All safety messages will tell you what the potential hazard is, tell you how to reduce the chance of injuw, and tell you what can happen if the instructions are not followed, IMPORTANT SAFETY INsTRucTIONS WARNING: To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, or injury to persons when using the washer, follow basic precautions, including the following: · Read all instructions before using the washer. · Do not wash articles that have been previously cleaned in, washed in, soaked in, or spotted with gasoline, dry-cleaning solvents, other flammable, or explosive substances as they give off vapors that could ignite or explode, · Do not add gasoline, dry-cleaning solvents, or other flammable, or explosive substances to the wash water. These substances give off vapors that could ignite or explode. · Under certain conditions, hydrogen gas may be produced in a hot water system that has not been used for 2 weeks or more, HYDROGEN GAS IS EXPLOSIVE. If the hot water system has not been used for such a period, before using the washing machine, turn on all hot water faucets and let the water flow from each for several minutes. This will release any accumulated hydrogen gas, As the gas is flammable, do not smoke, or use an open flame during · Do not allow children to play on or in the washer. Close supervision of children is necessary when the washer is used near children. · Before the washer is removed from service or discarded, remove the door or lid. · Do not reach into the washer if the drum, tub or agitator is moving. · DO not install or store the washer where it will be exposed to the weather. · Do not tamper wilh controls. · Do not repair or replace any part of the washer or attempt any servicing unless specifically recommended in this manual or in published user-repair instruotJons that you understand and have the skills to carry out. · See "Electrical Requirements" for grounding instructions. this time. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS Tools and Parts Gather the required tools and parts before starting installation. The parts supplied are in the washer drum. Tools needed for connecting the water inlet hoses Tools needed for installation · Pliers (that open to 19A6" [39.5 mm]) · Flashlight (optional) · Open end wrenches 14 mm · Wood block and 13 mm · Ruler or measuring tape · Level Paris supplied A B C D A. U-shaped hose form B Water inlet hoses (2) C. Inlet hose washers (4) D. Transit bolt hole plug (4) E Beaded t~e strap E Parts supplied for PD Models: · Service door lock cam Parts supplied PR Models: · Card reader bezel · Card reader wire harness · Screws (2) Alternate Parts Your installation may require additiona~ parts, tf you are interested in purchasing one of the items listed here, call the toll-free number on the cover or in the "Assistance or Service" section. If You Have You Will Need to Buy Laundry tub or standpipe Sump pump system (if not already available) taller than 96" (2.4 m) Overhead sewer Standard 20 gal. (76 L), 30" (76.2 cra) tall drain tub or utility sink and sump pump (available from local plumbing suppliers) Floor drain Siphon break, Part Number 285834; additional drain hose, Part Number 83~8155; and connector kit, Part Number 285835 Drain hose too short 4 ft (1.2 m) drain hose extension kit, Part Number 285863 Water faucets beyond reach 2 longer water fiII hoses: of fill hoses 6 ft (I .8 m) Part Number 76314 10 ft (3.0 m) Part Number 350008 Options Pedestal You have the option of purchasing pedestals, separately for this washer. The pedestal will add to the total height of the washer. Optional pedestal ~ Pedestal Hei~ A~p;~;~m;~: h;i~b~ Color Model Numbe~"~~ Z with washer C~ 2%" (7.3 cm) 47.5" (120.7 cm) White WHP040 ~ Location Req ireme Selecting the proper location for your washer improves performance and minimizes noise and Washer Dimensions possible washer "walk." Your washer can be installed under a custom counter, or in a basement, laundry room, closet, or recessed area. See "Drain System." Companion appliance location requirements should also be considered. Proper installation is your responsibility. You will need · A water heater set to deliver 120°F (49°C) water to the washer. · A grounded electricaI outlet located within 6 ft (1.8 m) of where the power cord is attached to the back of the washer. See "Electrical Requirements." · Hot and cold water faucets located within 4 ft (1.2 m) of the hot and cold water fill valves, and water pressure of 20-100 psi (137.9-689.6 kPa). · A level floor with a maximum slope of 1" (2.5 cm) under entire washer. Install/n§ the washer on soft floor surfaces, such as carpets or surfaces with foam backing, is not recommended. · A sturdy and solid floor to support the washer with a total weight (water and load) of 4O0 lbs (180 kg). Do not operate your washer in temperatures below 32°F (0°C). Some water can remain in the washer and can cause damage in Iow temperatures. Installation clearances · The location must be large enough to aIlow the washer door to be fully opened. · Additional spacing should be considered for ease of installation and servicing. The door opens more than 90°, and it is not reversible. · Additional clearances might be required for wall, door, and floor moldings. · Additional spacing of 1" (2.5 em) on all sides of the washer is recommended to reduce noise transfer. · Companion appliance spacing should also be considered. 27,, 50~/='' 44%" (113.4 crn) 28~3/~s,, A floor drain should be provided under the bulkhead. Prefabricated bulkheads with electrical outlets, water inlet lines and drain facilities should be used only where local codes permit. Drai The washer can be installed using the standpipe drain system Ifloor or wall), the laundry tub drain system, or the floor drain system. Select the drain hose installation method you need. See "Tools and Parts." Standpipe drain system - wall or floor (views A & B) The standpipe drain requires a minimum diameter standpipe of 2" (5 cm). The minimum carry-away capacity can be no less than 17 gal. (64 L) per minute. The top of the standpipe must be at least 30" (76.2 cm) high and no higher than 96" (2.4 m) from the bottom of the washer. (76.2 B Laundry tub drain system (view C) The laundry tub needs a minimum 20 gal. (76 L) capacity. The top of the laundry tub must be at least 30" (76.2 cm) above the floor. Floor drain system (view D) The floor drain system requires a siphon break that may be purchased separately. See "Tools and Parts." The siphon break must be a minimum of 28" (71 cm) from the bottom of the washer. Additional hoses might be needed. Electrical Requi Electrical Shock Hazard Plug into a grounded 3 prong outlet. Do not remove ground prong. Do not use an adapter. Do not use an extension cord. Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, fire, or electrical shock. · A 120 volt, 60 Hz., AC only, 15- or 20-amp, fused electrical supply is required. A time- delay fuse or circuit breaker is recommended. It is recommended that a separate circuit serving only this appliance be provided. · This washer is equipped with a power supply cord having a 3 prong grounding plug. · To minimize possible shock hazard, the cord must be plugged into a mating, 3 prong, grounding-type outlet, grounded in accordance with ]oca[ codes and ordinances. If a mating outlet is not available, it is the personal responsibilib/and obligation of the customer to have the properly grounded outlet instal[ed by a qualified electrician. · If codes permit and a separate ground wire is used, it is recommended that a qualified electrician determine that the ground path is adequate. · Do'not grouted to a gas pipe. · Check with a qualified electrician if you are not sure the washer is properly grounded. · Do not have a fuse in the neutral or ground circuit. GROUNDING INSTRUCTIONS For a grounded, cord-connected washer; This washer must be grounded. In the event of a malfunction or breakdown, grounding will reduce the risk of electrical shock by providing a path of least resistance for electdc current. This washer is equipped with a cord having an equipment-grounding conductor and a grounding plug. The plug must be plugged into an appropriate outlet that is properly installed and grounded in accordance with all local codes and ordinances. WARNING: Improper connection of the equipment- grounding conductor can result in a risk of electric shock. Check with a qualified electrician or serviceman if you are in doubt as to whether the appliance is properly grounded. Do not modify the plug provided with the appliance - if it will not fit the out~et, have a proper outlet installed by a qualified electrician. For a permanently connected washer: This washer must be connected to a grounded metal, permanent wiring system, or an equipment grounding conductor must be run with the circuit conductors and connected to the equipment-grounding terminal or lead on the appliance. INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS Remove Transport System IMPORTANT: Position the washer so that the rear of the washer is within approximately 3 ft (90 cra) of its final location. There are 4 blue bolts in the rear panel of the washer that support the suspension system during transportation. These bolts also retain the power cord inside the washer until the bolts are removecJ. 1. Keep the washer in the upright position while removing the blue bolts. 2. Using a 13 mm wrench, loosen each of the bolts. 3. Once the bolt is loose, move it to the center of the hole and completely pull out the bolt, including the plastic spacer covering the bolt. 4. Once all 4 bolts are removed, discard the bolts and spacers. Then pull the power cord through the opening of the rear panel and dose the hole with the attached cap. 5. Close the bolt holes with the 4 transport bolt hole plugs. NOTE: If the washer is to be transported at a later date, call your local service center. To avoid suspension and structural damage, your washer must be properly set up for relocation by a certified technician. Connect the Inlet Hoses Insert new flat washers (suppfied) into each end of the inlet hoses. Firmly seat the washers in the couplings. A B A. Coupling B. Washer Connect the inlet hoses to the water faucets Make sure the washer drum is empty. 1. Attach a hose to the hot water faucet. Screw on coupling by hand until it is seated on the washer. 2. Attach a hose to the cold water faucet. Screw on coupling by hand until it is seated on the washer. 3. Using pliers, tighten the couplings with an additional two-thirds turn. NOTE: Do not overtighten or use tape or sealants on the valve. Damage to the valves can result. · Clear water lines · Run water through both faucets and inlet hoses, into a laundry tub, drainpipe or bucket, to get rid of particles in the water lines that might clog the inlet valve screens. Check the temperature of the water to make sure that the hot water hose is connected to the hot water faucet and that the cold water hose is connected to the cold water faucet. Connect the inlet hoses to the washer z H. Hot water inlet C. Cold water inlet 1. Attach the hot water hose to the washer's hot (H) water inlet valve, Screw on coupling by hand until it is seated on the washer. 2. Attach the cold water hose to the washer's cold (C) water faucet. Screw on coupling by hand until it is seated on the washer. 3. Using pliers, tighten the couplings with an additional two-thirds turn. NOTE: Do not overtighten, Damage to the coupling can result. 4. Turn on the water faucets completely and check for leaks, NOTE: Replace inlet hoses after 5 years of use to reduce the risk of hose failure, Record hose installation or replacement dates on the hoses for future reference. Periodically inspect and replace hoses if bulges, kinks, cuts, wear, or leaks are found. Route the D ai l Hose Proper routing of the drain hose protects your floor from damage due to water leakage. Read and follow these instructions. Remove drain hose from the washer Gentry pull the corrugated drain hose from the shipping clips. Laundry tub drain or standpipe drain Connect the drain hose form to the corrugated drain hose. A. Snap either end of the drain hose form to the drain hose at the point where the corrugation begins. B Bend drain hose over drain hose form and snap into place. To keep drain water from going back into the washer: · Do not straighten the drain hose, and do not force excess drain hose into standpipe. Hose should be secure, but loose enough to provide a gap for air. · Do not lay excess hose on the bottom of the laundry tub. Floor drain You may need additional parts. See Floor drain under "Tools and Parts." Secure the Drain -lose 1. Drape the power cord over the washer top. 2. Move the washer to its final location. 3. Place the drain hose in the laundry tub or standpipe as shown. See illustrations A and B. 4. If the washer faucets and the drain standpipe are recessed, put the hooked end of the drain hose in the standpipe as shown. See illustration C. NOTES: · Do not force excess drain hose back into the rear of the washer. · To avoid siphoning, do not seal the drain hose into the standpipe. Level the Washer Properly leveling your washer avoids excessive noise and vibration. 1. Check the levelness of the washer by placing a level on the top edge of the washer, first side to side, then front to back. If the washer is against a wall, move the washer out slightly before tipping back. If the washer is not level, first prop the front with a wood block and adjust the feet as necessary; then prop the back and adjust feet as necessary. Repeat this step until washer is level. 2. Make sure all four feet are stable and resting on the floor. Then check that the appliance is perfectly level (use a level). 3. After the washer is level, use a 14 mm open-end wrench to turn the nuts on the feet tightly against the washer cabinet. IMPORTANT: Ali four feet must be tightened. If the nuts are not tight against the washer cabinet, the washer may vibrate. 4-. The washer should not move front to back, side to side, or diagonally when pushed on its top edges. 5. Slide the washer to its final location. 6. Confirm the levelness of the washer. Complete ]nsta [atio 1. Check the electrical requirements. Be sure that you have the correct electrical supply and the recommended grounding method. See "Electrical Requirements." 2. Check that all pa~LS are now installed. If there is an extra part, go back through the steps to see which step was skipped. 3. Check that you have all of your tools. 4. Dispose of/recycle all packaging materials. $. Check that the water faucets are on. 6. Check for leaks around faucets and inlet hoses. Electrical Shock Hazard Plug into a grounded 3 prong outlet. Do not remove ground prong. Do not use an adapter. Do not use an extension cord. Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, fire, or electrical shock. 7. Plug into a grounded 3 prong outlet. 8. To test and to clean your washer, measure V2 the detergent manufacturer's recommended amount of HE High Efficiency detergent for a medium-size load. Pour the detergent into the detergent dispenser. Select any cycle and allow the washer to complete one whole cycJe. SETUP INSTRUCTIONS This washer can hold up to a 16 lb (7 kg) load of laundry. 1. PD Models: Insert coins until "SELECT CYCLE" flashes in display. PR Models: A debit card is required rather than coins. In Enhanced Debit mode, the card balance will also display when a debit card is inserted into the reader. 2. Door must be closed before cycle selection is made, 3. Press fabric serting keypad for the wash cycle desired. After the cycle is sta~ed, the time will display and count down. 4. When a cycle is interrupted by opening the door, 'RESELECT CYCLE" will flash in the display. To restart the washer, close door and press any key. Genera[ User ln ormation "- - - -" INOPERATIVE STATE - These lines o~ the display indicate the appliance is inoperative. Enter setup mode to view diagnostic code. "0 MINUTES" SHOWING IN DISPLAY - This condition indicates the appliance cannot be operated. Coins dropped or debit inputs during this condition will be stored in escrow but cannot be used until normal operation is restored by opening and closing the door. If a door switch fails, it must be replaced before normal operation can be restored. COLD START (Initial first use) - Appliance is programmed at the factory as follows: Washer 14-minute wash period 3 rinses (extra rinse not enabled) $1.75 wash price (PD models) $0.00 wash price (PR model) WARM START (after power failure) - A few seconds after power is restored, if a cycle was in progress at the time of the power failure, "RESELECT CYCLE" will flash in the display, indicating the ~eed for a key press to restart washer. DOOR LOCK - The door will be locked when the cycle starts. The door will remain locked until the end of a cycle or approximately 2 minutes after a power interruption. PRICING - After the door is opened following the completion of a cycle, the display indicates the cycle price (unless set for free operation). As coins are dropped or debit inputs arrive, the display will change to lead the user through the initiation of a cycle. FREE CYCLES - This is established by setting the cycle price to zero. When this happens "SELECT CYCLE" will appear rather than a cycle price. DEBIT CARD READY - This appliance is debit card "cab]e" ready. It will accept a variety of debit card systems, but does not come with a debit card reader. Refer to the debit card reader manufacturer for proper washer setup. In models converted to a Generation t debit card system, debit pulses represent the equivalent of one coin. DISPLAY - After the washer has been installed and plugged in, the display will show "0 MINUTES." Once the washer has been plugged in and the washer door opened and closed the display wilI show the price. In washers set for free cycles the display will flash "SELECT CYCLE." Contro se ub Procedures IMPORTANT: Read all instructions before operating. PD Models: Insert access door key, turn, and lift to remove access door. PR Models: Once the debit card reader is installed (according to the reader manufacturing instructions), the setup mode can be entered by inserting a manual setup card (supplied by the reader manufacturer) into the card s~ot. If a manual setup card is not available, manual setup mode can be entered by removing connector AAI on the circuit board. Electrical Shock Hazard Disconnect power before servicing. Replace all parts and panels before operating. Failure to do so can result in death or electrical shock. The,display can contain 4 numbers and/or letters and a decimal point. These are used to ir~dicate the setup codes and related code values available for use in programming the appliance. HOW TO USE THE KEYPADS TO PROGRAM THE CONTROLS 1. The PERMANENT PRESS keypad is used to adjust the values associated with setup codes. Pressing the keypad will change the value by increments. Rapid adjustment is possible by holding the keypad down. 2. The WOOLENS keypad will advance you through the setup codes. Pressing the keypad wi]l advance you to the next available setup code. Holding the keypad down will automaticalt.y advance through the setup codes at a rate of 1 per second. 3. The DELICATES & KNITS keypad is used to select or deselect options. IMPORTANT: Unplug washer or disconnect power before opening the console. To access connector AA1, disconnect power, open console, disconnect plug on AA1, close console. Electrical Shock Hazard Plug into a grounded 3 prong outlet. Do not remove ground prong. Do not use an adapter. Do not use an extension cord. Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, fire, or electrical shock. Slad Operati ,g Before proceeding, it is worth noting that, despite all of the options available, an owner can simply choose to un-crate a new commercial washer, hook it up, plug it in, and have a unit which operates. Units are preset at the factory for a 14-minute wash period and 3 rinses (no extra rinse). SETUP CODES The WOOLENS keypad will advance you from code to code. The PERMANENT PRESS keypad will change the code value. The DELICATES & KNITS keypad will select or deselect options. FOR PR MODELS: The setup codes are the same as for the "PD" model except where noted. The setup code is indicated by the one or two left-hand characters. The setup code value is indicated by the two or three right-hand characters. CODE EXPLANATION 607 6 REGULAR CYCLE PRICE 07 Represents the number of quarters (coin 1); may adjust from 0-39. (See VALUE OF COIN 1 .) Advance from 0-39 by pressing PERMANENT PRESS. Currently set for 7 quarters = $1.75. PR MODEL ONLY: Currently set for 0 quarters. PS MODE ONLY: Represents the number of push-in actuations of the coin slide to start the washer. 601 setting would represent one coin slide actuation. Press WOOLENS keypad once to advance to next code. -~,---,~~'N,GTH 14 This is the number of minutes for WASH. Unit comes from the factory preset with 14 minutes. Choose from 9-1 7 minutes by pressing the PERMANENT PRESS keypad. Press WOOLENS keypad once to advance to next code. Plug in washer or reconnect power. The washer is now in the setup mode. The lower fabric setting keypads and the digital display are used to set up the controls. TIME-OF-DAY CLOCK, MINUTES 800 8 ADDITIONAL RINSE OPTION 5.00 5. This option is either SELECTED "ON" or NOT SELECTED "OFF." 00Not Selected "OFF." ArSelected "ON." Press DELICATES & KNITS keypad once for this selection. Press WOOLENS keypad once to advance to next code. 900 9 CYCLE COUNTER OPTION This option is either SELECTED "ON" or NOT SELECTED "OFF." O0 Not Selected "OFF." 0C Selected "ON" and not able to be deselected. Press DELICATES & KNITS keypad 3 consecutive times to select "ON." Once selected "ON" it cannot be deselected. Press WOOLENS keypad once to advance to next code. 1.00 1. MONEY COUNTE This option is either SELECTED "ON" or NOT SELECTED "OFF." 00 Not Selected "OFF." 0C Selected "ON." Press DELICATES & KNITS keypad 3 consecutive times to select "ON" and 3 consecutive times to remove (Not Selected "OFF"). Counter resets by going from "OFF" to "ON." Press WOOLENS keypad once to advance to next code. CO Selected "ON" and not able to be deselected. To select "ON" and not able to be deselected, first select "ON," then within 2 seconds, press DELICATES & KNITS twice, PERMANENT PRESS once, and exit setup mode. 2.00 2. SPECIAL PRICING OPTIONS This option is either SELECTED "ON" or NOT SELECTED "OFF." 00 Not Selected "OFF." SP Selected "ON." Press DELICATES & KNITS keypad once for this selection. If SPECIAL PRICING OPTION is selected, you have access to codes 3.XX through 9.XX. Press WOOLENS keypad once to advance to next code. Options to use if SPECIAL PRICING is selected. 3.07 3. sPECIAL CYCLE PRICE ................ ~ 07 Represents the number of quarters (coin 1); may adjust from 0-39. (See VALUE OF COrN 1 .) Advance from 0-39 by pressing PERMANENT PRESS. Currently set for 7 quarters = $1.75 PR MODEL ONLY: Currently set for 0 quarters. Press WOOLENS keypad once to advance to next code. O0 This is the TME-OF-DAY CLOCK, minute setting; select 0-59 minutes by pressing PERMANENT PRESS keypad. Press WOOLENS keypad once to advance to next code. 6.00 6. TIME-OF-DAY CLOCK, HOURS (NOTE: Uses military time or 24 hr. clock) 00 This is the TIME-OF-DAY CLOCK, hour setting; select 0-23 hours by pressing PERMANENT PRESS keypad. Press WOOLENS keypad once to advance to next code. 7.00 7. SPECIAL PRICE START HOUR (NOTE~tary f~rne or 24h~ dock) 00 This is the start hour; 0-23 hours. Select START HOUR by pressing PERMANENT PRESS keypad. Press WOOLENS keypad once to advance to next code. 8.00 8. SPECIAL PRICE STOP HOUR (NOTE: Uses military time or 24 hr. clock) 00 This is the stop hour; 0-23 hours. Select STOP HOUR by pressing PERMANENT PRESS keypad. Press WOOLENS keypad once to advance to next code. 9.10 9. SPECIAL PRICE DAY 10 This represents the day of the week and whether special pricing is selected for that day. A number followed by "0' indicates no selection that particular day (9.10). A number followed by an "S" indicates selected for that day (9.1S). To change the value of "0" and "S," use the 'DELICATES & KNITS" key. Days of the week (I -7) are selected by pressing PERMANENT PRESS keypad. When exiting setup code "9.", it must show current day of week. Days of the week 10 Day 1 Sunday 20 Day 2 Monday 30 Day 3 Tuesday 40 Day 4 Wednesday 50 Day 5 Thursday 60 Day 6 Friday 70 Day 7 Saturday SPECIAL PRICE DAY If selected, would show 1S 2S 3S 4S 5S 6S 7S Press WOOLENS keypad once to advance to next code A.00 A. VAULT VIEWING OPTION This option is either SELECTED "ON" Or NOT SELECTED "OFF." 00 Not Selected "OFF." SC SC Selected "ON." Press DELICATES & KNITS keypad once for this selection. When selected, the money and/or cycle counts will be viewable (if counting is selected), when the coin box is removed. Press WOOLENS keypad once to advance to next code. b.05 b. VALUE OF COIN 1 05 This represents the value of coin I in number of nickels. 0S = $0.25. By pressing PERMANENT PRESS keypad you have the option of 1-199 nickels. PS MODE ONLY: Represents the total vend price in nickels. Example: b.30 is equal to $1.50. Press WOOLENS keypad once to advance to next code. C.20 C. VALUE OF COIN 2 20 This represents the value of coin 2 in number o~ nickels; 20: $1.0O~ ' '"' PR MODEL ONLY: Currently set for $0.25 By pressing PERMANENT PRESS keypad you have the option of 1-199 nicke[s. Press WOOLENS keypad once to advance to next code. d.00 d. COIN SLIDE OPTION .... ' EL' Thsopton setherSELECTED ON o NOT SELECTED O . 00 Not Selected "OFF." CS CS Selected "ON." Press DELICATES & KNITS keypad 3 consecutive times for this selection. When coin slide mode is selected, set b. equal to value of slide in nickels. Set Step 6 (regular cycle price) and Step 3 (special cycle price) to number of slide operations, ffthe installer sets up "CS" on a coin drop model, it will not register coins. Press WOOLENS keypad once to advance to next code. E.00 E. ADD COINS OPTIOn- This option is either SELECTED "ON" or NOT SELECTED "OFF." This option causes the customer display to show the number of coins (coin 1) to enter, rather than the dolJars-and-cents amount. 00 Not Selected "OFF." AC Selected "ON." Press DELICATES & KNITS keypad 3 consecutive times for this selection. Press WOOLENS keypad once to advance to next code. F. O0 F. ENHANCED PRICING OPTION 00 Not Selected "OFF." CP Cycle-Based pricing enabled. This option allows configuration of different prices for cold, warm, and hot water cycles. Su Super Cycle pricing enabled. This option allows customers to upgrade cycles by depositing extra money. Setup codes "H." and 'h.' will be displayed only when this option is enabled. Press DELICATES & KNITS keypad once for this selection. Press WOOLENS keypad once to advance to next code. H.01 H. SUPER CYCLE UPGRADE PRICE (Skipped unless super cycle pricing is enabled.) 01 This represents the number of coin 1 required to upgrade a base cycle to a super cycle. Advance from 0-39 by pressing PERMANENT PRESS keypad. Press WOOLENS keypad once to advance to next code. h.01 h. SUPER CYCLE TYPE (Skipped unless Super Cycle pricing ~s enabled.) 01 This represents the super cycle upgrade option. Press PERMANENT PRESS keypad to step through upgrade options 1-3 as follows: 01 - enhanced wash, extra 3 minutes of wash tumble in addition to the programmed wash time. 02 - extra rinse for all cycles. 03 - both 01 and 02. Press WOOLENS keypad once to advance to next code. ~C~:::: ~/DEBIT OPTION Cd Both coin and debit selected. C_ Coins selected, debit disabled. _d Debit Card se]ected, coins disabled. Press DELICATES & KNITS keypad 3 consecutive times for this selection. Ed Enhanced debit is self-selected when a Generation 2 card reader is installed in the washer. The Ed option cannot be manually selected or deselected. Press WOOLENS keypad once to advance to next code. U00 L. PRICE SUPPRESSION OPTION TMs option causes the customer d~splay to show "ADD" or "AVAILABLE rather than the amount of money to add. (Used mainly in debit installations.) 00 Not Selected "OFF." PS PS Selected "ON," Press DELICATES & KNITS keypad once for this selection. Press WOOLENS keypad once to advance to next code. ' ROw--'O~, ' ; fi. CE "n. CLEAR ESC ...... When ~elected, money held in esc~0w'~0r 36 mfnUtes;without further escrow or cycle activity will be cleared. 00 Not Selected "OFF." CE Selected "ON." Press DELICATES & KNITS keypad once for this selection. Press WOOLENS keypad once to advance to next code. r.800 r. TOP SPIN SPEED RPM 800 This can be selected from the following spin speeds: 600 rpm, 750 rpm, 800 rpm, 1000 (displays as 999) rpm. Step between speeds by pressing PERMANENT PRESS. Currently set for 800 rpm. Press WOOLENS keypad once to advance to next code. U.00 U. '" pFNN¥ INCRFME~~ 00 This represents the penny increment price offset used in Generation 2 (Enhanced Debit} PR models. Choose from 0-4 pennies by pressing the PERMANENT PRESS keypad Press WOOLENS keypad once to advance to next code. Al.00 Al. PREWASH LENGTH 00 This is the number of minutes of PREWASH. Choose 0 to disable the prewash or select between 2 and 7 minutes by pressing the PERMANENT PRESS keypad. Press WOOLENS keypad once to advance to next code, A2.03 A2. FIN,~'i- SPINLENGTH 03 This is the number of minutes of final high speed spin. Choose from 3-8 minutes by pressing the PERMANENT PRESS keypad. Press WOOLENS keypad once to advance to next code. If cycle counter (90C) is selected, the following is true: 100 Represents the number of cycles in HUNDREDS I 02: 200 200 Represents the number of cycles in ONES 2 25 = 25 Total = 225 cycles This is "VIEW ONLY" and cannot be cleared. ~l~.Press WOOLENS keypad once to advance to next code. If money counter (1.0C or 1.C0) is selected, the following is true: 300 Number of dollars in HUNDREDS 3 01 = 100 400 Number of dollars in ONES 4 68 = 68 S00 Number of CENTS. 5 75 = 75 Total =$168.75 END of SETUP PROCEDURES. EXIT FROM SETUP MODE PD Models: Reinstall access door. PR Model: Remove power, open cons, ole, reinsert plug into AA1, close console, and apply power. Washer Diagnostic Mode To enter the "Washer Diagnostic Mode," first enter "Start Operating Setup." Then press and hold the DELICATES & KNITS key for 1 second while in any of the setup codes one through six, anytime a diagnostic code is present, or while dAS displays if operating with Maytag Data Acquisition setup, On entr~ to diagnostic mode the entire display will flash, a cycle in process is canceled, money in escrow is cleared; and diagnostic codes are cleared. If a diagnostic code persists, it must be corrected before the following cycle options are permitted. There are five possible ways to initiate cycle activity from diagnostic mode as follows: 1. Clean Washer cycle - With the entire display flashing, this cycle is started by pressing the BRIGHTS keypad. Use the Clean Washer cycle once a month to keep the inside oF your washer fresh and clean. This cycle uses a higher water level. Use with AFFRESHTM washer cleaner tablet or liquid chlorine bleach to thoroughly clean the inside of your washing machine. This cycle should not be interrupted. See "Cleaning Your Washer." IMPORTANT: Do not place garments or other items in the washer during the Clean Washer cycle. Use this cycle with an empty wash drum. 2. Cycle Credit - With the entire display flashing, a cycle may be credited by pressing the PERMANENT PRESS keypad (CC will display). When the service mode is exited "SELECT CYCLE" will be displayed unless the end-of-cycle door opening is required. 3. Manual Load Test Cycle - With the entire display flashing, this cycle is started by pressing the WHITES keypad. This cycle provides more typical full length fills, tumbles, drains and actuator dispenser movement allowing for a more thorough analysis of the washer operation, including pressure switch behavior. 4. Quick Spin Cycle - With the entire display flashing, this cycle is started by pressing the COLORS keypad. This cycle provides a method to quickty drain and spin (remove water from the washer) if desired. 5. History Overview Test Cycle - With the entire display flashing, this cycle is started by pressing the WOOLENS keypad. This cycle provides a quick verification that the cold and hot water valves, dispensers, and pump motor are working and actuator dispenser movement. It also includes drain and spin operations. Pressing the DELICATES & KNITS keypad will exit diagnostic mode and cancel a diagnostic cycle in process. DIAGN6STIC CbDES If the setup mode is entered a nd one of the following has occurred, the appropriate diagnostic code will be in the display. d5 Blocked coin 1 or coin drop control circuit failure (coin recognition and price display disabled while blockage persists). PR Models Only: Setup mode ]. should be set to _d (or Ed if in Enhanced Debit) to eliminate coin related diagnostic codes. d9 Voltage detected below 90 vac for 8 seconds. dl 3 [31ocked coin 2 or coin drop control cimuit failure (coin recognition and price display disabled while blockage persists). dl 6 Not receiving comm~Jnications from installed debit card reader in Generation 2 debit mode. F20 Slow Fill. The washer will not detect water input for4 min. PresSure switch failure or no water inlet. This code is reported as d8 on d7 F22 The door is not able to loci<. Door lock error or someone trying to start the washer, by pressing the door switch with the finger. This code is reported as dl 7 on Accu Trac. (For different code consult service personnel) WASHER HELP MODE This mode is entered by pressing the PERMANENT PRESS keypad while in special pricing option mode 2.XX (or while dAS displays if operating with Maytag Data Acquisition setup). In help mode, other display symbols and elements are mapped to reflect the state of various inputs and outputs as follows: Wash Water sensed at wash level Circle above digit DOOR LOCKED COLD HOT OR AVAILABLE Low voltage present (he]ow about 90 vac) Door closed Door sensed locked Cold water relay on Hot water relay on Door unlock Drain pump ON CLEANING YOUR WASHER .... Cleaning the Door Seal/Bellow 1. Open the washer door and remove any clothing or items from the washer. 2. Inspect the black colored seal/bellow between the door opening and the basket for stained areas. Pull back the seal/bellow to inspect all areas under the seal/bellow and to check for foreign objects. A A Seal~Bellow 3. If stained areas are found, wipe down these areas of the seal/bellow, using the procedure that follows. a) Mix a dilute solution, using % cup (177 mL) of liquid chlorine bleach, and 1 gal. (3.8 L) of warm tap water. b) Wipe the seal/bellow area with the dilute solution, using a damp cloth. c) Let stand 5 minutes. d) Wipe down area thoroughly with a dry cloth and let the washer interior air dry with door open. IMPORTANT: · Wear rubber gloves when cleaning for prolonged periods, · Refer to the bleach manufacturer's instructions for proper use, Washer Maintenance Procedure This washer has a special cycle that uses higher water volumes in combination with AFFRESHTM washer cleaner or liquid chlorine bleach to thoroughly clean the inside of the washer. NOTES: · Read these instructions completely before beginning the cleaning process. · If necessary, the cleaning cycle may be interrupted by pressing the DELICATES & KNITS button twice. However, this will not immediately stop the cycle. The machine will continue with several rinse and drain steps to ensure that all remaining bleach is rinsed from the washer. Begin firocedu~e ' 1. Open the washer door and remove any clothing or items from the washer. 2, Using the AFFRESHTM washer cleaner (Recommended): Add one AFFRESH~M washer cleaner tablet to the washer drum. If using liquid chlorine bleaeh: Open the dispenser drawer and immediately add % cup (160 mL) of liquid chlorine bleach to the bleach compattment. NOTE: Do not add any detergent to this cycle. Use of more than % cup (160 mL) of bleach will cause product damage over time. 3. Close the washer door and the dispenser drawer. 4. To start the Clean Washer cycle, first enter "Start Operating Setup." Then press and hold DELICATES & KNITS for 1 second. With the entire display flashing, press [3RIGHTS. NOTE: The basket wile rotate, then the door will unlock, lock again, and then the cycle will continue. · The machine will not fill, but the basket will rotate while the washer runs a short sensing cycle. This will take approximately 3 minutes. 5. The cycle will determine whether clothing or other items are in the washer. a) If no items are detected in the washe~, it will proceed to Step 7. b) If any items are detected in the washer, "fL" or "F-34" will be displayed. Then the door will unlock. · Press DELICATES & KNITS to cancel the failure code. Then repeat steps 1, 3 and 4 to start the cycle again. 6. Once the cycle has begun, allow the cycle to complete. 7. After the cycle is complete, leave the door open slightly, to allow for better ventilation and drying of washer interior. Always do the following to maintain washer freshness · Use only HE High Efficiency detergent. · I,eave the door slightly open after each cycle to allow for better ventilation and drying of washer interior. · Clean the washer monthly using the Washer Maintenance Procedure, an AFFRESHTM tablet or ~/3 cup (160 mi_) of liquid chlorine bleach. · If the procedure does not sufficiently improve the machine freshness, please evaluate your installation and usage conditions for other causes. Cleaning the exterior Use a soft damp cloth or sponge to wipe up any spills. Occasionally wipe the outside of your washer to keep it looking new. Use mild soap and water, Do not use abrasive products. Cleaning the dispenser drawer The dispenser drawer is removable for easy cleaning. Unlock the dispenser drawer by pressing the Release Lever. Remove the drawer. 2. Remove the inserts (the siphon from the softener and bleach compartments), 3. Wash the parts under running water. NOTE: Do not wash components in the dishwasher. 4. Replace the inserts and return the dispenser to the drawer. Replace inlet hoses after 5 years of use to reduce the risk of hose failure. Periodically inspect and replace inlet hoses if bulges, kinks, cuts, wear or leaks are found. When replacing your in]et hoses, record the date of replacement. ASSISTANCE OR SER¥1CE If you need assistance: The Maytag Consumer Interaction Center will answer any questions about operating or maintaining your washer not covered in the Installation Instructions. The Maytag Consumer Interaction Center is open 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. Just dial 1-800 NO BELTS (1-800-662-3587) - the call is free. When you call, you will need the washer model number and serial number, goth numbers can be found on the serial-rating plate located on your appliance. Accessories Enhance your washer with these premium accessories. For more high-quality items or to order, call 1-800-901-2042, or visit us at www. maytag.com/ accessories. In Canada call: 1-800-g07-6777 or visit us at www.whirlpoolparts,ca. Part Number Accessory 8212638RP 6 ft ( .8 m) nylon bra~ded space-saving fill hose, 90 elbow, hypro- blue steel couplings. Safer than stainless steel. (2-pack) 8212487RP 5 ft (1.5 m) nylon braided fill hose. Safer than stainless steel. (2-pack) 8212526 Washer drip tray, fits under all 31682 All purpose appliance cleaner 1903WH Laundry supply storage cart Wl0135699 AFFRESHTM washer cleaner MAYTAG COMMERCIAL WASHER, DRYER, STACKED DRYER/DRYER, COMMERCIAL STACK LAUNDRY, AND MULTI-LOAD COIN OPERATED COMMERCIAL WASHERS AND DRYERS WARRANTY LIMITED WARRANTY ON PARTS For the first fiveyears from the date of purchase, when this commercial appliance is instal]ed, maintained and operated according to the instructions attached to or furnished with the product, Maytag brand of Whirlpool Corporation (thereafter "Maytag") will pay for Factory specified parts or original equipment mantffacturer parts to correct defects in materials or workmanship. Proof of original purchase date is required to obtain service under this warranty. ITEMS MAYTAG WILL NOT PAY FOR 1. AIl other costs including labor, trar~sportation, or custom duties. 2. Service calls to correct the installation of your commercial appliance, to instruct you how to use your commercial appliance, to replace or repair fuses, or to correct external wiring or plumbing. 3. Repairs when your commercial appliance is used for other than normal, commercial use. 4. Damage resulting from improper handling of product during dehvery, theft, accident, alteration, misuse, abuse, fire, flood, acts of God, improper installation, installation not in accordance with local electrical or plumbing codes, or use of products not approved by Maytag. 5. Pickup and Delivery. This commercial appliance is designed to be repaired on location. 6. Repairs to parts or systems resulting from unauthorized modifications made to the commercial appliance. 7'. The remoYal and reinstallation of your commercial appliance if it is installed in an inaccessible location or is not installed in accordance with published installation instructions. 8. Chemical damage is excluded from all warranty coverage. 9. Changes to the building, room, or location needed in order to make the commercial appliance operate correctly. i ~ , ~ DISCLAIMER OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES; LIMITATIONS OF REMEDIES CUSTOMER'S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY UNDER THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SHALL BE PRODUCT REPAIR AS PROVIDED HEREIN. IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO ONE YEAR OR THE SHORTEST PER[OD ALLOWED BY LAW. WHIRLPOOL SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. SOME STATES AND PROVINCES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR LIMITATIONS ON THE DURATION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS, SO THESE EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS, WHICH VARY FROM STATE TO STATE OR PROVINCE TO PROVINCE. If you need service, please contact your authorized Maytag Commercial Laundry distributor. To locate you r authorized Maytag Commercia] Laundry distributor, or for web inquiries, visit www. MaytagCommercia[Lau ndry. com. For written correspondence: Maytag Commercial Laundry Service Department 2000 M-63 North Benton Harbor, Michigan 49085 USA 9/07 Keep this book and your sales slip together for future reference. You must provide proof of purchase or installation date for in-warranty service. Write down the following information about your major appliance to better help you obtain assistance or service if you ever need it, You will need to know your complete model number and sedal number, You can find this information on the model and sedal number label located on the product. Dealer name Address Phone number Model number Serial number Purchase date How to Install Bosch Dishwashers I eHow.com Page 1 of 2 eHew" I Family I Food Health I Home ] Money Style [ More GET THIS TopsToTr HOW to Install Bosch Dishwashers The Robert Oosch Corporation manufactures an array of products, inctuding power tools, automotive parts and kitchen appliances Bossh's built-in dishwashers require a unique installalion procedure If you"re going to reptace your old dishwasher with a Bosch, follow the instructions carefully and make the job a tnt easier Instructions Turn off the power to the dishwasher circuit at the breaker panel or fuse box Open the panel underneath your old dishwasher and disconnect the power connections 3 4 5 6 7 8 Reach underneath the kitchen sink and turn off the hol water supply Then disconnect the hot water feed and drain tube coming from the dishwasher Things Youth Need: upended wr~_nches Flathead screwdriver New hot water dLshwasher Duct tape Wire nuts Loosen the mounting screws and pull out the old dishwasher Slide the new Bosch dishwasher up to the edge of the cabinet Apply Teflon tape to the threads on the hot water feed and tighten the new water supply line to the connection Feed the suppty line and electrical wiring through the chase at the back of the cabinet into the opening for the dishwasher. It may help to tape the two down ~o the floor w~th duct tape to keep lhem in place Slide the dishwasher halfway into the opening and feed the drain line back through the chase into the under-sink cabinet, Connect the drain line to the disposal or drain and tighten the clamp with a flathead screwdriver Slide the dishwasher in the rest of the Remove the front, bottom way panel of the dishwasher (if it isn't already removed) Reach Related Ads Dishwasher Buy Bosch Disbwashe Built in Dishwasher hlsbill Dishwasher Drain Related Articles & Videos Dishwasher My Bosch SHU53~S Dishwasher Was Made How to Wire a Dishwasher http://www.ehow.com/how 7471256 install-bosch-dishwashers.html 2/10/2011 How to Install Bosch Dishwashers I eHow.com Page 2 of 2 10 11 12 14 undemeath the dishwasher and pull the electrical and supply lines forward Apply Teflon tape to the water supply connection, and c~nnect the supply line feed to the connection with an open-end wrench Connect the power line to the wires in the electrical junction box (white to white, blact( to black, copper to green wire for ground) with wire nuts Close the cover of the box and secure by tightening the screws Attach the mounting brackets to the cabinet using the screws included with the dishwasher Turn on the hot water supply and check for leaks on both ends of the feed. If there are none, re-attach the under-side panel to the front of the dishwasher Turn on the dishwashers electrical circuit at the breaker panel or fuse box and test the dishwasher Make sure the drain line doesn*t leak at the connection under the sink Tips&Warnings Before disCOnnecting the old dishwasher, make sure the power is turned off at the breaker panel or fuse box to avoid the risk of an electrical shock References Photo Credit Jupitedmages~Photos com/Geby Images Mote Home & Garden Fans FOLLOW US Post a Comment Post this comment to my Feceb~ok Profile Comment http://www.ehow.com/how_7471256_install-bosch-dishwashers.html 2/10/2011 ? ? ? Instructions for Bosch Dishwashers t eHow.com Page 1 of 2 cHew GET THiS Top 5 To TW Instructions for Bosch Bosch is a Go.nan technology company based in Gerlingen, near Stuttgad. The company makes a vast range of consumer e~ect ronics, auto pads and power tools, along with other home products. Bosch dishwashers are simitar in appearance to most other models of home dishwasher on the market today You will need to know how to load, program and switch on your Bosch dishwasher before you can roughly five minutes for this task Instructions Difficulty: Easy Open your Bosch dishwasher and pull out the lower drawer. Scrape 1 off excess food remains from large items like dishes and bowls and place them in the rack Dishes should face the center of the rack, while bowls or other items likely to collect water should be face- down, Load cutlery into the basket so the soiled ends stick out the top. 2 Load mugs, cups and glasses into the top drawer, face-down. Lay any suitable cooking utensils fiat on the top drawer Make sure no items in the top or bottom drawer intedere with the spin arms beneath the top and bottom drawers Open the detergent dispenser located on the inside of the dishwasher door by pressing the small plastic tab on the right of the cover Add between 1 and 3 tbsp. of detergent or a pre-measured dishwasher tablet Although 1 tbsp. will clean most loads, use more for heavier, didier loads 4. Press the "ON/OFF" switch on the control panel The previous cycle wilt flash on the screen along with the estimated time the cycle will take Change the cycle if necessary, by pressing one of the cycle buttons next to the digital display If you do not select a cycle, the previous wash instructions wi~t be repeated Close the dishwasher door The cycle will begin automatically. If you forget an item, open the door slightly to interrupt the cyste and aitow steam to clear Press the "ON/OFF" button and load your missing items Close the door and press "ON/OFF" again The cycle will resume from where it was interrupted Ask a Bosch Technician BoSCh.JuslAnswer.com 13 Bosch Technicians Are Online~ Current Wait Time: 5 Minutes Serious Coin If ~ d~'t think money can~ Rela~ed Ads Dishwasher Repair Related Articles & Videos Bosch Dishwasher Leak Repair Bosch Dishwasher Installation Instmctions How to Identil} Bosch Dishwashers http://www.ehow.com/how_7761613_instructions-bosch-dishwashers.html 2/10/2011 Instructions for Bosch Dishwashers] eHow.com Page 2 of 2 References Photo Credit Jupiterimages/Photos corn/Getty Images More Home & Garden Fans FOLLOW US Post a Comment Post th~s comment to my Facebook Profile http://www, ehow.com/how_7761613 instructions-bosch-dishwashers.html 2/10/2011